Service Manual For XL-300 With ISE-V2019.01

Service Manual
For
Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer
Document Version: 2019.01
Last Updated: December 26, 2019
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GMBH, Mallaustrasse 69 – 73, 68219, Mannheim, Germany

Service Manual XL-300
Foreword
This manual is organized in a progressive sequence for easy study and reference. It is an
instructional aide to provide a reference for easy servicing and maintenance of the
analyzer. It contains detailed description of the analyzer features, specifications, PCB
layouts, wiring diagrams, trouble shooting and replacement procedures.
Use of this manual along with proper training will ensure better serviceability,
maintenance, and trouble free analyzer operation with optimum performance.
Before servicing the analyzer, service engineer should:
1. Read and understand this manual.
2. Be trained by authorized person.
3. Be familiar with the operation of the analyzer.
Keep this manual in an easily accessible place.
ii
Legal Information
All rights are reserved by manufacturer of this product.
Manufacturer is the copyright owner of this document.
The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice and without legal
obligation.
This document and the information herein are provided for the sole use of the intended
recipient(s) and for information purposes only.
This document contains contents which are the confidential and proprietary information of
the manufacturer.
This document cannot be modified, reproduced, translated, or transmitted in any form or

by any means for any purpose, without prior written permission from the manufacturer.
No part of this document can be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part, without prior
written permission from the manufacturer.
iii
Contents
1. Safety Information......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1. Safety Instructions ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Warning Labels.................................................................................................... 1-2
2. Installation Conditions.................................................................................................. 2-1
3. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1. Operating Principle .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1. Measurement and Photometry ................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry .......................................................................... 3-2
3.2. Sequence of Operation ........................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1. Measurement Operation Table................................................................................... 3-4
4. Technical Specification ................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1. General Specifications ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1. Installation Conditions ................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2. Sampling Unit ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.3. Reagent Unit .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4. Reaction Unit.............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.5. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit........................................................................ 4-5
4.1.6. Data Processing ......................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.7. Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Unit .............................................................................. 4-6
4.1.8. Computer Specifications ............................................................................................ 4-7
4.2. Technical Features of the System ....................................................................... 4-7
4.2.1. Salient Technical Features of the Analyzer................................................................ 4-7
4.2.2. Other Features of the Analyzer .................................................................................. 4-8
4.3. Equipment Overview.......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1. Analyzer View with Dome Open............................................................................... 4-10
4.3.2. Top View of the Analyzer with Main Components.................................................... 4-11
4.3.3. Front View ................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.4. Left Side View .......................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.5. Right Side View ........................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.6. Rear View of the Analyzer........................................................................................ 4-13
5. Pre-installation .............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1. Floor Requirements ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Electrical Requirements ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.3. Site Requirement ................................................................................................. 5-2
5.3.1. Environmental Requirements ..................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2. External Interferences ................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.3. Proper Room Lighting ................................................................................................ 5-3
6. Installing Analyzer......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1. Basic Operational Information.............................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1. Procedure to install the Analyzer................................................................................ 6-1
6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.3. Inspections and Accessories Checklist ................................................................ 6-4
6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer........................................................... 6-8
6.4.1. Installing Sample Tray and Reagent Tray .................................................................. 6-8
6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous, and Waste Cans ................................ 6-8
6.4.3. Interconnection Details between Computer & Analyzer ........................................... 6-13
iv
6.4.4. Test Loader Device Connecting to Analyzer PC ...................................................... 6-15

6.5. Equipment Startup Procedure............................................................................ 6-20
6.6. Software Installation Procedure ......................................................................... 6-21
6.6.1. System Configuration ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.6.2. Pre-requisite ............................................................................................................. 6-21
6.6.3. Installing MultiXL Software ....................................................................................... 6-34
6.6.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-50
6.6.5. Database Utility Options........................................................................................... 6-55
6.6.6. Installing Team Viewer ............................................................................................. 6-64
6.6.7. Accessing MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-67
6.7. Password Recovery Procedure ......................................................................... 6-70
6.7.1. Steps Performed by the Operator ............................................................................ 6-70
6.7.2. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer ............................................................... 6-71
6.7.3. Main Menu Software Layout..................................................................................... 6-72
6.8. Display Language Settings ................................................................................ 6-75
7. Relocation ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the Analyzer ...................................... 7-2
7.2. Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System..................................................... 7-2
7.3. Packing the Analyzer ........................................................................................... 7-5
7.4. Decontamination Certificate................................................................................. 7-7
8. Functional Description ................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1. Identification of the Main Components................................................................. 8-1
8.2. Functionality of Each Unit .................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1. Sample Handling System ........................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2. Reagent Handling System.......................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.3. Reaction Tray (RCT) ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.2.4. RGT Cooling Unit ..................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5. Photometer Unit ....................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.6. Mixing Stirrer Unit..................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.7. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) ..................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.8. Liquid Level Sensing (Float Sensors)....................................................................... 8-13
8.2.9. Probe vertical obstructing detection Sensor – VOD ................................................. 8-14
8.3. Test Loader Device............................................................................................ 8-14
9. Electronic Circuit Description ...................................................................................... 9-1
9.1. Block Diagram – 230V Model .............................................................................. 9-2
9.2. Block Diagram – 110V Model .............................................................................. 9-3
9.3. BKPL PCB ELS22014R0 ..................................................................................... 9-4
9.4. XLADC PCB ELS22003R4.1 ............................................................................... 9-7
9.5. XLROBO PCB ELS22013R2 ............................................................................. 9-10
9.6. ROBO ADC PCB ELS22035R2.1/ R3 / R4 ........................................................ 9-17
9.6.1. ARM7 based ROBO ADC PCB Programming Procedure........................................ 9-21
9.7. Opto Sensor PCB ELS22024R0 ........................................................................ 9-38
9.8. Step Arm PCB ELS22011R0 ............................................................................. 9-44
9.9. Step Tray PCB ELS22010R0............................................................................. 9-49
9.10. AC Drive PCB ELS22009R2/R3 ...................................................................... 9-55
9.11. DC Drive PCB ELS22002 R1/R2/R3 ............................................................... 9-60
9.12. Lamp Power Supply PCB ELS22004R1 OR SMPS 12V:5A – 12V:6A ............ 9-64
9.13. RS232 Isolator PCB ELS22030R2 .................................................................. 9-65
v
9.14. LLS PCB ELS52009R5 / ELS52010R4 ........................................................... 9-68

9.15. New LLS PCB ELS22036R2.1 / ELS52023R0 ................................................ 9-71
9.16. USB Connector PCB Assembly ELLC2003R6................................................. 9-73
9.17. Connector Distribution PCB ELS22012R2....................................................... 9-73
9.18. Float Sensor PCB ELS22037R1...................................................................... 9-76
9.19. Canmax Support PCB ELS52022R1/ R2......................................................... 9-77
9.20. Sleep mode PCB ELS62033R1/R2 ................................................................. 9-78
9.21. Photometer PCB ELXLV2R1 ........................................................................... 9-80
9.22. POS1 PCB ELS22006/R3/R4 .......................................................................... 9-81
9.23. Regulator PCB ELS22032R1 (+/- 15V)............................................................ 9-82
9.24. Regulator PCB ELS22032 R1 +/- 5V: LLS Supply).......................................... 9-83
9.25. SEN3 PCB ELS22031R2................................................................................. 9-83
9.26. IoT PCI-E Modem PCB.................................................................................... 9-84
10. Electrical Wiring Diagram ......................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. Fuse Rating ..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2. WDXL001 Input Mains Power Distribution 220VAC......................................... 10-3
10.3. WDXL024: Input Mains Power Distribution-110V AC ...................................... 10-5
10.4. ISE 3 Channel Wiring Diagram ........................................................................ 10-7
10.5. WDXL029 ISE 4 Channel Wiring Diagram (Mains 230VAC)............................ 10-8
10.6. WDXL029A ISE 4 Channel Wiring Diagram (Mains 110VAC) ......................... 10-9
10.7. WDXL003 Reagent Cooling Wiring Diagram ................................................. 10-10
10.8. WDXL004 Mains Transformer TX 1 Power Distribution ................................. 10-11
10.9. WDXL005 Mains Transformer TX 2 Power Distribution (w/o LMPS) ............. 10-12
10.10. WDXL006: +5V SMPS Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 10-14
10.11. WDXL007 PC Interface Communication Diagram (with USB BAFO-810) ... 10-15
10.12. WDXL007A PC Interface Communication Diagram (with Serial Port) ......... 10-16
10.13. WDXL008: Stepper Motors Power Supply ................................................... 10-18
10.14. 12V Lamp Power Supply Wiring Connections (With LMPS PCB)................ 10-19
10.15. WDXL009:12V Lamp Power Supply Wiring (With 12V/5A SMPS & Sleep mode)
................................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.16. WDXL010 DCDPS2 PCB Wiring Connection (With Float Sensor)............... 10-21
10.17. WDXL010:DCDPS2 PCB Wiring Connection (Old PCB) ............................. 10-22
10.18. WDXL011 AC Drive Card Wiring Connections ............................................ 10-23
10.19. WDXL012: PCB Housing Wiring Connection............................................... 10-24
10.20. WDXL014 CNDS PCB Wiring Connections (With Float Sensor) ................. 10-29
10.21. WDXL014: CNDS PCB Wiring Connections (With Load Cell) ..................... 10-30
10.22. WDXL015 DI Water Pressure Tank Heater Wiring Diagram (Thermostat) .. 10-31
10.23. WDXL016 Float Sensor PCB Wiring Diagram ............................................. 10-32
10.24. WGPT Board with Load cell platform ........................................................... 10-33
10.25. WDXL017: WGPT PCB Wiring Diagram (Use with Load cell Platform) ....... 10-34
10.26. WDXL047: Regulator PCB +/-15V Wiring Diagram ..................................... 10-35
10.27. WDXLV205: Regulator PCB +/- 5V Wiring Diagram .................................... 10-36
10.28. WDXL048: ARM OPTO & LLS Cable Wiring ............................................... 10-37
10.29. WDXLV206: Canmax Barcode PCB Wiring ................................................. 10-38
10.30. Microscan Barcode Assembly (Only for Closed System)............................. 10-39
10.31. WDXLV203 Sleep Mode PCB Wiring........................................................... 10-40
10.32. WDXLV201: R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with ELS22036R2.1....................... 10-42
vi
10.33. WDXLV201: R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with ELS52023R0.......................... 10-43

10.34. WDXLV202: SPT ARM Probe with ELS22036R2.1 PCB............................. 10-44
10.35. WDXLV202: SPT ARM Probe - Dual with ELS52023R0 PCB ..................... 10-45
10.36. WDXL25: Transformer TX3: Wiring Diagram............................................... 10-46
10.37. ROBO ADC PCB Assy. Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10-47
10.38. Syringe Valve Assy: Burkert ........................................................................ 10-48
10.39. R1PP/R2PP Syringe Electrical Assembly .................................................... 10-48
10.40. SPP Syringe Electrical Assembly ................................................................ 10-49
10.41. Red LED Indicator Electrical Assembly........................................................ 10-49
10.42. Green LED Indicator Electrical Assembly .................................................... 10-50
10.43. Pressure Tank Assembly ............................................................................. 10-51
10.44. Float Sensor Buzzer Elect Assembly ........................................................... 10-51
10.45. Motor Electrical Assembly............................................................................ 10-52
10.46. Stepper Motor HS200 2221 0070 AF04 Assy. ............................................. 10-53
10.47. Rocker switch Assy.- Arcolectric 8650 ......................................................... 10-54
10.48. Rocker switch Assy.- Arcolectric 8650 ......................................................... 10-55
10.49. RGT Tray Window Heater Electrical Assy. ELXLV2009 .............................. 10-56
10.50. KEYTO Syringe Electrical Assy. 500uL FSPXL704 R2................................ 10-57
10.51. KEYTO Syringe Electrical Assy. 100uL FSPXL705 R2................................ 10-58
10.52. Barcode - Leuze Electrical Assy. CR100M2R2_ RGT_FSPXK720_R0 ....... 10-59
10.53. Cable Assy.from Roboadc pcb to Buzzer for Dome-CWXLV244................. 10-60
10.54. Cable Assy.from Roboadc pcb to Dome Level 1,2 Sensor-CWXLV243 ...... 10-61
10.55. Reed SW Sensor for Dome Interlock ELXLV2010....................................... 10-61
10.56. RGT Cooling Fan Electrical Assy FXPXL721 .............................................. 10-62
10.57. RGT Peltier Elecrical Assy FXPXL722......................................................... 10-63
10.58. Wiring Diagram for Dome Interface WDXLV211.......................................... 10-64
11. Mechanical Description ............................................................................................ 11-1
11.1. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Arm Assembly.......................................... 11-1
11.2. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Dilutor ...................................................... 11-2
11.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly........................................................................ 11-3
11.4. Sample Mixing Unit .......................................................................................... 11-4
11.5. Sample Transport Assembly............................................................................ 11-5
11.6. Reagent Transport Assembly .......................................................................... 11-6
11.7. Reaction Tray (RCT) Assembly ....................................................................... 11-7
11.8. Photometer Assembly...................................................................................... 11-8
12. Hydraulic Description ............................................................................................... 12-1
12.1. Hydraulic System Operation ............................................................................ 12-1
12.2. Valve and Pump Functions .............................................................................. 12-1
12.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit ........................................................................................ 12-2
13. Maintenance............................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1. Maintenance Intervals...................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1. Daily Maintenance.................................................................................................. 13-2
13.1.2. Weekly Maintenance .............................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.3. Quarterly Maintenance ........................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.4. Annual Maintenance............................................................................................... 13-5
13.2. Cleaning the External Surfaces ....................................................................... 13-5
13.3. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Probes Maintenance ................................ 13-6
vii
13.4. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Syringe Maintenance ............................... 13-7

13.5. Barcode Reader............................................................................................... 13-7
13.6. Sample Transport ............................................................................................ 13-8
13.7. Reagent Transport ........................................................................................... 13-8
13.8. Cuvette Reaction Transport ............................................................................. 13-9
13.8.1. Individual Cuvettes ................................................................................................. 13-9
13.9. Cuvette Rinsing Unit ...................................................................................... 13-10
13.10. Stirrer Unit.................................................................................................... 13-10
13.11. Cleaning Procedure for DI Water and Waste Can ....................................... 13-10
13.11.1. DI Water Can...................................................................................................... 13-11
13.11.2. Waste Can.......................................................................................................... 13-11
13.12. Trolley, Computer, Keyboard & Printer ........................................................ 13-12
13.12.1. Computer............................................................................................................ 13-12
13.12.2. Monitor ............................................................................................................... 13-12
13.12.3. Printer................................................................................................................. 13-13
13.12.4. Analyzer Fan ...................................................................................................... 13-13
13.12.5. Optics ................................................................................................................. 13-13
13.13. Replacement Schedule for Spares and Consumable .................................. 13-14
13.14. Preventative Maintenance ........................................................................... 13-14
13.14.1. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble ............................................................... 13-14
13.14.2. Equipment Malfunction....................................................................................... 13-18
13.15. Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................... 13-20
13.15.1. Auto Span........................................................................................................... 13-21
13.15.2. Manual Span ...................................................................................................... 13-22
13.15.3. Wash Screen...................................................................................................... 13-22
13.15.4. ISE...................................................................................................................... 13-31
13.15.5. Auto Maintenance .............................................................................................. 13-37
13.16. Service Check Screen ................................................................................. 13-40
13.17. Hibernate/Wake-Up ..................................................................................... 13-46
13.18. Archive Data ................................................................................................ 13-48
13.18.2. Archiving Data .................................................................................................... 13-50
13.18.3. Viewing Archived Data ....................................................................................... 13-51
13.18.4. Observations ...................................................................................................... 13-53
14. Accessories, Spares, and Consumables................................................................. 14-1
15. Introduction to ISE Module....................................................................................... 15-1
15.1. Part Location.................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2. ISE Technical Specification ............................................................................. 15-5
15.3. ISE Measurement Theory ................................................................................ 15-6
15.4. Electrodes and Reagents Used ....................................................................... 15-7
15.5. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun.................................................................................. 15-8
15.6. Storage and Usage of the Reagents................................................................ 15-8
15.7. Turning Off the Power...................................................................................... 15-9
15.8. Maintenance .................................................................................................... 15-9
15.8.1. Shutdown Procedure.............................................................................................. 15-9
15.9. ISE Calibration............................................................................................... 15-10
15.9.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration............................................................................... 15-11
15.10. Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 15-13
15.11. Acceptable Calibration Ranges.................................................................... 15-14
15.12. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 15-14
viii
15.13. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack ................................................ 15-17

15.14. Error Message for ISE Unit .......................................................................... 15-19
16. Preventive Maintenance............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1. Servicing a Customer Site ............................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1. Verifying Proper Room Temperature ..................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2. Verifying Line Voltage ............................................................................................ 16-2
16.1.3. Verifying Proper Grounding.................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.4. Verifying Proper Ventilation.................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.5. Verifying External Interferences ............................................................................. 16-2
16.1.6. Verifying Proper Room Lighting ............................................................................. 16-2
16.1.7. Verifying Proper Laboratory Cleanliness (Practice) ............................................... 16-3
16.1.8. Maintaining an Error Log Book............................................................................... 16-3
17. Replacement and Alignment Procedure.................................................................. 17-1
17.1. Fuse Replacement-Mains 220V AC................................................................. 17-1
17.2. Fuse Replacement – Mains 110V AC .............................................................. 17-2
17.3. Lamp Replacement.......................................................................................... 17-3
17.4. Probe Replacement ......................................................................................... 17-5
17.5. Sample, Reagent 1, and Reagent 2 Syringe Replacement Procedure ............ 17-6
17.6. RGT Temperature Calibration Procedure ........................................................ 17-8
17.7. Alignment Procedure for RGT Barcode (Canmax)......................................... 17-17
17.8. BAFO setting for Low Speed Procedure ........................................................ 17-19
18. Pressure Settings...................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1. Digital Pressure Indicator................................................................................. 18-1
18.2. Access for Different Settings............................................................................ 18-1
18.3. HL/LO Pressure Setting Procedure ................................................................. 18-2
18.4. Mode Configuration ......................................................................................... 18-3
18.5. Error Check during Run ................................................................................... 18-4
18.6. Programming Procedure: Pressure Sensor Panasonic DP 102....................... 18-6
19. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 19-1
19.1. Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................... 19-8
20. Error Code List .......................................................................................................... 20-1
21. Appendix .................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1. TBM Image Installation for Windows Embedded 7 .......................................... 21-1
21.1.1. Scenario ................................................................................................................. 21-1
21.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC.................................................................. 21-1
21.1.3. Identifying Various Drives....................................................................................... 21-6
21.2. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 21-9
21.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration ........................................................................... 21-10
21.3. Copy Data to External USB Storage .............................................................. 21-12
21.3.1. Enabling Touch Screen ........................................................................................ 21-13
22. Revision History ........................................................................................................ 22-1
ix
Document Conventions
Before reading the manual, please get familiarized with the following icons used in this
manual.
Icons Warning About
Bio-hazard
Electric Shock
High Temperature
Injury
Warnings and Caution
Bio-logical Risks
Batch Code and Serial

Number
Notes, Usage, Tips, and

Additional information
x
1. Safety Information
Before operating the analyzer, please read the safety information given in the
manual
1.1. Safety Instructions

During operation, do not touch auto sampler unit, reagent
container unit, nozzles and any other moving mechanical parts
in the analyzer. During operation, shut cover all the time.
Never touch patients' samples and analyzer components with

bare hands to prevent operator from possible infection. Handle
SPT nozzle, RPT nozzle, reaction cells, wash nozzles, waste
nozzles and Stirrer paddle in the same way. Always wear
medical rubber gloves to keep skin from direct contact with
patients' samples.
Give special consideration to prevent skin and mucous
membrane from contact with reagents to prevent operator from
possible infection and chemical injuries. Wear medical rubber
gloves, goggles, etc. to prevent skin and mucous membrane
from contact with reagents.
The contact with the wastes such as used reaction cells and
solutions may cause infection. Handle them with gloved hands
without exception. Follow the national or local laws and rules
when they are thrown out. There are two kinds of liquid wastes
drained from this analyzer, i.e. high- and low-concentrated
wastes.
The access to the conductive parts within the analyzer may
cause serious electric shock. When removing parts, make sure
to shut off the power supply. Leave any maintenance and repair
of electrical parts inside the equipment to qualified service
personnel.
Never leave reagent bottles on the working table (upper surface
inside the analyzer). Careless handling of reagent bottles may
cause tumble and leak.
Read the statements of virtues that came with reagents prior to
their use.
Do not make a modification to the analyzer.
The old halogen lamp should be replaced with the new lamp
only after the analyzer has been kept off for 30 minutes, so as to
avoid danger of burns.
1-1
1.2. Warning Labels

The following warning labels are affixed on the analyzer on different places that
are the potentially hazardous.
LABELS PLACES
On the 4-piece Top Cover Plates
On the 4-piece Top Cover Plates
On the top cover plates
On the Bio-hazardous waste can

(10 Liter)
On Waste Can (20 Liter)
On Cleaning Solution Can (10 Liter)
On DI Water Can (20 Liter)
1-2
2. Installation Conditions
The user is requested to read this instruction before using the analyzer for the first
time and becomes acquainted with how to operate the analyzer.
Only qualified personnel should use the analyzer.
1. Precaution to be taken while installing the analyzer.
a. Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash.
b. Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt or
sulphur, etc.
c. Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during
transportation), etc.
d. Do not install the analyzer at the place adjacent to the storage room of
chemicals or the place where any gas is likely to be generated.
e. Pay attention to frequency, voltage and permissible current (or power
consumption).
f. Connect the analyzer to the operational computer using accompanying
LAN cable.
When the other cable is used, this may cause the
analyzer to suffer from disturbing noise, exert an
adverse effect on its surroundings or get incorrect
measurement results.
2. Precaution to be taken before operating the analyzer.
a. Check the power supply frequency, voltage and current capacity (power
consumption).
b. Ensure that the analyzer is correctly and well grounded.
c. Ensure that all the necessary electrical cables are correctly connected.
 Power cord between Mains and Analyzer
 Serial cable between Analyzer and Computer
 Float sensor cables with CANs
d. Check that the contact conditions of switches and indicators are
appropriate and that the analyzer is ready to be activated correctly.
Extreme care must be taken not to result in misdiagnosis or pose any
danger to the analyzer or human body when the analyzer in conjunction
with other equipment.
2-1
e. Wipe the nozzle tips of SPT and RPT several times with cloth or alike
with rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not
forget to put medical rubber gloves or alike on. Pay attention to prevent
bare skins of hands or arms from being touched by or pricked with the
nozzle tip.
3. The caution should always be exercised when replacing the halogen lamp.
a. Replace the halogen lamp by a new one after a lapse of 30 minutes after
the analyzer is turned off, to avoid the danger of burns. Keep hands
away from the glass part of the new halogen lamp. Make sure that there
is no crack or breakage in the glass part.
4. The following cautions should be exercised during the operation of analyzer:
a. Pay attention not to exceed the time and volume necessary for
diagnosis.
b. Keep monitoring the behavior of the whole system in order to detect any
malfunction.
c. Take immediate corrective measures including shutdown of operation
when any malfunction is detected in the analyzer.
d. Avoid possibilities of any direct access by the patients.
5. The following cautions should be exercised after the use of the analyzer:
a. Turn off the power after every operation so that control is restored to its
previous state as directed.
b. Do not remove the line cord plugs from receptacles by pulling the cords
so that no undue stress is developed in the cords.
c. Wipe the nozzle tips of SPT and RPT several times with cloth or alike
with rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not
forget to put medical rubber gloves. Pay attention to prevent bare skins
of hands or arms from being touched by or pricked with the nozzle tip.
d. Pay attention to the storage area.
i) Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash.
ii) Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust and air containing salt,
sulfur, etc.
iii) Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during
transportation), etc.
iv) Avoid areas adjacent to the storage room of chemicals or areas that
are likely to generate gasses. Avoid areas that are likely to be subject to
inclination, vibration and shock.
2-2
e. Organize and store parts and cords associated with the analyzer after
they have been cleaned.
f. Keep the analyzer clean not to cause any inconvenience to the next use.
6. In the event of trouble, do not fiddle with the analyzer. You must contact the
authorized service personnel for troubleshooting.
7. Maintenance and checks.
a. It is important for the analyzer and its associated parts to be periodically
checked. For example:
 Arm probes
 Cuvette rinsing unit (laundry)
 Stirrers
 Syringes
b. Ensure that the analyzer operates normally and correctly, when it is
reused after being kept unused for some time.
8. The following cautions should be taken when using and handling the
reagents:
a. After unpacking the reagents, be sure not to allow dust, dirt or bacteria
to come in touch with the reagent.
b. Do not use expired reagents.
c. Handle a reagent gently to avoid formation of bubbles.
d. Take care not to spill the reagent. If it spills, wipe it off immediately using
a wet cloth.
e. Follow other instructions described in the package insert on each
reagent.
f. If a reagent happens to enter your eye, wash it off immediately using
plenty of water, and take medical treatment at once.
g. If you swallow it inadvertently, call for a doctor immediately and drink
plenty of water.
Some reagents are strong acids or alkalis. Exercise great care
so that your hands and clothing do not come into contact with
reagents. If your hands or clothing come into contact with either
reagent, immediately wash them off with soap and water. If a
reagent comes into contact with your eye(s), immediately rinse
with water for at least 15 minutes.
9. Prohibit any alteration and/or modification to the analyzer without
permission by manufacturer.
2-3
10. The following precautions should be taken for preventing infection due to
sample handling:
Do not touch the samples, mixtures and waste liquids with bare
hands. Be sure to wear gloves to protect you from infection. In case
any samples come in contact with your skin, thoroughly rinse the
area that came in contact with the sample and consult a physician.
Immediately wipe off any contaminants from the system.
11. The following precautions should be taken for disposing the bio-hazardous
waste:
Treat the drain water as infectious waste. Collect the drain water in
reserve can and allow it to be disposed of by expert distributors.
The analyzer, designed with the needs of modern clinical laboratories in mind,
easily fits into any laboratory environment. The analyzer is a fully automated,
random access, time optimized, and patient sequential discrete computerized
chemistry analyzer. Once programmed, it is a walk-away system.
The analyzer features user-friendly operation with minimum operator intervention.
It is a highly sophisticated system and therefore it is of utmost importance that the
operator and service personnel read the instructions and becomes familiar with the
operation theory.
The working unit comprises of a State of the art Photometer and sophisticated
robotics combined with an Operating Console and Data processing unit. The DPU
provides a schedule to the analyzer, after executing the schedule as per the
programmed sequence, the photometric results are then sent to the CPU where
they are processed, stored and then reported.
The robotics consist of Sample arm, Reagent 1 arm, Reagent 2 arm, Stirrer
assembly, Cuvette Rinsing Unit, Sample tray, Reagent tray, Reaction tray and
three Digital Dilutor's one each for sample, Reagent 1 and 2.
Barcode identification system is provided for both, reagents and samples.
2-4
3. Introduction
3.1. Operating Principle
3.1.1. Measurement and Photometry
The analyzer is an automated clinical biochemistry analyzer based on the principle
of photometry, it measures light transmittance at various wavelengths.
White light as we see it is actually composed of several colors. This becomes
evident, when we pass a beam of white light trough a prism. If the light emerging
from the prism on the opposite side were allowed to fall on a screen, we would see
a wide spectrum of colors, beginning with red on the top and ending with violet at
the bottom. The colors visible in between are in the order of indigo, blue, green,
yellow, and orange.
Incident or white light contains the entire spectrum, objects that appear colored,
absorb light at a particular wavelength and reflect others, thus giving different
colors. That is color is a function of its wavelength.
Light having a wavelength of less than 400 nm is termed Ultraviolet, whereas light
having a wavelength greater than 800 nm is described as Infrared, both ultraviolet
and infrared lights are invisible to the human eyes. Light corresponding to
wavelengths between 400 nm and 800 nm is visible to the human eye and is
termed as visible light.
3-1
3.1.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry

Beer’s Law
If light is allowed to pass through a colored solution, the solution will absorb some
light while the rest of it will be transmitted. The amount of light absorbed is
proportional to the nature, concentration and color of the solution. (Light absorbed
Concentration of the solution).
Lambert’s Law
The light absorbed by the colored solution is directly proportional to the light path
of the color solution (diameter of the cuvette): that is if the cuvette diameter is
doubled, the light absorbed will be doubled.
Since the total incident light = light absorbed + light transmitted, it follows that:
Therefore as the absorbed light (Absorbance) increases, the transmitted light will
decrease
As we increase the concentration of the colored solution, the light absorbed
increases, and we find that the transmittance varies inversely and logarithmically
with concentration.
3-2
3.2. Sequence of Operation

The instrument works on the principle of light photometry combined with the best
mechanics for sampling. The sample under test is sampled into the cuvette, which
is then read at defined time intervals to find out optical densities. The entire
operation can be divided into the following sequence.
1. Getting ready for operation
2. Cuvette rinsing (cleaning)
3. Reagent 1 addition
4. Sample addition
5. Stirrer 1 mixing
6. Reading and reporting
7. Reagent 2 addition (optional)
8. Stirrer 2 mixing (optional)
9. Reading and reporting
10. Cleaning
3-3
3.2.1. Measurement Operation Table

The measurement flow is given below:
Time Cycle Analyzer Action Time Cycle Analyzer Action
(Minutes) Number (Minutes) Number
0.00 0/60 Dry the cuvette + 5.00 30 Measure reaction
Add Reagent1 absorbance
0.10 1 Measure reaction 5.10 31 Measure reaction
absorbance absorbance
0.20 2 Sample addition + 5.20 32 Measure reaction
Stirring + Measure absorbance
reaction mixture
absorbance
2.10 13 Reagent2 addition + 7.10 43 Measure reaction
Stirring + Measure absorbance
reaction mixture
absorbance
3-4
absorbance absorbance + Final
result reporting
3.40 22 Measure reaction 8.40 52 Empty cuvette
absorbance contents + Add
detergent
absorbance contents + Add DI
water
water
water
water
4.30 27 Measure reaction 9.30 57
absorbance
4.40 28 Measure reaction 9.40 58 Measure cuvette
absorbance blank absorbance
4.50 29 Measure reaction 9.50 59 Empty cuvette water
absorbance
3-5
4. Technical Specification
The specification details are subject to change without notice.
4.1. General Specifications

Item Description
Throughput 600 (with ISE) or 360 Photometric tests per hour.
System Type Discrete, automated, random access, patient prioritized, 1 and 2
Reagent system.
Sample Serum
Urine
Others
Measurement Principle Latex Turbidimetric Immunoassay
Turbidimetric Immunoassay
Colorimetry (Rate/End Point)
Ion Selective Electrodes (optional)
Applicable Analytes  Photometric assays
 Enzyme, lipid, protein, sugar, nitrides, inorganic substances,
complements and others
 Turbidimetric assays
 IgG, IgA, IgM, C3, C4, RF, CRP, ASO, Transferrin and others
Test Method Absolute measurement
Relative measurement
ISE (optional)
On Board Tests 50 test items maximum; 54 test items with ISE
Programmable 96 photometric tests
parameters 10 calculation items
Serum indices
ISE tests (Optional)
Assay Modes 1-Point
2-Point
Rate-A
Rate-B
ISE (optional)
Reaction Temperature 37 °C
Temperature stability: ± 0.2 °C
Serum Information Degree of Lipemia, Icterus and Hemolysis can be measured and
displayed
Reaction Time Depends on the number of reagents used
For 1 step assay (using R1): 510 seconds
4-1
For 2 step assay (using R1 and R2): 1st reaction 120 seconds (2
minutes) + 2nd reaction 390 seconds
Test Selection Setting of tests one by one or with profile key for each sample
Group order entry is possible
Setting from host computer via interface (optional)
Calibration Multiple calibrators can be used for multipoint curves
Mixers Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers
Maintenance Maintenance actions: Wash, Renew cell water, Measure cell blank,
ISE maintenance
Barcode Identification Sample tube barcode ID (NW7, code 39, code 128, 2 of 5
interleaved, 2 of 5 standard, ISBT-code 128)
Reagent barcode ID (ITF)
Water Supply Unit Water consumption: 10 liters/hour
Quality Control Unlimited control parameters
Stand-by 24 hours stand-by is allowed when used
30 minute warm-up time
Safety Mechanism Vertical obstruction detection
Noise Level Less than 65 dB
4.1.1. Installation Conditions

Item Description
Power source/ AC 220 V ± 10%, 50Hz± 1 Hz or AC 110 V ± 10%, 60Hz± 1 Hz.
consumption Power consumption: 800 VA.
Water Supply De-ionized water consumption: 10 liter/hour.
Drainage Used sample (concentrated waste solution) and washed sample.
(diluted waste) are to be drained separately.
Ambient Temperature 15 – 30 °C.
Variation during operation: less than ± 2 °C per hour.
Relative Humidity 40 – 80% free from water dew formation.
Dimensions 570 (W) x 895 (L) x 975 (H) mm
Weight Approximately 150 kg.
4.1.2. Sampling Unit

Item Description
Sample (Tubes/Cups) Primary tubes of 5, 7 or 10 ml and Sample/Standard cups.
Sample Container Blood collection tube 10 ml (16 x 100 mm), 7 ml (14.5 x 84 mm), 5 ml
(13 x 75 mm).
Adaptors will be provided for 5 and 7 ml tubes.
Cup: Micro-cup 0.5 ml, Standard cup 2 ml.
Sample cups can be placed on the 7 ml tubes.
Sample Placement Sample Tray
 Inner rim: 25 positions for placing barcode tubes.
 Outer rim: 25 positions for placing barcode tubes.
4-2
Standard Tray
 Inner rim: 12 positions for placing Sample/Standard cups
without barcode.
 Outer rim: 20 positions for placing Sample/Standard cups
without barcode
STAT Samples Place anywhere on the Sample Tray / Standard Tray
STAT samples are measured preferentially
Interrupt permitted even during analysis
Sample Volume 3-70 (adjustable in 0.1 μl step).
Pipetting Mode Discharges set volume of sample into cuvette or the ISE module
(optional).
Sampling Probe Micro-pipette with level sensor.
Washing solution.
Outside: De-ionized water.
Inside: De-ionized water.
Equipped with vertical obstruction detection facility to prevent probe
crash.
Sample Dilution Dilution ratio: 3 to 150 times.
A cuvette is used as dilution vessel.
Set amount of diluents is dispensed into a cuvette by reagent probe
and set amount of sample is dispensed into it by sample probe.
Dilution possible for repeat run.
Direct reduced/increased volume runs are also possible.
Repeat Run Auto execution according to abnormal marking and/or range over.
Reduced/increased volume repeat run also possible.
Sample Identification Sample barcode ID.
Position ID for non bar-coded.
4.1.3. Reagent Unit

Item Description
Type Turn table type reagent tray.
Reagent Tray Common reagent tray for reagent 1 and 2.
Reagent Cooling 8°C to 12 °C cooled with refrigeration unit.
Temperature
Reagent Placement Total 50 positions for placing reagent bottles (25 on the inner side and
25 on the outer side).
 Inner rim: 25 positions for 50 ml bottles.
 Outer rim: 25 positions for 20 ml bottles.
Reagent Bottles 20 ml and 50 ml
Reagent Dispensing Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepping motor.

R1 dispensing in the 0.5st cycle.
R2 dispensing in the 13th cycle.
Reagent Probe Micro-pipette with level sensor.
4-3
Outside washing solution: De-ionized water.

Inside washing solution: De-ionized water.
Equipped with vertical obstruction detection facility to prevent probe
crash.
Reagent Steps 1 step or 2 steps.
Reagent Volume R1: 50 — 300 (adjustable in 1 μl step).
R2: 10 — 200 (adjustable in 1 μl step).
Mixing Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.
Reagent Identification Position ID for non-bar-coded.
Reagent bar-code ID (optional).
Residual Volume Measured by level sensor and displayed on screen.
Information
Reagent Positions Total 50 positions which can be used for reagent 1 or 2.
Reagent Protection Reagent covers protection from evaporation, dust, and direct light.
4.1.4. Reaction Unit

Item Description
Type Turn table.
Reaction Tray Rotating tray.
60 permanent hard glass cuvettes.
Temperature control: Turn table direct heating.
Reaction Temperature 37 ± 0.2 °C
Cuvettes Reusable.
Number of reaction cuvettes: 60.
Dimensions: 6 x 5 mm.
Optical path length: 6 mm (factor to be fed for 10 mm).
Material: Hard glass
Reaction Volume Minimum: 200 μl
Maximum: 550 μl
Reaction Liquid Mixing Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.
Cuvette Washing Type: By the automatic washing system.
The reaction waste is aspirated out, then cuvettes are washed by
washing solution and repeatedly by DI water, finally residual liquid is
removed.
Washing solution container: Detergent: 10 liters.
Reaction waste is collected into two waste cans (concentrated waste
and diluted waste) by pumps.
4-4
4.1.5. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit

Item Description
Photometry Optics Mono- and bi-chromatic measurement using holographic diffraction
grating.
Photometric System Multi-wavelength direct measurement of light after penetration into
reaction cuvettes (transmitted light).
Wavelength 12 Wavelengths: 340, 376, 415, 450, 480, 505, 546, 570, 600, 660, 700
& 750 nm.
Wavelength Per One or two wavelength.
Chemistry
Measurement interval Total 52 points.
Interval every 10 seconds for 10 second cycle time.
OD Range OD 0 – 3
Light path calculated as 10 mm.
Resolution 0.0001 OD.
Light Source Pre-aligned water cooled Halogen lamp (12V/20W).
Life expectancy 600 hours (approximate).
Grating Concave grating.
Detector Silicon photo-diode array.
Cell Blank Correction Corrected by water blank measured after cuvettes washing.
Minimum Reaction 200 µl
Liquid Volume
4.1.6. Data Processing

Item Description
Calibration Curve K-Factor, Linear (one point, multipoint, and point-to-point), Cubic
Spline, Exponential, 4P Calibration Logit-log, 5P Calibration Logit-log
Polynomial.
Multipoint curves up to 10 points.
One point correction (using Blank) to multi-point calibration line is
provided.
Auto-dilution for non linear curves.
Quality Control Within day as well as day-to-day X and X-R control diagram.
Mean, SD, %CV, R are calculated for each chemistry.
Repeat Run Auto execution according to abnormal marking or range over.
Reduced/increased volume repeat run also possible.
Monitor Function Reaction curve graphical display.
Calibration curve graphical display.
Operation status watching by run monitor.
Cuvette blank monitor.
Calculation Between Correlation correction factor (Y = aX + b).
Items Calculation by the formula.
Up to 10 calculated items can be programmed.
Each calculation item can include up to 3 chemistries.
4-5
Recalculation of results possible after modification in Calibration

Parameters or Test Parameters.
Data Storage Capacity Test results: Unlimited
Reaction curve: Unlimited.
Report/list Format Report generation: Patient wise, Date wise, Doctor name wise.
Lists: Pending run list, Repeat run list.
Backup Backup of following data is possible: Assay parameters, Calibration
data, Results, QC data, System parameters.
Special Treatment Sample blank correction.
Reagent blank correction.
Data Check Reference range check by age, sex, sample type.
Panic limit check.
Reaction mixture absorbance checks.
Antigen excess/prozone check (by reaction time course analysis
method).
Alarms and Notices Types of alarms: Erroneous operations, mechanical malfunction of
analyzer, erroneous test results.
Alarm level: Notice, temporary halt of analysis, suspension of analysis,
system stop.
Prompts on display and audible alarms.
Diagnostic Checks Mechanical movements and functional performance can be checked
through diagnostic menu.
Password Password protected access to selected menus.
Programmable Any number of photometric tests
Parameters Any number of calculation items
Serum indices
(Optional) 4 ISE tests (Na, K, Cl and Li).
4.1.7. Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Unit

Item Description
Type of measurement Ion selective electrode.
Direct measurement for Serum samples.
Urine sample diluted with urine diluents (on board, on Reagent Tray).
Sample types Serum, Urine (urine diluted 10 times on board for first determination).
Test items Na, K, Cl, Li
Measurement cycle Serum: 30 seconds/sample.
Urine: 40 seconds/sample.
4-6
4.1.8. Computer Specifications

A minimum specification for the system is shown in the table below. However, you
are recommended to use the most powerful system available to you.
Item Description
User interface Operating System:
hardware Windows 7 Professional 32 bit EN
Windows 10 Professional 32 / 64 bit EN
TBM OS of Windows-10 IoT LTSB 2016
CPU: Intel Core-2-duo Processor or higher
RAM: 4GB (minimum)
Hard disk: 500GB (minimum) or higher
Monitor: Color Monitor with 1024*768 resolution support, 17” & above
External drives: CD/DVD Writer
Printer: LaserJet / DeskJet Printer
System interface USB Port: [Minimum 6 ports, preferred 8 ports]
Network Ethernet
PCIe 1x slot
Serial Port:2 RS232 Ports
Mouse (USB preferred)
Keyboard (USB preferred)
In-built Speaker.
The specification details are subject to change without notice.
4.2. Technical Features of the System

4.2.1. Salient Technical Features of the Analyzer
 On board biohazard and regular waste management
 7 stage cuvette wash station
 2 stirrer for mixing reaction solution
 2 Reagent capability
 60 position cuvette rotor
 60 position reagent carousel
 50 positions to accommodate 20 ml and 50 ml Reagent bottles
 50 positions on sample tray to accommodate 5 ml, 7 ml and 10 ml tubes
4-7
 32 positions on standard tray to accommodate 2 ml cups.

 Throughput up to 360 tests per hour for photometric tests and 600 test per
hour with ISE
 Economical low reagent consumption
 Barcode identification for Sample tubes and Reagent Bottles
 On board reagent cooling
4.2.2. Other Features of the Analyzer

Advantages of the analyzer.
 Sample tray ─ Flexibility and convenience
The specially designed "Twin layered" sample disk of analyzer provides
unmatched flexibility and convenience
The sample tray has positions to accommodate up to 50 routine samples.
Samples tubes can be bar-coded or non bar-coded.
The standard tray has 32 positions (20 standards, 2 blanks, 2 ISE and 8
controls). For large batch of patient’s samples, the 32-position standard tray
can be replaced with the new tray, thereby maximizing the number of
sample positions.
Emergency samples can be loaded anywhere on the sample tray.
The sample tray accommodates standard tubes of 5, 7 or 10 ml sample
tubes on routine tray and 2 ml cups on standard tray.
 Reagent Tray ─ Offers a wide choice of on-board tests
The analyzer offers up to 50 single reagent bottles can be loaded at any
time. All reagents are refrigerated to ensure extended stability. The wide
choice of on board reagents eliminates the need for sample splitting and
cuts down the turnaround time of reporting.
 Economy ─ Quick returns without compromise
 The analyzer uses permanent hard glass cuvettes, thereby eliminating
recurring costs of disposable cuvettes. Low reagents requirement per test,
maximizes the number of tests per sample tray.
 Bar code identification system
 The bar-coded reagents and sample identification system provides sample
identification faster and accurate, minimizing operator’s programming time.
 Optical System ─ Ensures reliability of results
 The analyzer uses a high resolution, flat field, and optically corrected
diffraction grating to ensure high degree of photometric accuracy. The user
4-8
can select 12 available wavelengths, from 340 nm - 750 nm to cover the

entire clinical chemistry application range.
 The main features of the analyzer
 Unique soft start and stop of all mechanical assemblies, ensures smooth
operation and adds reliability.
 Software routines provide the user with all functions to run the analyzer.
 User-friendly graphic interface and easy to learn system operations.
 The probe's vertical obstruction detection (VOD) system, detects
obstructions, thereby protecting the probe from potential damage.
 Capacitive level sensing ensures accurate level detection.
 Bi-directional host computer interface capability.
 Instrument analytical features.
 Barcode identification system for Samples tubes and Reagent bottles
 50 position reagent tray with built-in cooling.
 Reagent and Sample identification through barcode reader.
 Capability to run 1 or 2 reagent chemistries.
 Instrument performance features
 Throughput of up to 360 tests per hour for Photometric tests.
 Throughput of 600 tests per hour with ISE.
 Automatic maintenance procedures on start of the day.
 Low reagent requirement per test.
 12 wavelength diffraction grating.
4-9
4.3. Equipment Overview

4.3.1. Analyzer View with Dome Open
4-10
4.3.2. Top View of the Analyzer with Main Components
4.3.3. Front View
4-11
4.3.4. Left Side View
4.3.5. Right Side View
4-12
4.3.6. Rear View of the Analyzer
Refer section 8.1 Identification of the Main components for more details.
4-13
5. Pre-installation
5.1. Floor Requirements
5.2. Electrical Requirements

Improper grounding to the analyzer bypasses important safety features
and may result in an electrical hazard.
 Voltage and Frequency
Single phase continuous stabilized AC 230/110 volts ± 5V, 50/60 Hz. The
analyzer comes equipped with a three-pin power cord. The type of cord and
plug depends on the source voltage for the system.
If an extreme and sudden voltage fluctuation exists then the use of an
online uninterrupted power supply is strongly recommended.
5-1
 Grounding
Perfect grounding must be provided at the power source with all applicable
local requirements (a grounded, 3 pin power plug only should be used).
 Plug Points
One 15 ampere and three numbers of 5 amp sockets must be available
near the analyzer.
(Four sockets are required, one each for the analyzer, computer monitor
and printer.
It is recommended that two extra sockets be provided near the analyzer, for
use by a measuring equipment or engineering tool if required while
servicing (example oscilloscope, soldering iron etc).
Heavy-duty electrical devices like air conditioners, refrigerators, and ovens-
etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the analyzer.
The 3 pin power cord plugs shipped with the analyzer,
computer, printer and monitor may not be compatible with
the local electrical sockets of some countries, to have these
procured from the local market prior to the installation.
5.3. Site Requirement

The proper location is an important consideration. A poor location can lead to
malfunction of the analyzer. Please follow the following environmental and
electrical suggestions to ensure the accuracy and precision of the analyzer.
This will also ensure a high level of operator and technical service
personals working comfort and safety.
5.3.1. Environmental Requirements

5.3.1.1. Room Temperature
 The recommended temperature of the laboratory should be 15 to 30 °C.
 There should not be a variation of more than 5 °C in room temperature per
hour.
 The relative humidity should be in between 40% to 80% and should be non
– condensing.
5.3.1.2. Proper Ventilation

 Make sure there is at least 0.5 meters of the space around the instrument
on all three sides, to enable proper ventilation.
 There should not be any stationary items or other objects in the vicinity that
hinder proper access to the analyzer.
5-2
 There should be no direct air from the air-conditioning system on to the

analyzer.
5.3.1.3. Dust Free Environment

Verify and ensure a dust free environment for analyzer, this is a small but very
important consideration when installing the analyzer.
5.3.1.4. Verifying Proper Voltage

With the help of a Voltmeter Measure the following AC Voltages on the mains
socket.
Test Points Expected Voltages
Phase and Neutral 220 or 110 Volts (+/- 10%)
Phase and Ground 220 or 110 Volts (+/- 10%)
Neutral and Ground Not more than 5 Volts
5.3.2. External Interferences

 Heavy-duty electrical devices like air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens,
centrifuges etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines or in the
close vicinity of the analyzer.
 The room should be free of vibrations from heavy duty devices like
centrifuges and compressors.
 The room should be free from strong magnetic fields caused by other
medical equipment, like CT Scans, MRI etc.
5.3.3. Proper Room Lighting

There should be sufficient room lighting, the lighting should be even, and there
should be no shadow areas, this problem can be eliminated by the use of multiple
light sources from diagonally opposite directions.
This will enable efficient operator use, and will give a clear visible access to the
internal components of the analyzer during operation and technical servicing.
5-3
6. Installing Analyzer
6.1. Basic Operational Information
6.1.1. Procedure to install the Analyzer
6.1.1.1. Receiving Instructions
The analyzer has been thoroughly tested before shipment and has been packed
carefully to prevent the damage during shipping and handling. Please follow these
following guidelines when you receive the analyzer:
1. Check to see that the arrows on the sides of the packages are pointing up.
If the arrows do not point up, make a remark about this on the invoice copy.
2. Visually inspect the outside of the package for rips, dents, or possible
shipping damage. Document any sign of damage on the bill of lading,
regardless of how insignificant it may appear. This is to protect your
interests.
3. Notify your service representative that the analyzer system and its
components have arrived.
4. Wait for your service representative to unpack the system and open the
packages.
5. Follow the unpacking and storage instructions provided on the outside of
the package. Special requirements such as refrigeration are clearly marked
on the outside of the cartons and will be included in the unpacking
instructions and pack inserts.
6.1.1.2. Warranty Information

All analyzers are warranted against defective materials or workmanship for a
period of one year commencing from the date of the shipment of the analyzer. This
warranty does not cover any defect, malfunction, or damage due to:
1. Accident, neglect or willful mistreatment of the product.
2. Failures to use, operate, service, or maintain the product in accordance with
the applicable Operator Manual and Service Manual.
3. Use of reagents or chemicals of corrosive nature, though the unit is an open
system allowing the use of any commercial reagents from any manufacturer
that are meant for such an automated clinical chemistry analyzer.
6-1
6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer

Unpacking of the analyzer should be performed by the trained
service engineer.
Unpack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you may damage the

accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
The analyzer is fully tested before the shipment and is packed carefully to prevent
any shipping damage. It is responsibility of customer to inspect all cartons upon
arrival and notify the carrier of any apparent damage.
The analyzer is shipped in two wooden carton boxes; one contains the main unit
and other has computer trolley with accessories.
The main unit and accessories are packed in separate cartons. Reagents and
other additional accessories may be packed in another carton. The representative
is responsible for unpacking, installing and initial setting up of the analyzer:
The instrument is shipped, mounted on “Z” brackets; the “Z”
bracket and the footrest may support the entire weight of the
instrument.
Cautiously open the bolts of the “Z” bracket to prevent any
personal injury.
Follow the procedure to unpack the analyzer:
1. Remove the nuts and bolts that hold the side ply of the analyzer box and
carefully remove the side ply – preferably front ply and the rest as one unit.
2. Remove the buffers and un-wrap the plastic protective sheet, from around
the analyzer.
3. The instrument is bolted down to the wooden pallet on four sides with the
help of " Z " brackets, remove these bolts carefully with the help of a
spanner, and carefully slide out the " Z " brackets one at a time.
The instrument is shipped with the castors in mid air, the
"Z" bracket and the footrest support the entire weight of
the instrument. Cautiously open the bolts of the “Z"
bracket to prevent any personal injury.
6-2
4. Gently lift or slide the analyzer out of the wooden pallet, and place it on the
floor.
5. Lift the footrest up by rotating them, thereby letting the analyzer to rest on
its castors.
6. Gently lift the top dome of the analyzer and gently slide the Sample arm
upwards, making sure you do not damage the Sample probe, once you
have reached the top most position, rotate it and position it over the trough.
Remove the protective material and any debris, from within the sample tray
well.
7. Gently slide the Reagent 1 arm upwards, making sure you do not damage
the probe, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and
position it over the trough.
8. Gently slide the Reagent 2 arm upwards, making sure you do not damage
the probe, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and
position it over the trough. Remove the protective material and any debris,
from within the reagent tray well.
9. Gently slide the Mixer arm upwards, making sure you do not damage the
paddles, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and position
it over the trough. Remove the protective material.
6-3
10. Gently slide the CRU arm upwards to the top most position, making sure
you do not damage the probes, and remove the protective material and
clean debris.
11. Remove the buffers that are present in the RGT and ASP areas, as well
around the CRU and Stirrers.
To avoid electric shock, ground the analyzer, computer, printer,
and monitor using a 3 pin grounded electric outlet.
Do not use an adapter, as it could cause a loose contact and
improper grounding.
When removing or placing the cuvettes into their slots make sure
that you grip them by their sides and top end, never let the
fingers or any sharp objects come in contact with the optical
area.
6.3. Inspections and Accessories Checklist

The analyzer is fully inspected before leaving the factory and carefully packed to
withstand shocks in transit.
On receiving the analyzer, check the package externally; make sure that there is
no external visible damage to the shipping container. If there is damage please
make a note of it, if possible photograph it and inform Transasia Bio-medicals
Limited immediately. Verify with the invoice, if all the boxes have arrived.
Transasia Bio-medicals Limited reserves the right to change
without notice the accessories supplied with the analyzer.
The shipment generally contains the following packages:

1. Analyzer wooden box.
2. Standard Accessories box.
3. Optional accessories boxes. It could include the following items:
a. Computer System
b. Printer
c. Trolley
d. Accessories for ISE unit
Refer below checklist for more details on standard and optional
accessories.
Standard Accessories Checklist
6-4
Sr. Item Description

Quantity
No. Code
1 -- INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL 1 NO.
2 -- SOFTWARE CD 1 NO.
3 -- UNIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION SHEET 1 NO.
4 -- HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM SHEET 1 NO.
5 -- FQC REPORT 1 NO.
6 -- ROHS Declaration 1 NO.
7 115252 ASSEMBLY D.I. CAN 20 LTR, ADAPTOR & STICKER_S 1 NO.
8 115253 ASSEMBLY WASTE CAN 20 LTR, ADAPTOR & STICKER_S 1 NO.
9 115255 ASSEMBLY BIOHAZARD CAN 10 LTR, ADAPTOR &

1 NO.
STICKER_S
10 115254 ASSEMBLY DETERGENT CAN 10 LTR, ADAPTOR &

1 NO.
STICKER_S
11 121368 ERBA XL WASH KIT NEW (04X100ml) 1 NO.
12 102932 SAMPLE CUPS 450 Nos
13 182591 MOULDED REAGENT TRAY ASSY. 1 NO.
14 107366 RGT BOTTLE LOCATING PLATE 1 NO.
15 103082 REAGENT TRAY COVER 1 NO.
16 182639 MOULDED SAMPLE TRAY ASSEMBLY. DISK –1 (1-50) WITH

1 NO.
STANDARD PLATE
Shipper Box
17 114769 CABLE USB JUMPER USB2.0 28X1P+ 24X2C - USB A TO B

2.0 VERSION WITH FERRITE CORE (BOTH SIDE A,B ) 1.8 1 NO.
METER
18 100343 TYPE E / F PLUG - M2511 / U16CS3 V1625 HO5 VVF 3 X

1 NO.
1SQ.MM 2MTR. LENGTH.
19 100660 PVC SUPPORT FOR 20ML REAGENT BOTTLE 25 NOS.
20 182581 REAGENT BOTTLES (20 ML.) WITH CAPS. 10 NOS.
21 182584 REAGENT BOTTLES (50 ML.) WITH CAPS. 10 NOS.
22 --- REAGENT BOTTLES (20 ML.) WITH CAPS AND BAR CODE
2 NOS.
LABELS
23 --- REAGENT BOTTLES (50 ML.) WITH CAPS AND BAR CODE
2 NOS.
LABELS
6-5

Quantity
No. Code
24 --- TEST TUBES (5ML.) WITH BARCODE LABELS 10 NOS.
25 100634 TEST TUBE ADAPTER FOR MOULDED SAMPLE HOLDING

105 NOS.
PLATE
26 100592 5 ML. REAGENT BOTTLE ADAPTER (NEW) 50 NOS.
27 182462 BAR CODE ALIGNMENT KIT CONSIST OF 50 ML BOTTLE 1 NO.
28 109855 OUTER HOLDER FOR 5ML REAGENT ADAPTER 5 NOS.
29 121410 SCREW CAP (PP) OF 19MM RED COLOR FOR BOTTLES 10 NOS
30$ 108159 ASSEMBLY. OF WASTE CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 NO.
31$ 108162 ASSEMBLY OF BIO-HAZARD CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 NO.
32$ 108160 ASSEMBLY. OF D.I. WATER CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 NO.
33$ 108161 ASSEMBLY OF CLEANING SOLUTION CAN TUBE & CAN

1 NO.
CAP
34 106653 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 20LTR DI WATER CAN 1 NO.
35 106654 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 10LTR CLEANING 1 NO.

SOLUTION CAN
36 106655 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 10LTR BIO-HAZARDOUS 1 NO.

CAN
37 106656 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 20LTR WASTE CAN 1 NO.
38 110318 CABLE TIE SIZE 2.5 MM X 100 MM KP138 25 NOS.
39 110317 MOUNT ADHESIVE 10 NOS.
40 110321 FLAT CABLE SUPPORT KP161E 05 NOS
41 109522 KIT FOR BUBBLE REMOVAL 1 NO.
42 108005 FUNNEL 1 NO.
43 114235 CABLE ASSEMBLY ROBOADC PCB 1 NO
44 100679 CALIBRATION PLATE 1 NO
45 -- KEY FOR FRONT DOOR PANEL 1SET
46 201582 GAUGE FOR SPT PROBE HEIGHT SETTING 1 NO
47 100279 CUVETTES (60 NOS. WITH M/C + 5 NOS. EXTRA) 65 NOS.
48 -- RGT BARCODE ALIGNMENT JIG 1 NO
6-6

Quantity
No. Code
P.M Kit
49 100521 CUVETTE DRIER 2 NOS.
50 182681 LAUNDRY ASPIRATION TUBING SET –2 PROBE

2 SET
CONSTRUCTION
51 182682 LAUNDRY DISPENSING TUBING SET –2 PROBE

1 SET
CONSTRUCTION
52 182220 PHOTOMETER LAMP ASSEMBLY 4 NOS.
53 105480 SET OF FUSES 1 SET
54 107613 10 MICRON FILTER (125MM LENGTH) 4 NOS.
55 101677 PROBE CLEANER 1 NO.
56 107580 BD SPINAL NEEDLE (25 GA 3.5IN,0.50X90MM, ITEM 1 NO.

P405257)
57 109712 WASHER FOR CRU KNOB 1 NO.
58 114435 FILTER 25 MICRON (75MM LENGTH) 4 NO.
59 100675 COUNTER WEIGHT FOR DETERGENT (SS316L) 1 NO.
60 100937 SILICON TUBING R3350 2 MM X 4 MM (INTEGRA) 4 FT
61 107623 10-32 SPECIAL TAPERED THREAD WITH 1/4? HEX TO 200 2 NOS.
SERIES BARB 3/32? (2.25MM) ID TUBING, NATURAL KYNAR
PVDF; X220-J1A
62 108103 10-32 SPECIAL TAPERED THREAD WITH 1/4" HEX TO 200 2 NOS.
SERIES BARB 1/16" (1.6MM) ID TUBING, NATURAL KYNAR
PVDF; X210-J1A
63 107621 1/16-27 NPT THREAD WITH 5/16" HEX TO 200 SERIES 4 NOS.
BARB, 1/8"(3 MM) ID TUBING, NATURAL KYNAR PVDF;
16230-J1A
64 108084 1/16-27 NPT THREAD WITH 5/16" HEX TO 200 SERIES 3 NOS.
BARB, 3/32" (2.25 MM) ID TUBING, NATURAL KYNAR,
PDVF-16220-J1A
65* -- COMPUTER WITH MAINS CORD 1 NO.
66* -- KEYBOARD 1 NO.
67* -- MOUSE 1 NO.
Accessories for ISE Unit (Optional) *
68 200004 REFERENCE ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.
69 200001 NA ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.
6-7

Quantity
No. Code
70 200002 K ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.
71 105547 ECL ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.
72 100316 SPACER ELECTRODE 1 NO.
73 105542 CLEANING SOLUTION 1 NO.
74 100315 REAGENT PACK 1 NO.
* Optional (As per the customer’s requirement)
6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer

Installation of the components should be performed by a trained
personnel only.
6.4.1. Installing Sample Tray and Reagent Tray

1. Unpack the Sample tray from the accessories box.
2. Hold the sample tray with your right hand.
3. Gently place the sample tray into the sample tray container.
Make sure that the index pin on the Sample Transport, slides into the index
hole provided on the sample tray and rotate the knob in clock wise direction
to fix the sample tray.
4. Unpack the Reagent tray from the accessories box and hold the Reagent
tray with your right hand.
5. Gently place the Reagent tray into the reagent tray well.
Make sure that the index pin on the Reagent Transport slides into the index
hole provided on the Reagent tray.
6. Place the Reagent tray lid over the reagent tray.
6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous, and Waste

Cans
1. Unpack the Float Sensors for the 4 CANS and place them on one side.
2. From the accessory box remove the 20 liters DI Water CAN, 20 liters Waste
CAN, 10 liters Bio-hazardous Waste CAN and the 10 liters Cleaning
Solution CAN, and put them on the floor.
3. Unpack Float Sensors cables and connect one end to switch provided on
the rear panel and connect other end to the respective CANS (Longer Float
6-8
Sensors with blue sleeves for DI Water, green sleeves for Cleaning
Solution, red sleeves for Bio-hazardous Waste, and yellow sleeves for
Waste).
4. Unpack the tubing from the accessory box.
5. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the analyzer outlet
number 1 and 7. Connect other ends to the 20 liter DI WATER CAN on the
SS (stainless steel) nozzle and white ringed nozzle (SS nozzle on the CAN
is used for DI water and white ring nozzle is for lamp cooling).
Make sure that the blue ringed tube from the analyzer
should be connected to the SS nozzle on the CAN and white
ringed tube should be connected to the white ringed nozzle
on the CAN.
6. Now take one tube and connect one end to the analyzer outlet number 2
and other end to the 10 liter CLEANING SOLUTION CAN.
Now, fill 5 liters of DI water into the cleaning solution to prepare working
cleaning solution: Add 50 ml of neutral cleaning solution like (EXTRAN) to 5
liter of DI water to prepare a 1% solution.
7. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the analyzer outlet
number 3 and 4. Connect other ends to the 10 liter BIO-HAZARDOUS CAN.
8. Take one tube and connect one end to the analyzer outlet number 5 and
other end to the 20 liter WASTE CAN.
9. Now connect the large diameter silicon tube to the analyzer outlet number 6
marked WASTE and connect the other end of the tubing into the 20 liter
Waste CAN.
See Figure 6-1. Connectors for tubes and float sensor cables and Figure 6-1(1) for
more details.
6-9
Figure 6-1. Connectors for tubes and float sensor cables

OR
Figure 6-2(1).
6-10
Tubing and Tubing and

Float sensor Float sensor
cable (blue) to cable (yellow)
DI water CAN to Waste CAN
Tubing and
Float sensor
Tubing and red cable (red)
Float sensor to Bio-
cable (green) hazardous
to Cleaning CAN
Solution CAN
Figure 6-3. Tubing with float sensor cables
OR
Tubing and Tubing and

Float sensor Float sensor
cable (blue) to cable (yellow)
DI water CAN to Waste CAN
Tubing and
Float sensor
Tubing and red cable (red)
Float sensor to Bio-
cable (green) hazardous
to Cleaning CAN
Solution CAN
Figure 6-4(1)
6-11
Stainless
Steel nozzle
on DI Water
CAN
Waste CAN
DI Water CAN
Cleaning Bio-
Solution CAN hazardous
Waste CAN
Figure 6-5. Tube and float sensor connections on cans
OR
Stainless
Steel nozzle
on DI Water
CAN
Waste CAN
DI Water CAN
Cleaning Bio-
Solution CAN hazardous
Waste CAN
Take care that all the above-mentioned tubes reach their respective
containers without any sharp bends or obstructions.
The waste consists of a natural drain. Make sure that the large
silicon waste tube from the analyzer to the Waste can is slant and
in downwards direction without any bends.
Failing to take the above precaution may cause a back flow of
waste solution, out of the SPT, R1PT, R2PT STIRRER troughs,
which would cause splutter all over the top of the analyzer or could
result in noisy operation, big gargling sounds being created by the
waste lines.
6-12
6.4.3. Interconnection Details between Computer & Analyzer

6.4.3.1. USB Port
Follow these instruction to connect the analyzer from the computer:
1. Unpack the USB cable from the accessories box.
2. Connect its one end to the appropriate USB port of the computer and other
end to the connector located on the back side of the instrument, as shown
in figure below.
6-13
3. Connect one end of the power cord to the analyzer’s power inlet and other
end to the main power supply.
Make sure that the On/Off power button should be OFF before
turning on the main power supply.
4. The instrument is now connected to the computer and ready for operation.
OR
6.4.3.2. Serial Port
1. Unpack the serial cable from the accessories box, and connect the one end
to the serial port 1 of the computer and other end to the connector located
on back side panel of the instrument.
2. Connect the one end of the power cord to the analyzer’s main power outlet
as shown in figure below.
Main power
outlet
Serial Cable On/Off

-RS232 Serial switch
Port
Power Cord
Make sure that the On/Off power button should be OFF before
turning on the main power supply.
6-14
6.4.4. Test Loader Device Connecting to Analyzer PC

Follow the steps below to connect Test Loader to USB port on analyzer PC.
1. Unpack the Test Loader device, Test Loader stand and USB cable from the
accessories as shown in below figure
2. Place USB -B end of USB cable inside the Test Loader stand as shown in below figure.
3. Fix the Test Loader device on this connector as shown in figure.
4. Now connect the USB-A connector to USB port on analyzer PC
6-15
5. Once connected to analyzer PC, it gives the beep sound that means Test Loader
device is ready to scan.
6. To ensure if Test loader device is connected to analyzer PC, go to Start > Computer >
right click > Manage as shown in below screen;
7. By clicking Manage, following screen will be displayed
6-16
8. Click Device Manager > Human Interface Devices
9. Click Human Interface Devices ; following screen will be displayed;
6-17
10. It detects HID – compliant device that means Test Loader is connected with the
analyzer PC
OR
11. Go to Start > click Devices and Printers ; following screen will be displayed;
12. It detects the HID device, that means Test loader is connected with analyzer PC.
13. Close the Computer Management / Devices and Printers screen.
6-18
14. Now Keep the System Reagent pack in front of scan side of Test Loader device as
shown in below figure;
15. Go to Status Monitor > Scan Pack > System Pack details > Scan Pack, scanned
details will be displayed on analyzer PC.
Do not disconnect the device while scanning and registering the

pack. It may damage the device.
16. If Test Loader device is unconnected following message will get displayed.
17. Check the connectivity of Test Loader device by following above steps 6-12.
18. If Test loader device is unconnected, device manager cannot detect the HID device.
6-19
6.5. Equipment Startup Procedure

Perform the following verification before starting the equipment:
 Make sure that tube connections with Bio-hazardous waste Can, Cleaning
Can, DI Water Can and Waste Can are properly done.
 Make sure that tray lids are properly placed on Sample Tray, RCT and
Reagent Tray.
 Make sure that all electrodes and the ISE reagent are fitted properly.
Once the verification is done, the instrument can be connected to power supply.
After performing the above checks, follow the procedure for starting the equipment:
Before starting the main supply, make sure that the Main ON/OFF
and secondary button provided on the rear and left side of the
analyzer should be in OFF condition.
1. Plug in the one end of the power cord to the main supply.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
The 3 pin power cord plugs shipped with the analyzer,
computer, printer and monitor may not be compatible
with the local electrical sockets of some countries, you
have to get these procured from the local market prior to
the installation.
3. Turn on the Main ON/OFF button that is provided on the back side of the
instrument.
When this button is pressed, the ISE unit will be started, if
installed on the instrument.
Verify and confirm that all ISE electrodes have been properly installed; their
walls are flush against each other with the rubber “O” rings in place if
analyzer is equipped with ISE.
Verify and confirm that the reagent cooling fan has started rotating, also
touch and physically verify the cooling of the reagent tray, also verify from
the sound, that the ISE pumps have started priming.
4. Turn on the secondary button that is provided on the left side of the analyzer.
This will initializes the system, and all assemblies will come to home
position.
5. Now the instrument is powered-ON, and ready for test.
6. Power on the PC.
6-20
6.6. Software Installation Procedure

This section guides you through the installation and un-installation procedure of
MultiXL software. You must read the instructions before installing the software.
6.6.1. System Configuration

Processor Intel Core-2-duo Processor or higher
Operating System Windows 7 Professional 32 bit EN
Windows 10 Professional 32 / 64 bit EN
TBM OS of Windows-10 IoT LTSB 2016

Hard Disk 500GB (minimum) or higher
RAM 4 GB (minimum)
Monitor Color Monitor with 1024*768 resolution support,

17” & above
Printer LaserJet/ DeskJet
6.6.2. Pre-requisite
6.6.2.1. PC Settings Required for Windows XP
PC Settings will be applied automatically while installing the
customized image of Windows 7 Embedded as Operating System.
* A customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is provided by the
analyzer manufacturer, as Operating System for Analyzer PC.
 Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC.
 Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and / or settings
from the Analyzer PC.
 Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer.
 Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
 Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / DeskJet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Appropriate printer should be set as default
printer.
 Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft XPS
Document Writer” from the system. To do this, go to Start > Settings >
Control Panel > Printers and Faxes. Select the “Microsoft Office
Document Image Writer” and delete. Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS
Document Writer”.
6-21
 Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run

the Application.
 Regional and Language Settings
Use the following procedure for setting the regional and language options:
a. Select Regional Option tab, and define the following settings. See
figure below:
b. Select Languages tab, and define the following settings. See figure
below:
6-22
c. Select the Advanced tab, and define the following settings.
6-23
6.6.2.2. PC Settings Required for Windows 7

In case, *customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is installed as
Operating System, required PC Settings will be applied
automatically.
* A customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is provided by the
analyzer manufacturer, as Operating System for Analyzer PC.
 Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC if installed. To do this use the following procedure:
Click Start button, and click Control Panel. Now, under the Category view,
go to Programs > Programs and Features. Select the desired anti-virus
software from the list, and click Uninstall.
 Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and from the
Analyzer PC.
go to System and Security > Windows Firewall, and click on the link Turn
off Windows Firewall on or off. Now select the option Turn off Windows
Firewall (not recommended), and then click OK button.
To turn off automatic updates, under Control Panel, go to System and
Security > Windows Update, click on the link Change settings, and select
the Never check for updates (not recommended) from the drop down list,
and click OK.
 Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer PC.
 Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / DeskJet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Appropriate printer should be set as default
printer.
 Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft XPS
Document Writer” from the system.
go to Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right click on the
Microsoft Office Document Image Writer, and choose Remove Device to
delete. Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS Document Writer”.
 Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run
the Application.
 Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
Use the following procedure for disabling the screen saver and power
management:
6-24
a. Open Screen Saver Settings by clicking the Start button, clicking

Control Panel, clicking Appearance and Personalization under
Category view, clicking Personalization, and then clicking Screen
Saver.
b. To turn off all screen savers, under Screen Saver, select (None) from
the drop-down list, and then click OK.
6-25
c. Now click on the link Change power settings. The following screen will
be displayed.
6-26
d. Click on Balanced Change plan settings.

 Set Turn off the display to Never
 Set Put the computer to sleep to Never
e. Click on Change advanced power settings.

Set Turn off hard disk after to Never
6-27
Similarly apply same settings to power saver option. Repeat the step c
to e.
 User account control settings
a. Open User Account Control Settings by clicking the Start button, and
then clicking Control Panel. Under Small or Large icons view, click on
User Accounts and then click Change User Account Control
settings.
6-28
The following screen will be displayed:
b. Move Pointer to Never Notify and click OK.

You must re-start the analyzer PC to turn on the User Account Control.
 Regional and Language Settings
Use the following procedure for setting the regional and language options:
Ensure that the following regional and language settings are appropriate.
Note that these are critical settings for the communication with the analyzer.
Go to Settings > Control Panel > Clock, Regional and Language
Options > Change the date, time and number format.
6-29
a. Following should be the settings for Formats tab:
b. To set Number and Currency Click on Additional settings
6-30
6-31
c. Following should be the Location tab:
d. Following should be the Language tab.
6-32
e. Click on Change Keyboards following screen will display:
6-33
f. Following should be the settings for Administrative tab:
The MultiXL software is multilingual and supports even Asian languages like
Chinese, Japanese, and Thai etc.
6.6.3. Installing MultiXL Software

Follow the instructions in this section in case you are installing the application
software for the first time on the computer i.e. there is no previous installation of
the software on the computer.
Refer to section 6.6.4 Upgrading MultiXL Software to upgrade MultiXL software
from existing version to a higher version.
6.6.3.1. Installing MultiXL

Follow these instruction for installing the e application:
1. Insert the Software Installation CD into the CD drive of the analyzer PC. On
inserting the CD, the MultiXL Installation screen will be displayed.
Or
Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on
AutoPlay option.
6-34
Or
Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on
Explore and double-click on Launcher.bat.
The following screen will be displayed.
2. Click on Install MultiXL Application & Database link and follow the on-
screen instructions.
Or
Click on the Browse this CD link.
The software installation CD contains the folders and files as shown in the
figure below:
6-35
3. Open Setup folder, and double-click on the setup.exe.
6-36
On clicking, the following screen will be displayed.
This screen will not be displayed if .NET framework 4.0 is

already installed on your computer.
6-37
4. Click Accept to continue.

This screen will not be displayed if Crystal Reports for

.NET framework 4.0 is already installed on your computer.
5. Click Accept to continue.

6-38
This screen will not be displayed if SQL Server 2005

Express Edition is already installed on the analyzer
computer.
In case of Windows XP operating system, if Microsoft SQL Server Desktop
Engine (MSDE) is already installed, then the following screen will be
displayed and the installer will not proceed with the MultiXL installation.
Click on Close and uninstall the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine from
Control Panel > Add / Remove Program. Then start the MultiXL
installation again.
Please refer to Migration Guide for Database Engine, MSDE to SQL Server
Express 2005 from the Installation CD, namely “Migration Steps from MSDE
to SQL Express.chm”.
6-39
In case of Windows 7 operating system, following screen may appear while

installing MultiXL Application. Please click on Run Program button to
continue with MultiXL Installation.
It is not necessary to apply SQL Server 2005 Service Pack

3 (SP3) or later Service Pack as shown in the above
screenshot.
On clicking, the following screens will be displayed in a sequence.
6-40
Wait until the setup wizard is visible on the screen as shown below.
6. Click Next.
On clicking, the following window will be displayed.
6-41
On keeping Configure Database checkbox checked (ticked), the installer

will create or upgrade the database along with the installation of MultiXL.
(In case, the Database is found present then the existing database will be
upgraded to the latest version. When the Database is not found then the
installer will create a blank Database).
In case, Configure Database option is unchecked; the installer will not
create/upgrade the database and you have to install it manually. Refer
section 6.6.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details.
7. Click Next.
6-42
The installer will install the software in the default location C:\Program
Files\MultiXL\.
The installation in a location, different from the default
one, is not recommended.
8. Ensure that “Everyone” is selected, and click Next.

On clicking, the following window will be displayed. Click Next to confirm
the installation.
6-43
9. On clicking Next, the installation is started and the status will be displayed,
as shown below.
6-44
The following screen will be displayed if the Configure Database option is

selected.
Once the above operation is completed, the software icon will be created on
the desktop and the Installation Complete screen will be displayed
6-45
10. Click on Close to close the screen and restart the computer.
11. Now double click on the icon from the desktop or choose Start > All
Programs > MultiXL to start the application.
The Detect Regional Settings screen will be displayed
and the application halts in case, if the language setting
is other than English (United States).
Refer section 6.6.2.1 PC Settings Required for Windows XP or section

6.6.2.2 PC Settings Required for Windows 7, in case if the above message
displayed on MultiXL startup.
The following observations are noted after installing MultiXL on Windows 7
Embedded operating system:
 MultiXL Shutdown
On clicking Shutdown button in MultiXL, Analyzer PC will shutdown
automatically, after completing auto-maintenance activities on analyzer.
 The windows key (left and right) will be disabled from the keyboard.
Logging of MultiXL start and shutdown events (for internal use).
 MultiXL screen will cover the desktop in its maximized state.
 USB mass storage devices will be disabled.
USB drive can be accessible through Administrator login
only.
To copy software data to USB drive, use Utility > Backup
screen. Refer Operator Manual for more information.
 Restricted user account for MultiXL.
To install and uninstall any application from the PC, you must be logged on
as (windows) user “Administrator”.
To log in to the administrative account, go to Start > Shutdown > Logoff
and then click the Administrator icon and provide the administrator
password. The default administrator password is tbm1234@.
6-46
6.6.3.2. Installing Database

The installation and restoring database should be performed by
the trained person only.
Database installation is required only if the Configure Database option was de-
selected (unchecked) during installation (Refer step 6 of section Installing MultiXL).
In case, Configure Database option is selected (ticked by default) during Software
Installation then the Database will be created / upgraded automatically as part of
installation. (Database, when already exists, will be upgraded to the latest version.
When database is not found on PC, then the installer will create a blank database).
In case, the Configure Database option is not selected, then the database should
be installed manually, as follows.
Refer to the folder Database Utility in the CD, which consists of
DatabaseUtility.exe for installing (restoring) the Database file MultiXL.BKP.
See section 6.6.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details.
If you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)”
while performing the above mention steps then refer SQL
Server 2005 Configuration.chm file for SQL Server 2005 Settings
in the software installation CD.
6.6.3.2.1. Installing Blank Database

For installing the Blank Database from Software CD, use the following instructions:
1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL installation screen as
shown below.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and
double-click DatabaseUtility.exe.
6-47
2. Click on CHECK DATABASE.

This command will check for the existing database on your computer. If no
database is available, a message is displayed on the following screen.
3. Click on CREATE DATABASE.

This will create the database from the location specified on the screen. This
is the default location where the blank database is stored in software
installation CD.
(To restore the backup of new database, you need to change the location
using BROWSE FILE button. Refer section 6.6.5.2.2 Restoring Backup of
New Database in more details).
For example, in the above screen, the database location is E:\Database
Utility\MultiXL BKP.
If Archive is not available then utility will ask for Blank Database location
and the following window will be displayed.
6-48
4. Now click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the
software CD, and then click Open.
After some time, the database will be created successfully and the
following screen will be displayed.
5. Once the database is created, click CHECK DATABASE to ensure the proper
creation of the database. The following screen will be displayed.
6-49
6. The above screen indicates that the database is installed successfully. Click
Close to exit from the utility screen.
7. Now you can access the MultiXL application. Refer section 6.6.5.3
Accessing MultiXL Software for more details.
1. Make sure that all software versions are installed correctly.

2. To check the installed software versions, go to Service Check
screen, right click on the Misc Cmds button, and choose
Software Version option.
6.6.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software

If the MultiXL software is already installed on the analyzer computer and you
receive a newer version of software, then the following steps should be performed:
 Upgrade MultiXL Software
 Upgrade MultiXL Database
Take a database backup, before proceeding with software
upgrade.
6.6.4.1. Upgrade Software

You can upgrade the software version by un-installing the existing software
version from the PC and installing the newer version from the CD as follows.
6.6.4.1.1. Un-installing Software
To un-install the software, do one of the following:
1. Click on the Uninstall MultiXL Application from the MultiXL Installation
screen as shown below.
6-50
Or
Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel. In the Control Panel, double click
on Add or Remove Programs. This method is used only, if you are using
Windows XP operating system.
For Windows 7 operating systems, click Start button on the desktop, under
Category view, go to Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.
2. Select the MultiXL software, and then click Remove.
On clicking, the software will be removed from the computer.
To uninstall the MultiXL software you must be logged on as
user “Administrator”.
6.6.4.1.2. Installing Software - New Version

Refer section 6.6.3.1 Installing MultiXL for more details.
6.6.4.2. Upgrade Database

Upgrade the database using the software CD of the newer version whenever you
install the new software version.
Database can be upgraded to match the newer software version without deleting
the database of the existing version.
Ensure to take Database backup before upgrading the
Database.
6-51
6.6.4.2.1. Upgrading Database

Follow these instructions for upgrading the database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility link from MultiXL Installation screen as
shown below.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
click on DatabaseUtility.exe.
2. Click UPGRADE DB.
On clicking, the system prompt to select the upgrade script file, as shown in
the following screen
Select the upgrade script file from the software CD, and then click Open.
The upgrade script file is provided in the application
software CD in the Database Utility folder.
6-52
On clicking, the upgrade process starts. If archive Database is not available

then the utility will prompt to select the path for Blank Database and the
3. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the software
CD, and then click Open.
6-53
After some time, the database will be upgraded successfully and the
4. Click to close the database utility screen.

Accessing MultiXL software for more details.
6-54
After installing the new software version, if the database is

not upgraded using the upgrade script file provided in the
Software CD then the following screen will be displayed on
starting the application software. This screen indicates the
software and database version mismatch.
In case, the software and database version mismatch screen is displayed; upgrade
the database using the script file, provided in the software CD. Refer section
software CD. Refer section 6.6.4.2.1Upgrading Database for more details.
1. Make sure that all software versions are installed correctly.

2. To check the installed software versions, go to Service Check
screen, right click on the Misc Cmds button, and choose
Software Version option.
6.6.5. Database Utility Options

The Database Utility can be used to take the Database Backup or change the
Database.
6.6.5.1. Database Backup

Follow these instructions for taking the backup of database:
1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and double-
click DatabaseUtility.exe.
6-55
3. Press F12 key. The following screen will be displayed.
4. Choose the path to store the backup, and then click Save.
On clicking, the following screen will be displayed to confirm the successful
completion of backup database.
6-56
If archive database is present then backup will be stored with “ARH”

extension with the same default file name.
For example: In this case archive backup will be stored on the same path
with default file name “MultiXL15122011.ARH”. The default file name
contains “MultiXL” (the application name), followed by date, month and
year.
6.6.5.2. Change Database

In case, if you wish to change the database, you must delete the existing database
and then restore the backup of another database using database utility,
It is recommended to change the database with proper
guidance of expert service engineer. Improper installation
may impact the calibration of the analyzer, in addition to
loss of data such as QC data and chemistry calibration.
Before installation, you should take the backup of the

database before deleting or changing the database.
Database can be changed in two parts:

1. Delete (existing) Database.
2. Restore Backup of another Database.
6.6.5.2.1. Deleting existing database
Follow these instructions for deleting the database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and
double-click DatabaseUtility.exe.
6-57
2. Click on CHECK DATABASE to check whether the database is present.
3. Click on DELETE DATABASE to delete the existing database. The

4. Click on Yes to continue with database deletion.

On clicking, the warning message will be displayed to re-confirm the
deletion.
5. Click Yes to continue

On clicking, a message will be displayed to take the database backup
before deletion.
6-58
6. Click Yes to take the backup.

The following window will be displayed. Select the appropriate location for
saving the backup database.
On clicking No, the Live and Archive data will be deleted

without taking the database backup.
Best Practice: Backup database before deleting the same.
7. Click Save to save the database.
On clicking, a message will be displayed “Database Backup Taken
Successfully” and then following screen will be displayed.
6-59
6.6.5.2.2. Restoring backup of new database

8. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
10. Now, click on the BROWSE FILE.
Select the location where the backup database file is saved.
6-60
11. Select the database file and then click Open.

12. Click on CREATE DATABASE.
On clicking, the database will be created and the following screen would
be displayed.
If the Archive is not available then utility will ask for blank
database location.
13. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the
application CD.
6-61
14. Click Open.

The following screen will be displayed after successful creation of
database.
15. Click on CHECK DATABASE to ensure proper creation of the database.
16. Click to close the database utility screen.

Accessing MultiXL Software for more details.
6.6.5.2.3. Restoring Archive Database
Follow these instructions to restore the archived database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
2. Press F11 key from the keyboard.
The following window will be displayed. Select the appropriate location
where the archive database is saved and then click Open.
6-62
3. After restoring the archive database successfully, the following screen will be
displayed.
6.6.5.3. Taking Diagnosis Backup

This button is used to take the database backup for diagnosis which will be without
patient demographics to support patient privacy policy.
Diagnosis backup can be used by support team only for troubleshooting purpose.
Following are the list of demographics that are excluded from the diagnosis
database: Patient Name, Patient ID, Patient Address (line 1, 2 and 3), and Patient
Tel. No. Patient Remarks, Area i.e. Location of the Sample Collection, Reference
Doctor Analyst.
6-63
To take the backup of the data base, use the following steps:
1. Run Database Utility.
2. Click on DIAGNOSIS BACKUP.
On clicking, the diagnosis backup database will be created with a file name
and saved in the location C:\MultiXLLog folder. See figure below.
For example, diagnosis backup created on 30 Sept 2013 at 11:30:45 am will

have file name “MultiXL_20130930113045.DIAG”.
3. After the completion of backup, user should copy the file name and send to
support team for diagnosis.
6.6.6. Installing Team Viewer

Team Viewer is used to access analyzer computers, which makes it an ideal solution for
Remote Monitoring and Trouble Shooting purposes.
Pre-requisite for Analyzer PC and Remote PC:
a) Internet connection availability - uninterrupted with good speed.
b) Team-viewer is not blocked in System Settings for PC/Network Security.
Team Viewer connectivity depends upon the Internet speed

available at the Lab/Site and load on analyzer PC. Team Viewer
uses remote desktop technology to control a computer from an
alternate location. The main cause of lag when controlling a
remote computer is network speed.
6-64
Regular PC cleanup and maintenance should be carried out to

keep your PC running at optimum speed. Disk Cleanup
application scans and deletes unnecessary files and Disk
Defragmenter improves performance by eliminating the gaps in
data. Use the Start menu's search box to locate these programs.
Viruses also impact performance. Update your virus definitions
and complete a full system scan.
It is not recommendable to use Team Viewer remote control
session during Batch RUN with Actual Patient samples on the
analyzer, as it may slow-down / interrupt the system
performance.
Installation Procedure:
1. On insertion of CD on Auto-play, MultiXL Installation screen will be displayed with the

option to install Team Viewer.
OR
1. Go to Windows Explorer and Right Click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive and Click on Auto-
play.
2. Click on Install Team Viewer. On selection of this option, following pop-up appears;
6-65
3. Team Viewer installation is carried out at default installation location C:\Program Files\
TeamViewer.
4. After Team Viewer is installed successfully, above screen will be closed automatically
and user will be redirected to the Launcher Screen.
Start-up procedure for Team Viewer remote support.
Open Team Viewer 10 Host from Windows Start menu. Following screen appears;
6-66
Team Viewer ID (Your ID marked in Red in above image) is unique for every device.
This ID of the Analyzer PC is required for connecting another Remote PC through
TeamViewer. Password is “tbm1234@”, by default.
Password is pre-configured by default, during installation of
TeamViewer Host.
Analyzer user / operator have to share Your ID (Team Viewer ID marked in RED) to
the support team for Remote Support (Remote control session on Analyzer PC)
Do not change the default password for the seamless remote
support.
6.6.7. Accessing MultiXL Software

MultiXL screens are best viewed with 1024 * 768 resolutions.
On starting MultiXL, the monitor resolution, if different, will change
automatically to 1024*768 pixels.
On closing MultiXL, the previous resolution will be restored.
Make sure that the English language is selected in the Language

tab. Language other than specified may displays the Detect
Regional Settings screen and the application halts.
For more information on setting language, refer any one of the
following section, depending on the operating system used:
6.6.2.1 PC Settings Required for Windows XP or 6.6.2.2 PC Settings
Required for Windows 7
On successful installation, the MultiXL software application will be launched
automatically at every PC startup.
To access the software do one of the following:
 Turn on the analyzer PC. MultiXL application will start automatically
 Double click on the MultiXL icon created on your desktop.
 Go to Start > All Programs > MultiXL.
When starting the application first time, the product login screen as shown
below will be displayed.
The product login and password is written on the application software CD.
Enter the appropriate details in the PRODUCT LOGIN and PASSWORD
text box, and click OK.
6-67
Product login, password and Location are written on the Software CD.
Product Login is critical (one-time) stage. Software is
configured suitably based on the inputs in this screen.
Please contact Service Engineer, in case Product Login
details are not available on Software CD.
Enter the appropriate details in the PRODUCT LOGIN and PASSWORD,
select appropriate LOCATION, and then click OK.
On clicking OK, the User login screen as shown below will be displayed.
This screen will be displayed every time, on starting

MultiXL.
Enter the following details, and then click OK. You may use this Login
details for the first time and create the other Login IDs with appropriate
Access Rights.
Login ID : Guest or guest.
Password : Guest (Case – sensitive)
The main screen will be opened.
6-68
6-69
6.7. Password Recovery Procedure

This section describes the procedure to recover the password for the user login
Guest, in case you lose or forget the password. However, the password for other
user logins can be reset by the administrator for their login from the Settings >
User Rights screen.
6.7.1. Steps Performed by the Operator

Follow this procedure for recovering login password for Guest:
1. In the login screen, enter Guest in the Login ID textbox and click on the link
“Click Here” as shown in figure below.
2. On clicking the link, a text file with the password details is created at the
location C:\MultiXLLOG. The file name and the path will be displayed as
follows.
3. Go to folder C:\MultiXLLOG, and send the generated text file, for example
‘ForgotPWD20110420.Txt’ to the service engineer. See figure as shown
below.
6-70
4. Click OK to close.
6.7.2. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer

The following steps will be performed by the service engineer:
1. Open Password Recovery Utility software from the CD.
2. Click Browse, and select the appropriate text file that is received by the
operator.
3. Click Ok.
6-71
6.7.3. Main Menu Software Layout
The Main Menu on the left hand side of screen consists of following screens:
Patient Entry – This screen is used for defining patient demographics and
Scheduling tests/calculation items or profiles.
Test Parameters – This option is used to define Test details, set Auto-rerun for a
single or multiple test, set Online Calibration to trace reagent bottle change,
Cuvette Wash, Download & Upload test, and initialize test
Profiles/Calc – This screen is used for defining new Profiles or Calculation Items
QC/Calibrations – This option is used to schedule calibration (Blanks,
Standards, and Calibrators) and Controls. This option is also used to view the
calibration curves for a particular test, the QC Data and Twin Plot graph.
6-72
Consumables – This option is used to define consumables such as Blanks,

Reagents, Standards, Calibrators, Controls, Diluents/Serum diluents, Wash
Solution, SI reagent, and Urine ISE diluents.
Status Monitor –This option is used to perform calibration/patient batch run,
view liquid level of reagents for different Tests and perform Sample & Reagent
Barcode scans. It is also used to view online reaction curve and the progress of
the batch run
Search – This screen is used for searching Patient Results, Calibration / Control
Results, Patients, Consumables or Test Details.
Reports – This option is used to view Patient Reports, Statistical data using Test
Statistics screen, the test results on Result Reprint screen, calibration of a test
over a period of time on Calibration Trace screen, Calibration Monitor screen with
current calibration, errors reported (during sample run, service, maintenance, and
auto-startup) in Error Log screen, Reaction curves, Reagent consumption and
ISE calibration details.
Master – This option is used to define miscellaneous parameters like Area
(location of collecting samples), Laboratory, Doctor, Analyst, Manufacturer,
Reference range, Unit, Calculation formula and Instrument (for offline result
entry) details.
Utility – This option is used to define Reagent Positions and Backup Data, to
enter and print Offline Results and recalculate the results obtained from analyzer.
Service Check – Only the authorized Service Personnel should use this option.
Maintenance – This option is used to perform various maintenance operations
on analyzer, dead volume calibration for sample and reagent, ISE maintenance
activities. The automatic maintenance on startup and shut-down of analyzer can
be initiated from this screen.
Settings – This option is used to define system parameters, carryover pairs, test
sequence, rerun flags, to assign user rights. This option is also used to establish
the communication between the analyzer PC and host computer (LIS) using Host
Settings screen.
Hibernate/Wake-up – This option is used to manually hibernate the analyzer to
save power. This power-saving mode requires supporting hardware on the
analyzer. Hence, the option will be visible only if the analyzer is having the
required hardware. On clicking Hibernate, this option will turn as Wake-up to
activate the analyzer from the power-saving mode.
Refer section 13.17Hibernate/Wake-Up for details
Archive – This option is used to archive patient results as well as to view the
Archived results at a later date. This option will be visible only after the patient
results exceed a specific limit, for the first time, requiring to archive the data
Refer section 13.18 MultiXL – Archive Database for details.
6-73
Shut Down – This option is used to turn off the application software with / without
maintenance of analyzer.
The menus can also be accessed using the keyboard shortcut keys shown in
brackets.
The selected menu option will be displayed in yellow color.
Following screenshot shows list of Common buttons used:
A – Moves to First Record.

B – Moves to Previous Record.
C – Moves to Next Record.
D – Moves to Last Record.
E – Prints the Screen Details in Report Format.
F – Saves a new Entry or Modified Entry.
G – Clears the data on the current screen.
H – Edits/Modifies the data on the current screen.
I – Deletes a Record.
Following is a three dotted button available on most of the screens. This button is
to be clicked either to select / enter data for that field.
For example: In the screenshot below, button is placed near a box with caption
‘Test’. If this button is clicked, small window opens up for selecting a particular test.
Following is an indication bar available on most of the screens. This provides help /
warning messages to the user.
The sign * near any of the fields on the software screens indicate
that the field is mandatory. The sign ** near any of the column in
the master option indicate that row is a default row and can’t be
deleted by the user.
6-74
6.8. Display Language Settings

The display language can be changed according to your choice from the available
list of languages. MultiXL application uses this language in dialog boxes, menus,
captions, header in the screen, and other items in the user interface.
List of Languages supported: English, Chinese,Italian,Spanish,
Portuguese,Russian, French, German, Polish and Czech.
To change the language, do the following:
1. Click on the Settings from the main menu.
2. Now go to System Parameter s screen, and click on the three dotted button
available on the Default Language field.
On clicking, the Change Language dialog box will be displayed.

3. Select the desired language from the Set Language drop down list.
4. Click OK.
5. Alternatively, language can also be changed using F10 key from the keyboard.
6-75
7. Relocation
This section provides instructions for decontaminating, draining out the analyzer,
disconnecting peripheral devices and packing the analyzer securely for
transportation, and is intended for use by only a Transasia Bio-medicals Limited
trained field service engineer.
Only a trained service representative should carry out the relocation
of the analyzer. Problems resulting from the relocation of the
Analyzer by anyone other than a service representative will not be
covered under warranty.
Besides the various decontamination procedures listed out, under

section 7.2 Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System. Other
procedures listed out by local, State or National law/ authorities,
should also be carried out, all bio hazardous items must also be
disposed off in accordance with these regulations..
Voltages present in the XL-300 can produce severe electrical

shocks. Place the analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0) position
and disconnect all line chords before attempting any maintenance
procedure.
Pack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you can damage accurately

adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
Any analyzer spares being shipped back, that has had Bio-
hazardous material run on it, must be decontaminated, and the
decontamination certificate that has been included under section 7.4
Decontamination Certificate , must be filled, duly signed, and
attached with the shipping documents..
The sample probe may come directly in contact with human sera
and is highly bio-hazardous, please take the necessary precaution
to protect yourself when carrying out this procedure.
7-1
When carrying out this procedure, sufficient precaution should be

taken to protect you from potential injury or infection.
To prevent contaminating yourself and others, treat all human sera
as potentially Biohazards.
7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the

Analyzer
 Base pallet with “Z” bracket and XL-300 standard wooden box.
 Cardboard boxes for the accessories.
 Protective Packing material like a bubble sheet, or foam.
 “Z “brackets with nuts, bolts and washers.
 Sodium hypo chloride
 Disposable paper tissues.
 Gloves.
 5.25% Sodium hypo chloride (bleach solution)
 Four black stopper caps and a white semitransparent big cap required for
the analyzer rear outlet nozzles.
7.2. Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System

1. From the Maintenance screen, perform a cuvette rinse cycle. To do this, in
the Wash frame, select CUVETTE RINSE, and then press START. Perform
this operation with cleaning solution and two more operations with DI water
in cleaning solution CAN.
2. Take a printout or backup of the error logs on the memory. To do this, go to
Reports screen, and click Backup from the menu. Select the backup path
where you require the data to be stored by using Browse and click Backup.
3. Remove and discard, all Sample cups and Reagent bottles old and new
(DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER)
4. Remove the Cleaning solution and DI water CAN, along with their external
associated tubing and discard them in regulation with the local law (DO
NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER).
5. Drain the system. To do this, go to the Maintenance screen, and perform
cuvette rinse operation. Repeat the cycle multiple times till all the water from
the pressure tank and associated tubes have been drained out.
6. In case of ISE, perform this operation prior to step 1. To drain the ISE
system, go to Maintenance screen, in the ISE frame, click on the ISE UNIT
and choose CLEAN > ISE ON > START. Perform the clean cycle using ISE
7-2
Cleaning solution. Follow this with multiple PURGE cycles (approximately 5

cycles).
7. Remove the ISE reagent pack, perform multiple PURGE cycles. After this,
put old / dummy electrodes and place Cal A tube assembly into the DI water
(slightly warm 35 – 37 ° C) and perform PURGE about 10 times. Remove DI
water and perform PURGE at least 15 times (drain all tube of water / fluid).
8. Remove the electrodes, and pack them in their respective original boxes
that were supplied with them.
9. Place the electrodes in the accessories box.
10. Drain the water of the Pressure tank. Locate the drain tube and open the
Shut off valve (mounted on the bottom right side of the analyzer’s chassis),
and allow the entire contents of the pressure tank to drain out. See figure
below.
11. After completing the draining procedure DO NOT FORGET TO CLOSE
THE DRAIN NUT.
12. Using a suction pump, drain out water from the Large Waste tube outlet
(Gravity flow path). Put the Black stopper caps onto the Biohazards waste,
cleaning solution and De-ionized water outlet nozzles and the white
semitransparent big cap onto the waste outlet nozzle that is located on the
rear of the analyzer.
13. Turn off the power to the Analyzer, computer, monitor and printer.
14. Remove the Waste and Bio Hazardous waste CAN’S, and discard them in
regulation with the local law (DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE
ANALYZER).
15. Turn off the power to the Analyzer, computer, monitor and printer.
16. Disconnect all external cables and peripheral devices.
17. Wipe the Monitor, Computer and Keyboard external surface with a
nonabrasive cleaner, or a use a soft lint free clot moistened with a 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride (Bleach) solution to clean and
decontaminate the trolley, computer, monitor and printer external surface.
18. But before using it, make sure that you test it on a small section of the
computer, wait till it dries, see the results, only if you are satisfied that there
is no damage or change of colors to plastic parts, then proceed to clean the
entire computer with this cleaning solution.
Make sure that no solution falls or seeps into the Computer,
Monitor, Printer, or Keyboard.
19. Adequately pack all the cables, Power cord, and peripheral devices into the
accessories box.
7-3
Do not ship any accessories that have been in contact with

Bio Hazardous fluids.
Due to possible spillage, the sample tray comes in contact

with body fluids, To prevent contaminating yourself and
others, treat all human sera as potentially Bio-hazardous.
Take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from
contamination and personal injury.
20. Lift and remove the Sample and reagent tray carousel, with the help of a
soft brush and a lint free clot moistened in a 0.5 % dilution of a 5.25 %
Sodium hypo chloride (bleach) solution clean and decontaminate the
Sample and reagent tray, also remove all debris and spillage from the wells
of the Sample and Reagent trays, dry and pack them individually, and
appropriately into cardboard boxes.
The Cuvettes comes directly in contact with human sera and
is highly Bio-hazardous, please take the necessary
precaution to protect yourself when carrying out this
procedure.
21. Remove the Sample, Reagent 1, and Reagent 2 Probes and place them
into a beaker or test tube filled with a mild Sodium Hypochloride or extra
solution, the level of the solution should be such that only the lower half
centimeter of the probe is in contact with the solution.
22. The sample probe system comprises of two metal concentric probes that
are used for liquid level sensing. In order to clean this probe from the
outside, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium
Hypochloride (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probe upper end, then gently
slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out of the probe, repeat this
cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that the probe is thoroughly
cleaned . Make sure that this cleaning procedure is done only in one
direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse. Repeat the same
procedure with de-ionized water.
23. In order to clean the sample probe internally, gently with the help of a
syringe (5 ml) flush the probe first with a 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium
Hypochloride (Bleach) and then flush it multiple times with de-ionized water.
Dry and adequately pack the probes with sufficient protection, in separate
boxes.
When replacing the cuvettes back into their slots, make
sure that you grip them by their sides and top end. Never let
the fingers or any sharp object come in contact with the
optical area.
24. Rotate the Sample, Reagent1 and Reagent 2 arm and lower them into the
Sample and reagent tray, wells.
7-4
25. To decontaminate, the Stirrer paddles, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution
of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probes
upper end, then gently slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out
of the probe, repeat this cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that
the probe is thoroughly cleaned. Make sure that this cleaning procedure is
done only in one direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse.
Repeat the same procedure with de-ionized water,
26. Move the Stirrer arms to the Trough position, and lower them into the
trough. Place the buffers below the Stirrer base.
The cuvette rinsing unit suction probes comes directly in
contact with human sera and is highly Bio-hazardous. Take
the necessary precaution to protect yourself when carrying
out this procedure.
27. Unscrew the metal thumbscrew located above the cuvette rinsing unit plate,
lift the Laundry unit upwards and place it in a shallow tray. Clean individual
probes with the help of a lint free tissue moistened with a solution of 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride rinse thoroughly with de-ionized
water and dry.
When refitting the Cuvette rinsing unit make sure that the
suction probes go directly in the center of the cuvette slot,
and they do not touch the walls.
28. Refit the Cuvette rinsing unit and place a buffer packing material between
the Laundry plate of the rinsing unit and the top plate of the analyzer.
7.3. Packing the Analyzer

Pack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you can damage the
accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
Do not ship any accessories in the main analyzer box. All

accessories should be shipped separately in the accessories box.
1. Wrap the plastic protective sheet, around the entire analyzer.

Lift or slide the analyzer onto the wooden pallet by holding
the base plate of the analyzer, lifting the analyzer by its side
panels can damage the analyzer.
2. Place the base pallet just besides the right side (hydraulics side) of the
analyzer.
Make sure the pallet is positioned correctly, that is the
analyzer will finally rest on the pallet, with the front of the
analyzer facing the side marked front on the pallet.
7-5
3. Gently lift the hydraulics side of the analyzer (as it is the lighter side) and
slide the wooden pallet below the side castors of the analyzer, when doing
this a foot should be placed on the one or slide of the pallet to prevent it
from lifting gently slide the analyzer onto the wooden pallet and position it,
rotate the foot rests downwards, in order to enable the analyzer to rest on
the foot rest only and the castors are in midair, make sure that all four foot
rests are adjusted to about the same height.
4. Carefully slide in the “Z” brackets one at a time, making sure that they fit
into the groove provided on the footrest, bolt down the “Z” brackets onto the
wooden pallet.
The instrument must be shipped with the Castors mildly
taking analyzer weight; the “Z” bracket and the footrest
should also support the weight of the analyzer. Cautiously fit
the “Z” bracket to prevent any personal injury.
5. Fit the side ply of the wooden box and make sure that the following
markings are clearly indicated on the wooden box
6. Indication as to which side is the top and which is the bottom of the
analyzer.
a. Fragile indication.
b. Do not tumble.
c. Do not stack on top this box.
d. Protect from sunlight and rain.
e. Precession instrument.
f. Copy of the certificate of decontamination
7-6
7.4. Decontamination Certificate

TO WHOMSOEVER IT MAY CONCERN, THIS ANALYZER ALONG WITH ITS
RELATED ACCESSORIES HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND DECONTAMINATED
IN ACCORDANCE TO THE STIPULATED PROCEDURES LISTED OUT IN THE
SERVICE MANUAL, UNDER SECTION 7-2 UNINSTALLING AND
DECONTAMINATING THE SYSTEM AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL AND
STATE LAWS.
INSTRUMENT MODEL:
SERIAL NUMBER:
DISTRIBUTORS NAME:
DISTRIBUTORS ADDRESS:
CITY: COUNTRY:
CUSTOMERS NAME:
CUSTOMERS ADDRESS:
CITY: COUNTRY:
PROCEDURES CARRIED OUT BY: SIGNATURE DATE
7-7
8. Functional Description
This section provides the information on each unit constituting the system.
8.1. Identification of the Main Components

The analyzer consist of the following main components:
 Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU)
 Reaction Cuvette Tray (RCT)
 Sample Arm (SPT)
 Reagent 1 Arm (R1PT)
 Reagent 2 Arm (R2PT)
 Auto Sampler Unit
 Stirrer or Mixer
 Reagent Tray (RGT)
 ISE Reagent Pack (Optional)
ISE Port Stirrer

or Mixer
Cuvette
Rinsing Unit R1PT Arm
(CRU)
SPT Arm R2PT Arm
Reaction
Cuvette Reagent
Tray (RCT) Tray (RGT)
Auto Sampler
Unit
8-1
ISE Reagent Pack
8.2. Functionality of Each Unit

8.2.1. Sample Handling System
Sample handling system of the analyzer consists of a sample tray, a sampling arm,
a sample syringe, a sample barcode reader, and a wash station for the sample
probe.
The sample arm moves from its 'home' position (trough) to sample tray, it aspirates
the sample, and then dispense into the appropriate cuvette on the reaction tray for
reaction.
8.2.1.1. Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)

Sample Tray of the analyzer consists of two sections:
The outer section is for placing the patient samples. The outer section has 50
positions for patient samples. Position numbers 46-50 are also available for
stat/emergency samples. Adapters are available for loading primary tubes of
different sizes. Primary tubes as well as cups could be placed in the outer section.
The positions are marked 1 to 50 on disk 1, 51 to 100 on disk 2 and so on.
The inner section is for placing blank, control, stat/emergency samples, and
standards/calibrators. It is a detachable tray mounted on top of the routine/primary
tube tray. On this tray, only cups can be placed in the dedicated positions as
marked on the disk. The outer ring of the standard tray contains 20 Positions for
Standards (marked S1 -S20). The inner ring contains eight positions for Controls
(marked C1 - C8), two separate positions for optional ISE solution (marked ISE1-
ISE2) and two positions for blanks (marked B1 - B2).
The MultiXL application enables you to assign Patient Samples,
Blank, Standard, Calibrators and Controls to any position on the
Sample Tray.
8-2
Figure 8-1. Auto sampler unit (ASP)

The types of usable sample tubes and cups are shown below:
 5, 7 ml tubes
Diameter: 12 mm
Length: 75 mm
Extent of label fitting: Refer to below drawing.
 10 ml tubes
Diameter: 15 mm
Length: 101 mm
Extent of label fitting: Refer to below drawing.
 2 ml cups
8.2.1.2. Sample Pipette Unit (SPT)

The sample pipette unit (SPT) consists of an up-and-down movement mechanism.
The sample pipette is connected to the syringe for sample aspiration via PTFE
8-3
tube. The sample on the ASP unit is aspirated by the pipette and then dispensed
into the cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit
When an optional ISE unit is fitted and the ISE measurement is performed, the
SPT aspirates sample for ISE measurement and dispenses it into the sample port
of the ISE unit.
The sample probe has capacitance based liquid sensing capability. The sample
arm is also fitted with vertical obstruction detection (VOD) system, which prevents
the sample probe and arm from damage.
SPT probe can be identified by Red sleeve.
Figure 8-2. Sample pipette unit
8.2.1.3. Sample Barcode Reader

The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the
sample tube.
The readable bar codes are as follows:
Symbol Valid character and symbol
NW-7 Numerals (0 – 9), symbols (-, $, /, +)
Code39 Numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters, symbols (-, space, $, /, +,
%)
ITF Numerals only (0 – 9)
UPC Numerals only (0 – 9)
Code128: All ASCII code characters [numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters
Set A, Set B, Set C (uppercase/lowercase), symbols, control characters]
8.2.1.4. SPT Washing Station

The sample probe is cleaned internally as well as externally. The wash station for
the sample probe consists of a double arrangement. The first position is 'Drain
Position' (for internal cleaning of the probe) and the second position is 'Trough
Position' (position for external cleaning of the probe). After the sample probe has
8-4
dispensed sample into the cuvette, the sample arm moves to the wash station, i.e.,
drain position, dispenses the remaining sample along with 1.0 ml of De-ionized
Water in the drain. Then the arm moves to trough position and is cleaned with a jet
of D.I. Water.
Figure 8-3. Sample trough or washing station
8.2.2. Reagent Handling System

Sample handling system of the analyzer consists of a reagent tray, a reagent arm,
a sample syringe, a reagent barcode reader, and a wash station for the reagent
probe.
The reagent arm moves from its 'home' position (trough) to reagent tray, it
aspirates the reagent, and then dispense into the appropriate cuvette on the
reaction tray for reaction.
8.2.2.1. Reagent Tray (RGT)

The reagent tray is used for accommodating reagent bottles. The reagent tray can
accommodate 50 reagent bottles (25 on the inner side and 25 on the outer side).
The reagent tray consists of Barcode reader, Cooler, Sensor and Rotating
mechanism.
The reagent tray rotates and the required reagent bottle is moved to the position
where the reagent is aspirated. At this position, the reagent is aspirated by the
R1PT/R2PT and then dispensed into cuvettes in the RCT unit.
Figure 8-4. Reagent tray
8-5
The type of usable reagent bottles are shown below:

 Inner circumference: 50 ml
 Outer circumference: 20 ml
* 5 ml tube can also be placed on the outer circumference using tube holder.
8.2.2.2. Type of Reagent Bottles

The type of useable reagent bottles is available in two capacities: 20 ml and 50 ml.
Both the bottles are graduated and the user can visualize the amount of reagent
present in each bottle.
Special 5 ml adapters or holder are also available to keep expensive reagents or
reagents in smaller volumes. An image of the two types of bottles provided with the
Analyzer, (20 ml and 50 ml) is shown below:
All bottles are screw capped to prevent evaporation of reagents while not in use.
On the outer ring of the tray (even numbered positions), 20 ml bottles can be
placed. The inner ring (odd numbered positions) is available for the 50 ml bottles
as well as 20 ml bottles. Suitable boat supports are provided to accommodate 20
ml bottle on the inner ring. Bar-coded labels are affixed on the reagent containers
for identification by the bar-code reader (optional).
Figure 8-5. Reagent bottles
8.2.2.3. Reagent 1 and 2 Pipette Unit (R1PT and R2PT)

The reagent pipette unit (R1PT and R2PT) consists of an up-and-down movement
mechanism, rotating mechanism, level sensor and lower limit sensor.
The R1PT aspirates primary reagent contained in the reagent tray (RGT) and
dispenses it into cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit.
The R2PT aspirates the secondary reagent contained in the reagent tray (RGT)
and dispenses it into cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit. The design of the
reagent arm is similar to the sample arm.
The reagent probes of analyzer are mounted on the motor driven reagent arms,
which move from the reagent positions to the cuvette. The probes are equipped
8-6
with capacitance based liquid level sensors. The construction of the probe is
similar to that of the sample probe (SPT).
Reagent 1 probe can be identified by black sleeve and Reagent 2 by parrot green
sleeve. Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 arms have black and parrot green dots
respectively for differentiating the two.
R2PT pipette unit R1PT pipette unit
8-7
8.2.2.4. Reagent 1, Reagent 2 Syringes (R1PP and R2PP) &

Sample Syringe (SPP)
The reagent syringes of analyzer are positive displacement type and are located
alongside the sample syringe. Both the syringes of Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 have
a maximum capacity of 500 μl each. Reagents (R1 and R2) can be programmed in
steps of 1μl. R1 dispenses volume from 60μl to a maximum of 300μl. R2
dispenses volume from 10 μl to maximum of 300 μl. The reagent syringes are
connected to reagent arms by PTFE tubing.
The sample syringe of the analyzer is a positive displacement type and dispenses
volume 2 μl to 70 μl. Sample can be incremented in 0.1 μl steps. The sample
syringe – 100ul capacity, is being located in front of the analyzer and connected to
the sample arm/probe with appropriate tubing
Figure 8-6. Sapphire syringes
OR
8-8
Figure 8-7. Pump syringe with molded head
8.2.2.5. Reagent Barcode Reader

The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the
reagent bottle. The readable bar codes are as follows:
Symbol Valid character and symbol
ITF Numerals only (0 – 9)
8.2.2.6. R1PT and R2PT Washing Station

The wash station for the reagent probes (R1PT and R2PT) consists of a double
arrangement. The same position is used as Drain Position” (for internal cleaning of
the probe) and also as “Trough Position” (for external cleaning of the probe). After
Reagent1/Reagent2 probe has dispensed the reagent into the cuvette, the reagent
arm moves to the wash station where it is throws away excess reagent into the
drain and are cleaned internally as well as externally using a jet of DI Water.
R1PT Trough
R2PT Trough
Figure 8-8. R1PT and R2PT trough for washing probes
8-9
8.2.3. Reaction Tray (RCT)

The reaction tray (RCT) consists of the cuvette ring set and rotating mechanism.
RCT is provided with 60 hard glass cuvettes (6mm * 6mm) on its outer
circumference and the temperature inside is kept at 37ºC (+/- 0.2ºC) constantly.
The cuvettes are moved at 10-second step and a series of process including
dispensation, stirring, photometric measurement and washing to be performed.
Cuvettes
Figure 8-9. Reaction tray
8.2.4. RGT Cooling Unit

Even if the analyzer’s secondary switch is off, the temperature inside the RGT unit
is kept within the specified limits by the Peltier element that is controlled by CPU.
(Secondary switch is located on the left side of the analyzer.)
8.2.5. Photometer Unit

This analyzer uses flat field polychromator for measuring the optical densities of
reaction mixtures. This polychromator is constructed with a concave grating which
is optimized for forming the image of the entrance slit on the photo detector array
and for dispersing light into its component wavelengths. This eliminates several
optical interferences and greatly improves the efficiency of the photometer. The
dispersed beam falls on the twelve photo detector elements with a narrow optical
window. The second order attenuation is achieved by deploying glass filters for
near IR and UV regions. The current generated by each element of the detector
array is converted to voltage and amplified by high input impedance and high gain
operational amplifiers. These amplified voltage signals are shielded and
transmitted to a high precision Data Acquisition System. The reaction disk consists
of 60 permanent hard glass cuvettes arranged individually in a circle. They are
maintained at 37°C (+/- 0.2°C) using a dry block incubator. The entire disk rotates
counter-clockwise and advances one cuvette position every 10 seconds such that
the next cuvette is available for reagent dispensing, sample dispensing, etc.
The Photometer Unit consists of the optical measurement system and light source.
The absorbance inside the cuvette of the RCT unit is measured by using a
photometer. Measurement is performed with any combinations of 2 wavelengths
selected among the following 12 wavelengths:
8-10
340 nm, 376 nm, 415nm, 450 nm, 480 nm, 505 nm, 546nm, 570 nm, 600 nm,
660 nm, 700 nm, 750nm.
Figure 8-10. Photometer unit
8.2.6. Mixing Stirrer Unit

The stirrer of analyzer consists of two paddles, which spin when the motor is
activated. This is a dual stirrer. The separate stirrer paddles are used to mix
reagent 1 with sample and reagent 2 with sample + reagent 1 mixture.
This stirring action is used for mixing the reaction mixture after addition of the
sample to the reagent in the cuvette and/or after addition of the second reagent.
The stirrers are activated from their 'home' position and move into the cuvettes.
When the stirrers are in contact with the reaction mixture (in the cuvette), they are
activated and spun. This ensures a thorough mixing of the solution. The stirrer
assembly is shown below.
Figure 8-11. Stirrer unit
8-11
8.2.7. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU)

The Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) is to wash the insides of cuvettes in which the
measurement of specimen have been completed and allow them to be reused.
The CRU consists of 7 stages of drainage and 5 injection nozzles (probe number 6
is for drainage only), one stage of residual wipe tip and nozzle up-and-down
mechanism. The processed solution in the cuvettes is drained at the end of the
completion of measurement, and then their insides are washed with DI water or
wash solution.
Probe Number Action
Aspirates the bio -
hazardous waste
and dispenses
Cleaning Solution.
Aspirates the
cuvette contents,
and dispenses DI
water
Aspirates the
cuvette content
Dries the reaction Cuvette Rinsing Unit

cuvette
Knob for CRU and washer-New assy
8-12
8.2.8. Liquid Level Sensing (Float Sensors)

The Liquid Level Sensor are placed inside the respective Cans of DI water,
Cleaning solution, Bio-hazardous waste & normal waste Can. Accordingly, for DI
water and cleaning solution, the float based level sensors will sense the low level of
DI water or cleaning solution and respective LED will lit on the instrument with the
beep sound. Similarly, full levels are detected for both the waste can & respective
LEDs are lit accordingly with beep sound. All the LEDS are placed just near to the
tube connection for the same cans.
Figure 8-12. Float sensors

OR
Float Sensor for Bio-Hazard Waste Can Float sensor for DI Water Can
Float Sensor for Cleaning Solution Can Float Sensor for Diluted Waste Can
8-13
8.2.9. Probe vertical obstructing detection Sensor – VOD

When Probe tip is obstructed vertically in trough, cuvette, Sample cup / tube,
reagent bottles etc., through the probe mechanism it cuts the opto mounted on
LLS PCB assembly & VOD signal generated, the same is sent the VOD signal to
CPU to display respective Error.
8.3. Test Loader Device

Test Loader Device is used to scan the details of system packs for Closed channel
reagents.
Test Loader Functionality :
 Test Loader device scans the details of System Pack Reagent kits including lot
number, expiry date, pack size etc.
 Analyzer performs open/closed-channel tests only after scanning the System Pack
Reagent kits.
 Analyzer performs open channel tests not exceeding the total test-count, as read
from System Pack Reagent kits. Open channel tests can also be loaded using
special cards which may be available for purchase from manufacture in special
circumstances.
 System will intimate user about expiry of open test counts (for cards expiring soon)
as read from the special cards / System Pack Reagent kits.
 Once open test-counts are exhausted, it is not allowed to perform further open
tests, until user scans the new System Pack Reagent kits.
 System will intimate user during run if open test count reaches 10 & below
·
·
8-14
Test Loader Device is required forTest Loader System.
8-15
9. Electronic Circuit Description

This section deals with the electronic circuits and their functions; it gives an
overview regarding the general aspect of the PCB assembly, its electronic
description and the possible errors and faults, which can occur due to malfunction
in the component for that assembly.
It provides the complete reference for the service personnel for diagnosis.
9-1
9.1. Block Diagram – 230V Model
9-2
9.2. Block Diagram – 110V Model
9-3
9.3. BKPL PCB ELS22014R0

Back plane pcb assy. is being used as termination for power supply for pcb assy’s. &
connectivity to pcb assy’s i.e.Robo pcb, ADC pcb, Opto pcb, Step tray pcb and Step
Arm pcb assemblies.
Power Supply termination details are as follows.
a) Violet : VPP_GND
b)Yellow : VPP
c) RED : VCC
d) Black : GND
e) White : P_VCC
f)Brown : P_GND
g) Orange : +15V
h) Green : A_GND
i)Blue : -15V
Component Layout:
Silkscreen Top:
9-4
Silk screen Bottom:
9-5
9-6
9.4. XLADC PCB ELS22003R4.1

XLADC PCB assembly controls the various functions of the analyzer by using the
software on board. It is the major component, which is responsible for
synchronization and control of all assemblies and peripherals motor, calculations,
check photometric gains, temperature control validation, data storage, and data
transmission through RS 232.
Electronic Description: XLADC PCB ASSEMBLY is having micro controller
89C251B with 64K memory EPROM & 64K memory RAM.
The power 89C251B micro controller is acting as a master with clock of (OSC) 11.5
MHz. The program is stored in EPROM (IC 27C256/27C512). Data is stored in 64K
NV RAM (IC 48Z128Y-70) which has a battery backup. The chip select signals are
generated by 74HC32 and 74HC00 for memory address space.
I/O space is decoded using GAL. Micro controller is used for generating baud rate for
serial interface MAX 232 single supply level shifter to generate true RS232 level
shifter.
Data Acquisition System is interfaced using amplifier in line with multiplexer. CMOS
channel multiplexer is used for multiplexing different analog inputs - photometer
output, 5V, +12V, VPP, Lamp voltage, temperature signals, and ground.
The Temperature is controlled by micro controller 89C2051 which has RAM & ROM
packaged into a 20 pin DIP; it monitors the temperature depending upon the input
requirements by the machine.
The ISE module is controlled through the serial interface.
Connectors: P1/P2 connected to the Backplane PCB BKP5
 CN1 (10 PIN FRC) Temperature Control
PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 HEATER SENSOR 6 NC
2 - 15V 7 NC
3 COOLER SENSORE 8 NC
4 -15V 9 NC
5 NC 10 NC
 CN2 (30 Pin FRC CONNECTOR) Photometer signals

Parameters Supplied on request
 CN5 ( RJ45 Type connector) Serial Comm. ISE Module

1 6
2 7
9-7
3 8
4 9
5
 CN4 ( RJ45 Type connector) Serial Comm. PC interface

1 GND 6 NC
2 RXD 7 NC
3 TXD 8 NC
4 NC 9 NC
5 NC
9-8
XL ADC PCB ELS22003R 4.1 Block Diagram
9-9
XLADC Component Layout
9.5. XLROBO PCB ELS22013R2

Electronic Description: XLROBO PCB ASSEMBLY board receives the signals
from XLADC board for robotics movements, identifies the present condition of the
robotics and accordingly gives commands / signals to the Motor control boards 1, 2
AC drive & DC Drive board for robotics movement.
XLROBO PCB ASSEMBLY is having micro controller 89C251B with 64K memory
EPROM & 64K memory RAM.
The 89C251B micro controller acts as a master with a clock of (OSC) 11.0592
MHz. The program is stored in EPROM (IC 27C256/27C512). Data is stored in
64K static RAM (IC 71024S12YG) which has a battery backed up. The chip select
signals are generated by 74HC32 and 74HC00 for memory address space.
It uses 32 bit I/O for communicating to the peripheral controllers for the other
assemblies. Micro controller is used for generating baud rate for serial interface
MAX 232 single supply level shifter to generate true RS232 level shifter.
It contains a PAL for generating the error signals which are caused during
malfunction of the particular assembly. It has RS232 inputs for the barcodes
identification for Reagent table, Auto sampler unit, ISE Module and connectivity to
9-10
Personal Computer. This Board has individual Controllers 89C55 for control of
SPT, R1PT, R2PT, ASP RCT, and RGT. Which communicate with the micro
controller 89C251 using RS485 communication protocol Master Clock is 24 MHz.
The controller's 89C52 handles the motor signals and individual sensors signals.
The serial ports of the controllers for ASP & RGT are used for bar code decoding
of the reagent labels and sample identification.
The ISE module is controlled through the serial interface.
Adjustments: No adjustment required on this board.
Connectors: P1/P2 connected to the Backplane PCB BKP5.
 CNISECOM1 (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) Serial Comm. ISE module
1 6
2 7
NOT USED
3 8
4 9
5
 CNPCCOM 1 (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) Serial Comm. PC interface

1 6
2 7
NOT USED
3 8
4 9
5
 CNASP BAR (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) ASP Barcode sensor

PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO SIGNAL
1 GND 6 NC
2 TXD 7 NC
3 RXD 8 NC
4 NC 9 NC
5 NC
 CNRGT BAR (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) RGT Barcode sensor

PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO SIGNAL
1 GND 6 NC
2 TXD 7 NC
3 RXD 8 NC
9-11
4 NC 9 NC
5 NC
 JCAPLLS (20 PIN FRC CONNECTOR)

PIN SIGNAL PIN NO SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL PIN NO SIGNAL
NO. NO.
1 NC 6 VCC 11 RG1LLS 16 GND
2 NC 7 GND 12 RG1LLSAZ 17 NC
3 NC 8 SPTLLS 13 GND 18 NC
4 NC 9 SPTLLSAZ 14 RG2LLS 19 NC
5 GND 10 GND 15 RG2LLSAZ 20 NC
 DIN96_ABC/R_1 (96 PIN PCB Connector: CONNECTION DETAIL OF

XLADC BKPL CONN)
PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
A4 B4 C4
A5 B5 C5 RCT SENSE 3
A8 B8 C8 SYS RESET
A9 GND B9 C9 GND
A10 B10 C10
A11 GND B11 C11
A12 B12 C12
A13 B13 C13
A14 B14 C14
A15 GND B15 C15
A16 B16 C16
A17 GND B17 C17
A18 B18 C18
A19 GND B19 C19 XLROB0–ADC-D0
A20 B20 C20 D1
A21 B21 C21 D2
A22 B22 C22 D3
A23 B23 C23 D4
A24 B24 C24 D5
A25 B25 C25 D6
9-12
A26 B26 C26 D7

A27 B27 C27 INTR-PRL2
A28 B28 C28 PRL2-BUSY
A29 B29 C29 XLROBO ACK
A30 B30 C30 INTRT –251 ADC
A31 B31 C31
A32 5V B32 5V C32 5V
 DIN96_ABC/R_2 (96 PIN PCB Connector)

A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
A4 B4 C4
A5 B5 C5
A6 B6 C6
A7 B7 C7
A8 B8 C8
A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A11 B11 C11
A12 B12 C12
A13 B13 C13
A14 B14 C14
A15 B15 C15
A16 B16 C16
A17 B17 C17
A18 B18 C18
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23
A24 B24 C24
A25 B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 B28 C28
A29 B29 C29
A30 B30 + 15V C30
A31 B31 AGND C31
A32 B32 -15V C32
9-13
1. XLROBO PCB Block Diagram
9-14
2. Silkscreen –Top (ELS22013R2)
OR
9-15
Silk Screen TOP ELS22013R3
OR
9-16
9.6. ROBO ADC PCB ELS22035R2.1/ R3 / R4

ROBO ADC pcb Assy. is being replaced to ROBO &ADC pcb Assy.
ARM7 pcb assy is being installed in SECOND slot of Card rack & Slot 1 of Card
rack is vacant..
Interconnected with the help of interconnection diagram.
Architecture is based on ARM7 core. NXP make LPC2378 is being used to
interface peripherals through P89V51RD2 as Slaves for ASP – U14
,R1:U21,R2::U23,RCT:U25,RGT: U27,SPT:U30. As well as interfaced ADC for
photometer signal measurement, RCT , RGT temperature , USB ,sleep mode
All slaves are communicated through RS485 bus to ARM7 to perform respective
operations.
Power Supply Check :
+5V VCC Supply connected through J6 wrt , DGND , Logic supply 3V3 output
voltage at TP 5 wrt DGND .+5V DC at TP17 / TP12 , output 3V3 – LED3 : at
TP5.wrt DGND TP15
+/-15V power supply - TP14 : LED1 / TP8 : LED2 connected as an input at J7.
Output voltage measured with DMM , +5V ANA :- LED11 TP9 , -5V ANA :
LED10, TP20 : wrt ANA GND : TP10
IC U10 is being used for RESET.
Max 3232 : U9 is being used for ISE serial communication.
Slaves controllers would be programmed on board : ISP : As mentioned below.
ADC Measurement : Photometer signal is connected at connector J1 , MUX
DG506J for wavelength selection ,buffered U20 – U5 , AGC U7 , Amplified by
U2,U6 & amplified analog signal is be ing measured & converted in to Digital with
the help of U11 – ADC : ADS8505. ADC interfaced with ARM7 – U1.
OFF SET ADJ. Check
Switch OFF the Lamp Assy , measure the voltage at TP2 : It should be zero.
Measure at TP4 : Adjusted to 0.0001 with the help of P5
Measure at TP1 : Adjusted to 0.0001 with the help of P1
Bar code scanners: Integrated with ASP controller with the help of MAX3232 &
DB9 connector.
SLEEP Mode: Interconnected J13 – Pin 1,2,3 to Sleep mode Pcb assy connector
J5..
Temp. Sense : RCT – RGT : RGT , RCT temperature sensor’s connected at J9.
POT P2 to adjust RCT Temp. , POT P4 for RGT Temperature.
9-17
Silk Screen Top :
9-18
OR
Silk TOP for ELS22035R3
9-19
OR
Silk TOP for ELS22035R4
9-20
9.6.1. ARM7 based ROBO ADC PCB Programming Procedure
1. Pre-requisites
 Serial cable to program LPC2378 ARM7 as MASTER controller.
 Serial cable to program P89v51RD2 as SLAVE controller.
 Flash Magic utility should be installed in PC to program the controller.
 To program the controller Jumpers required for shorting the link.
 PC with Serial port.
 Robo ADC pcb assy. duly power supply checked , interconnected to PC.
 During both IC programming ensure that Bafo USB Cable has been
disconnected i.e. either Programming Cable or Bafo USB cable should be
connected to PC
2. Programming procedure for loading the hex file in LPC2378 micro-

controller:
 Make a note of working COM port connected to Analyzer.
 Switch OFF the Analyzer.
 Connect PC com serial cable at CN4 as “PC comm.”.
 Short JP27 link with jumper link for programming mode.
 Switch ON the Analyzer.
 Open the Flash magic software as shown in fig1.a and fig1.b
9-21
fig1.a
fig1.b
Select the Target device LPC2378 in flash magic to program.
9-22
Click on Select device as shown in fig2.a
fig2.a
A window name Device database will open which contains different controller for
selection as shown in fig2.b
fig 2.b
Under that Select ARM7 and click on ‘+’ to show different ARM7 controllers as
shown in fig2.c
9-23
fig 2.c
Scroll down the bar and Select LPC2378 controller only and Click OK as shown in
fig 2.d
fig2.d
LPC2378 should be displayed.
9-24
Select the appropriate COM Port which is connected to Analyzer as shown in fig3
(if you are using MultiXL COM port then Switch OFF the MultiXL then select Com
port)
fig3
Select Baud rate most preferably 19200. as shown in fig4
fig4
Select Interface: None ISP. as shown in fig.5
fig.5
Keep Oscillator freq (Mhz): 12 or it can be left blank as shown below.
9-25
Go to Option tab and Click Advanced options as shown below in fig.6.a
Fig.6a
Another window named Advanced Options will be displayed as shown in fig6.b
Fig6.b
Click on Hardware Config tab and Unclick both option as shown in fig 6c
Unclick: Use DTR and RTS to control RST and ISP pin.
9-26
Unclick: Assert DTR and RTS while comm. Port open.
Unclick
Fig6.c
Configure the Step2: Erase section of flash magic as shown in fig7
Fig 7
Unclick: Erase all Flash+Code Rd Prot.
Click : Erase blocks used by Hex file.
Configure the Step3: Browse the Hex file to be programmed in LPC2378 as shown
in fig8.a
For eg: C:\ESW\XL600\Flash\ XL600ESW2014_01ARM_MS.hex
9-27
Fig 8.a
Configure the Step4: Options as shown in fig9.a
Fig9.a
Click: Verify after programming
Click: Fill unused flash.
After making all the setting and selecting the Hex file recheck the settings.
Click on Start button and progress bar will be displayed as shown in fig10.a
fig10.a
Initially it will erase blocks
Program/loads the hex file
Verify the hex file
Finished: To load hex file completely takes approx 9min.
9-28
After successfully downloading the hex file Switch OFF the Analyzer and remove
the JP27 shorting link.
Programming procedure for loading the hex file in P89v51RD2 micro-
controller
 Program procedure for ASP P89v51RD2(Sample Tray)
1. Take Slave programming Serial cable to program P89v51RD2 controller.
2. Switch OFF the Analyzer.
3. Connect one end (ie DB9) of serial cable to PC’s working COM port and
other end (3pin connector) to J29 (SLAVE PROG) on ARM7 interface
board.
4. For programming mode short the link JP5,JP6 and JP7 using jumper.
5. (note: during programming 89v51RD2 shorting link JP27 should not
connected/shorted)
6. Do not turn turn ON the analyzer, it can be Turned ON in the later stage ie
after configuring flash magic setting.
7. Open the flash magic software as shown in fig1.a and fig1.b
fig1.a
9-29
fig1.b
Select the Target device 89V51RD2 in flash magic to program.
Click on Select device as shown in fig7.a
fig7.a
A window name Device database will open which contains different controller for
selection as shown in fig2.b
9-30
Fig 2.b
Under that Select 80C51 and click on ‘+’ to display different 8051 controllers as
shown in fig2.c
9-31
Fig 2.c
Scroll down the bar and Select 89v51RD2 controller and Click OK as shown in
fig2.d
Fig2.d
89V51RD2 should be displayed.
Select the appropriate COM Port which is connected to Analyzer as shown in

fig3.a (Note: if you are using MultiXL COM port then Switch OFF the MultiXL then
select Com port)
fig3.a
Select Baud rate most preferably 9600. as shown in fig4.a
9-32
fig4.a
Select Interface: None ISP. as shown infig5.a
fig5.a
Do not consider Oscillator freq(Mhz) or skip oscillator setting.
Go to Option tab and Click Advanced options as shown below in fig6.a
Fig6.a
Another window named Advanced Options will be displayed as shown in fig6.b
9-33
Fig6.b
Click on Hardware Config tab and Unclick both option and click OK as shown in fig
6.c
Unclick :Use DTR to control RST.
Unclick :Assert DTR and RTS while comm. Port open.
Fig6.c
9-34
Configure the Step2: Erase section of flash magic as shown in fig7.a
Fig 7.a
Unclick option box: Erase all Flash. (never tick this (erase all flash) option for
89v51RD2 programming)
Click option box: Erase blocks used by Hex file.
Configure the Step3: Browse the Hex file to be programmed in LPC2378 as shown
in fig8.a
For eg: C:\ESW\XL600\Flash\ ASP_ARM01.hex
Fig 8.a
Configure the Step4: Options as shown below in fig9.a
Fig9.a
Click: Verify after programming.
: Fill unused flash.
Unclick: Set Security Bit 1.
: Gen block checksums.
: Prog clocks bit.
9-35
After making all the setting and selecting the Hex file recheck all the settings.
Click on Start button and progress bar will be displayed as shown in fig10.a
fig10.a
After clicking on Start button wait for few second to Pop up new window named
Reset device as shown in fig 10.b
Fig 10.b
Now Switch ON the Analyzer (to reset the IC) and programming will start as shown
below.
Initially it will erase blocks
9-36
Program/loads the hex file
Verify the hex file
Finished: To load hex file completely takes approx 4min.
After successfully downloading the hex file Switch OFF the Analyzer and remove
jumpers JP5, JP6 and JP7 shorting link.
Now rest of the 89v51Rd2 controllers can be programmed in similar way as
mentioned below.
Program procedure for R1PT P89v51RD2(R1 ARM)
Just Browse and select R1 ARM hex file.
Shorting link will change as follows
For programming mode short the link JP8,JP9 and JP10 using jumper.
Repeat all the above steps of ASP I) of 1.3
 Program procedure for R2PT P89v51RD2(R2 ARM)
Just Browse and select R2 ARM hex file.
For programming mode short the link JP11, JP12 and JP13 using jumper.
 Program procedure for RCT P89v51RD2(RCT Tray)

Just Browse and select RCT hex file.
 Program procedure for RGT P89v51RD2(RGT Tray)

Just Browse and select RGT hex file.
9-37
Shorting link will change as follows,

 Program procedure for SPT P89v51RD2(Sample ARM)

Just Browse and select SPT ARM hex file.
Shorting link will change as follows,
For programming mode short the link JP20,JP21 and JP22 using jumper.
After successfully programming all the controllers of the ARM7 Interface board,
remove all the shorting link jumpers used during programming to work the
Analyzer in Normal / Operating Mode.
Switch ON the Analyzer and check the Version.
9.7. Opto Sensor PCB ELS22024R0

General Description: The OPTO sensor PCB is interfacing between the Motor
control PCB and the XL ROBO PCB assembly. It inputs all the OPTO sensor
signals coming from all the mechanical assemblies, adjusts the voltage levels
compatible for input to the XLROBO and XLADC PCB assemblies for generating
the final mechanical control signals to the motor control board.
Basically it interprets the signals from various assemblies.
Electronic Description: It consists of array of Schmitt Trigger circuit (IC 7414)for
adjusting the signal voltage level to optimum level for identifying the correct digital
output by the XLROBO PCB Assembly for generating the control signals to the
various assemblies through the motor control board.
Connectors: P1/P2 connected to the Backplane PCB BKP5
 JDRIV (20 Pin FRC Connector).
1 SPT CKD 11 TAKASAGO2
2 VCC 12 NC
3 R1PT CKD 13 TAKASAGO1
4 VCC 14 GND
5 R2PTCKD 15 HEATER
6 VCC 16 GND
7 STIR CKD 17 KNF PUMP
8 VCC 18 GND
9 AIR CKD 19 NC
10 NC 20 GND
9-38
 JTRAY (34 Pin FRC Connector)

1 VCC 16 VCC 31 NC
2 GND 17 R1PP SN1 32 WASTE
3 RGT SN1 18 GND 33 NC
4 RGT SN2 19 VCC 34 NC
5 VCC 20 R2PP SN1
6 GND 21 GND
7 RCT SN1 22 VCC
8 RCT SN2 23 CRU SN1
9 VCC 24 GND
10 GND 25 VCC
11 ASP SN1 26 CRU SN2
12 ASP SN2 27 GND
13 VCC 28 VCC
14 SPP SN1 29 WATER
15 GND 30 GND
9-39

A1 VPP (24 V) B1 VPP (24 V) C1 VPP (24 V)
A5 GND (24 V) B5 GND (24 V) C5 GND (24 V)
A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23
A24 B24 C24
A25 B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 B28 C28
A29 VCC (P 5V) B29 VCC (P 5V) C29 VCC (P 5V)
A31 GND B31 GND C31 GND
A1 ASP CL B1 SPTUDCL C1 R1PTUDCL
A2 ASP DR B2 SPTUDDR C2 R1PTUDDR
A3 B3 SPTRTCL C3 R1PTRTCL
A4 B4 SPTRTDR C4 R1PTRTDR
A5 R2PTUDCL B5 SPPSACL C5 R1PPRGCL
A6 R2PTUDDR B6 SPPSADR C6 R1PPRGDR
A7 R2PTRTCL B7 STIR RTCL C7
9-40
A8 R2PTRTDR B8 STIRRTDR C8
A9 R2PPRGCL B9 SPPEV C9 R1PPEV
A10 R2PPRGDR B10 RCTCL C10
A11 STIRUDCL B11 RCTDR C11 R1PTAX
A12 STIRUDDR B12 KNF PUMP C12 RGTCL
A13 R2PPEV B13 STIR CKD C13 RGTDR
A14 R2PT STIR B14 TAKASAGO1 C14
A15 WASTE B15 R1PTCKD C15 RCTHT

OVERFLOW
A16 CRUCL B16 SPTCKD C16
A17 CRU DR B17 R2PTCKD C17
A18 TAKASAGO2 B18 AIRCKD C18
A19 ASP STOP B19 SPT UDHM C19 R1PTUDHM
A20 ASP BASE B20 SPT RTCV C20 R1PTRTCV
A21 B21 SPTAX C21 R1PTAX
A22 B22 SPTRTTR C22 R1PTRTTR
A23 B23 SPTRTSM C23 WASTE

OVERFLOW
A24 B24 R2PPRGHM C24 RGT STOP
A25 B25 C25 RGT BASE
A26 R2PT RTCN B26 R1PPRGHM C26 RCT STOP
A27 R2PTUDHM B27 C27 RCT BASE
A28 R2PTRTTR B28 SPPRGHM C28
A29 R2PTRTBT B29 C29 STRAX
A30 CRU UP B30 C30 STRUP
A31 WATER B31 CRUDOWN C31 STR TR

FLOW
A32 R2PTAX B32 C32 STR CV
9-41
OPTO sensor PCB Block Diagram
9-42
Silk screen TOP OPTO PCB ELS22024R0
9-43
9.8. Step Arm PCB ELS22011R0

General Description: Step Arm / Motor drive 1 board drives different robotics
through stepper motors. It controls the following assemblies.
 SPT up, down & horizontal rotating movement
 SPP movement
 R1PT up, down & horizontal rotating movement
 R1PP movement
 R2PT up, down & horizontal rotating movement
 R2PP movement
Electronic Description: The incoming control signals from the XL ROBO board
are interfaced through OPTO isolators to Stepper motor decoder IC L6202 and the
motors are driven by a set of Stepper motor driver ICL297.Each section is having
an array of the above for driving the particular assemblies. Adjustments and Test
point: No adjustment available on this board.
Connectors: P1/P2 connected to the Backplane PCB BKP5.
 SPTUD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
3 during operation of
4 the motor)
 SPTRT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 SPTSYR (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R1PTUD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R1PTRT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
9-44
PIN NO. SIGNAL

1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R1PTSYR (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R2PTUD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R2PTRT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R2PTSYR (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)

A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
9-45

A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23
A24 B24 C24
A25 B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 B28 C28
9-46

A31 WATER FLOW B31 CRUDOWN C31 STR TR
Step Arm PCB ELS22011R0 Block Diagram
9-47
Step Arm PCB ELS22011R0 Components Layout
9-48
9.9. Step Tray PCB ELS22010R0

General Description: Step tray Pcb / Motor Board drives different robotics
through stepper motors. It controls the following assemblies.
 ASP movement;
 STIRRER up, down / rotate movement
 RGT movement
 RCT movement
 CRU up /down movement
 Lee valves of the SPP, RIPP, R2PP
 Stirrer Motor
Electronic Description: The incoming control signals from the XL ROBO board
are interfaced through OPTO isolators to Stepper motor decoder IC L26202 and
the motors are driven by a set of Stepper motor driver ICL297.Each section is
having an array of the above for driving the particular assemblies.
Adjustments and Test point: No adjustments available on this board.
Connectors: P1/P2 connected to the Backplane PCB BKP5 (1) ASP (4 Pin
MOLEX Connector)
 ASP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 STIRUD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 STIRRT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 RGT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
9-49
3
4
 RCT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 CRUUD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 LAMP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 Not used
2
3
4
 RIPTSTIR (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)
 R2PSTIR (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 29V pulse width
2 modulated (only
4 the motor)


9-50

A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23
A24 B24 C24
A25 B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 B28 C28
OVERFLOW
9-51

OVERFLOW
A31 WATER FLOW B31 CRUDOWN C31 STR TR
9-52
Step Tray PCB ELS22010 R0 Block Diagram
9-53
Silk Screen TOP
9-54
9.10. AC Drive PCB ELS22009R2/R3

General Description: The AC DRIVE PCB Assembly drives the hydraulic section
of the machine. It also distributes the power to the different hydraulic assemblies
like valves, pumps. The units driven by the AC drive are as follows.
 R1PT CKD valve
 R2PT CKD valve
 SPT CKD valve
 STIR CKD valve
 AIRCKD valve
 15V INPUT
 24 & 15 V SUPPLY
 TAKASAGO Valve 1
 TAKASAGO Valve 2
 Water supply CKD valve.
 VACC_PP
 RCT HEATER SUPPLY
 110/40 VAC supply for valves
 230 volt input
Electronic Description: It consists of power switch and relays which control the
hydraulic section
Adjustments and Test point: Refer to section 6.
Connectors.
 CN1 (20 PIN FRC Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 VCC 6 R2PTCKD 11 NC 16 HEATER
2 SPTCKD 7 VCC 12 TAKASAGO2 17 GND
3 VCC 8 STIRCKD 13 NC 18 KNFPUMP
4 R1PTCKD 9 VCC 14 TAKASAGO1 19 NC
5 VCC 10 AIRCKD 15 GND 20 GND
9-55
 R1PTCKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 R2PTCKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 SPTCKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 STIR CKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 AIRCKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 TAKA1 (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
9-56
 TAKA2 (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 WAT_CKD (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 VACC_PP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 110V COM
2 110V AC
3
4
 HEATER (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 40V COM
2 40V AC
3
4
 110V / 40 V (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 AC 40V COM
2 40V AC
3
4
 230V (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 Not used
2
3
4
9-57
 KNF_PP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 Not used
2
3
4
 24V/5V (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 GND
2 GND
3 24V(INPUT)
4 5V(OUTPUT)
 15V_VP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 + 15 V
2 - 15 V
3
4
9-58
Silk screen TOP- ELS22009R2

L1-Leaded coil
OR
9-59
Silk screen TOP- ELS22009R3

L1-Leaded coil/L1A-SMD coil
9.11. DC Drive PCB ELS22002 R1/R2/R3

General Description: The DC DRIVE PCB Assembly drives the hydraulic
DETERGENT PUMP of the machine.
Electronic Description: It consists of power relays which supplies power to the
pumps.
Adjustments and Test point: Refer to section 6
9-60
Connectors:
 JDRIV (20 PIN FRC Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 VCC 6 R2PTCKD 11 NC 16 HEATER
2 SPTCKD 7 VCC 12 TAKASAGO2 17 GND
3 VCC 8 STIRCKD 13 NC 18 KNFPUMP
4 R1PTCKD 9 VCC 14 TAKASAGO1 19 NC
5 VCC 10 AIRCKD 15 GND 20 GND
 JPOWER (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 GND
2 GND
3 24V
4 5V
 JKNF60 (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 Not Used
2
3
4
 JDETERGENT (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1 Pump Voltage
2
3
4
 JPUMP (4 Pin MOLEX Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1
2 USED FOR
POWERING THE
3 FRONT PANEL LED
4
9-61
Silk screen TOP –ELS22002R1
OR
9-62
Silk screen TOP –ELS22002R2
Or
9-63
9.12. Lamp Power Supply PCB ELS22004R1 OR SMPS

12V:5A – 12V:6A
General Description: This is used for supplying the power to lamp and 15 V
Electronic Description: It is an SMPS which inputs 20V and outputs stable
supply of 12V / 20W as lamp power. It also supplies 15 V as input to the back
plane PCB.
Lamp Power Supply PCB Block Diagram (XL Power)
9-64
Lamp Power Supply PCB Component Layout
9.13. RS232 Isolator PCB ELS22030R2

General Description: This is used for isolating the system power signals and
supplies from the computer interface
Electronic Description: It consists of two sections one is the PC side and other is
the equipment sedate consists of bridge rectifiers and associated filter circuits for
each section.
Adjustments and Test point: No adjustments available
Connectors:
9-65
 PC (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) Serial Comm. PC interface.

1 NC 6 NC
2 TXD 7 NC
3 RXD 8 NC
4 NC 9 NC
5 GND
 XL (9 PIN D-Type CONNECTOR) Serial Comm. PC interface.
1 NC 6 NC
2 TXD 7 NC
3 RXD 8 NC
4 NC 9 NC
5 GND
9-66
RS 232 Isolator PCB ELS22030R2 Components Layout
9-67
9.14. LLS PCB ELS52009R5 / ELS52010R4

The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is used to detect:
 Level of Sample in the Sample cup / Test Tube.
 Level of Reagents in Reagent Tray as R1.
 Level of Reagents in Reagent Tray as R2.
To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) of Probe mounted on respective ARM
assembly as Sample, R1, R2 in cup, tube, bottle etc.
OPTO is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’ for respective
arm assembly & same will be sending to FPGA for further action.
The Liquid Level Sense PCB assembly – LLS PCB assembly is made up of LLS
S/H PCB ELS52009R5 and LLS Signal board ELS52010R4.
LLS Signal board is mounted on LLS S/H PCB ELS52009R5 with the help of 4 pin
SIL Berg strip. LLS out signal are being represented with the help of flashing of
LED D3 as Probe is touches/sense to Liquid.
Power is supplied to LLS PCB assembly through 4 pin connector J 4 as Pin 1: + 5
V, Pin 2: GND, Pin 3: -5 V, Pin 4: Unconnected.
LLS S/H PCB ELS52009R5: It is used to generate LLS out signal by converting
analog signal in to TTL signal with the help of Op-Amp configured as differential
amplifier, in synchronization with Sample & Hold IC (U3), Op-Amp configured as
comparator, VOD signals. Reference voltage is generated to comparator with the
help of D1–LM385 (2V5 – Shunt regulator- temp. compensated).
LLS Signal board ELS52010R4: It is used as compare delta of Probe capacitor
with reference of 100 pF. Reference frequency of 32.768 KHz is generated with
the help of Crystal & converted in to TTL square wave with Schmidt trigger IC
74HC14.
Frequency to voltage is converted with the help of F – V converter IC 2907(U1) &
output will be sending to Sample & Hold & Differential amplifier.
Probe signal is generated through Probe by connecting wire to probe body &
connected to J1 on LLS S/H Board.
The method of sensing is capacitive. The function of LLS is Respective ARM
Assembly is positioned to respective location defined as per RUN. Auto Zero
signal is generated by FPGA to reset & buffered with the help of tri state buffer
U19A, then arm is moving down towards liquid to sense liquid. Liquid is sensed by
probe of sample ARM assembly LED D3 flashes. LLS out signal are being sent to
FPGA.
During sensing, traveling of ARM assembly, if probe obstruct then VOD signal is
being generated to display Error message as “VOD Error”. Manually it can be
checked by allowing probe to lift slightly in UP’ direction.
9-68
Plate fixed to Arm assembly is cut the light path of OPTO & change the state vice
versa. Arm initialized will encounter the VOD error.
The berg strip pin (#2) behind the ground pin of 4 pin connector is connected to the
output of the signal card. The voltage at this pin (#2) WRT ground pin has to be
approximately 1.85 V with the probe in air.
As per system requirement LLS sense PCB’s, following are the selected
components to respective Arm assemblies.
 Sample Arm:
R3, R6 : SMD resistor 68K 0.1% 100ppm. R8: SMD resistor 2K2
R9 : SMD resistor 2K2
R13 : SMD resistor 150K C1: SMD capacitor 22nF.
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.20V DC Approximately.
 Reagent Arm R1: R3, R6: SMD resistor 68K 0.1% 100ppm.
R8 : SMD resistor 1.5K2
R13 : SMD resistor 68K C1: SMD capacitor 33nF
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.50V DC Approximately.
 Reagent Arm R2: R3, R6: SMD resistor 47K 0.1% 100ppm.
C1 : SMD capacitor 33nF
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.50V DC approximately.
Location: LLS PCB assembly is located on the Sample Arm, Reagent R1 Arm,
and Reagent R2 Arm’s Base of the Arm assembly.
Refer Below figure: Silk-screen layout of LLS S/H board ELS52009R5 Top – SST
& Bottom side SSB & silk-screen layout of LLS Signal board ELS52010R4 Top –
SST & Bottom side SSB.
9-69
Component Layout ELS52009R5
Component Layout ELS52010R4
OR
9-70
9.15. New LLS PCB ELS22036R2.1 / ELS52023R0

The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is being used to detect the level of sample in
the Sample cup / test tube & reagent in reagent bottles.
To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) in cup, tube etc. of probe, Opto U6 mounted
on ARM assy. Opto U6 is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’
& same will be sent to FPGA for further action.
The Liquid level Sense PCB assy – 455 KHz modulated signal is generated with
the help of 455 KHz resonator Y1 & IC U1 – 74HC14. Probe connected at J1 –
Pin1: Probe signal, Pin2: GND. IC U3: Quad Op-Amp TL074 is used as U3A:
buffer, U3B: Differential Amplifier, and U3C: Differentiator.
When probe touches to liquid in the cup, bottle etc. electrical signal is generated
with respect to change of capacitance & is being converted to respective DC with
Diode D3, filtered with RC low pass filter, amplified for measurement with the help
of U3-B, differentiated with U3-C. Output of Differentiator will be proportional to
RC*change of voltage with respect to Time.
When probe touches to liquid, positive peak is generated & from probe travelling
from liquid to air negative peak will be generated. Output of Differentiator will be
sending for positive peak detection to U2A with respect to threshold +2.50V. When
output crosses threshold voltage, comparator changes its output & negative
detection to U2B, threshold voltage: -2.50V. Output of comparator U2 will be sent
to Clear / Preset of D flip-flop U4 synchronized with Auto Zero/LLS Enable as a
CLK to D flip-flop.
(JP1 : Pin 1 - 2 : ON)
Output of D flip-flop is LLS out signal sending to CPU PCB assy for next action.
LLS out visually indicated by LED2.
+5V indicated by LED1 as Power ON.
J4: Pin1: +5V, Pin2: GND, Pin3: -5V, Pin4: Unconnected.
J5:Pin1: Auto Zero/LLS Enable, Pin2: LLS Out, Pin3: VOD OUT
Selected Components of LLS PCB Assy are mentioned as below.
R24: 3K3
R19: 15K
C9: 4.7µF
R11: 330K for Sample & 100K for R1,R2
R12: 3K3
R13: 3K3
R15: 3K3
R16: 3K3
9-71
Reference voltage at Pin3 of U2: +2.50V DC, -2.50V at Pin6 of U2 approx.

Location: On the ARM ASSY
Silk Screen layout of Top Layer
Silk Screen layout of Bottom Layer
OR
PCB ASSEMBLY ELS52023R0
ELS22036R2.1: Probe signal connected to pin 1 of LLS pcb assy is with cross link.
ELS52023 R0 : Probe signal connected to pin2 of LLS pcb assy. without cross link
9-72
9.16. USB Connector PCB Assembly ELLC2003R6

USB interface between PC’s USB port & M/c is being established with the help of
USB connector PCB assy.
USB Connector PCB: Silicon lab make CP2102 – USB to UART Bridge is being
used for USB communication between CPU & PC – USB Port. Serial USB signals-
CPU PCB assy through PC serial communication-– Interface
Location: USB CONNECTOR PCB assy is located at LHS – Back side of the
machine.
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST and bottom side – SSB of USB
CONNECTOR PCB ELLC2003R6
SST SSB
9.17. Connector Distribution PCB ELS22012R2

General Description: This distribution board is for signals to RGT, RCT, ASP and
sen3 PCB's and also to syringe motor OPTO sensors.
Electronic Description: It has no active electronic components mounted. It has
only connectors for various signal distribution.
Adjustments and Test point: No adjustments available
Connectors:
9-73
 JTRAY (34 Pin FRC Connector)

1 VCC 16 VCC 31 NC
2 GND 17 R1PP SN1 32 WASTE
OVERFLOW
3 RGT SN1 18 GND 33 NC
4 RGT SN2 19 VCC 34 NC
5 VCC 20 R2PP SN1
6 GND 21 GND
7 RCT SN1 22 VCC
8 RCT SN2 23 CRU SN1
9 VCC 24 GND
10 GND 25 VCC
11 ASP SN1 26 CRU SN2
12 ASP SN2 27 GND
13 VCC 28 VCC
14 SPP SN1 29 WATER LOW
15 GND 30 GND
 Water (3 Relimate Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1
2 Level detector
3
 CNCRU (3 Relimate Connector)
PIN NO. SIGNAL
1
2 To R/T 3pin CRU
3 OPTO.
4
5 To R/T 3pin CRU
6 OPTO.
 CNPP (9 PIN Relimate Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
1
2 TO SPP 3PIN
3 SYRINGE
4
5 TO R1PP 3PIN
6 SYRINGE
7
8 TO R2PP 3PIN
9 SYRINGE
 CNTRAY (12 Relimate Connector)

PIN NO. SIGNAL
9-74
1
: To SEN3 4PIN RGT
4
5
: To SEN3 4PIN RCT
8
9
: To SEN3 4PIN ASP
12
Distribution Board Components Layout (CNDS PCB)
9-75
9.18. Float Sensor PCB ELS22037R1

Float Sensor PCB is being used to sense Level of DI water Can, Detergent, Bio-
waste, waste.
Respective float assy. input at J1, J2, J3, and J4 respectively, are being read
through U1 – 74HC244 & Error signal is being sent to interface. LED1, 2, 3, 4 are
lit ON during Error. Also Beeper will give a beep for user.
Connector J6 is for Power: +5V – Pin1 – TP2, GND: Pin2, 3 – TP1, Error signal:
Pin 4 – TP3.
Connector J5: To connect Beeper.
Location: PCB Assy is being located at Rear side on Waste mounting bracket.
9-76
9.19. Canmax Support PCB ELS52022R1/ R2

Canmax support PCB assy is being an interface between Canmax barcode engine
& interface.
Canmax barcode engine is being fitted on Canmax barcode support PCB &
connected through FPC cable at J2 on Canmax barcode support PCB to read
barcode for Sample & Reagent.
U1 is Max 3232 as a serial interface between Canmax barcode & interface PCB.
Connector J1 for Power supply +5V & RXD, TXD signals.
LED D1 for Power ON indication.
Location: On bracket near Sample tray window & Reagent tray window.
9-77
9.20. Sleep mode PCB ELS62033R1/R2

Sleep mode PCB assembly is being used to control mains supply of Lamp
assembly SMPS S60 -12(12V: 5A), LS75-12 ( 12V:6A), Robo PCB assembly
ISECOM1 is detecting the hardware present in machine & accordingly as per
schedule in system, sleep mode is enabling & disabling.
Sleep mode Signal is from Base Board 2 : to Sleep Mode Pcb Assy. J5
During Sleep mode enable Lamp assembly Mains Input of SMPS S60-12/LS75-12
is made OFF, which switched OFF the lamp assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Lamp assembly SMPS is switched ON
with the help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U1 L MOC3061 & U2 Triac
T1235. Lamp Assy. SMPS connected at J1
During Sleep mode enable Pressure Pump – DI water Pump Mains Input is made
OFF, which switched OFF the Pressure pump assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Pressure pump is switched ON with the
help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U3 MOC3061 & U4 Triac T1235.
Pressure Pump connected at J3
During Sleep mode enable Vacuum Pump Mains Input is made OFF, which
switched OFF the Vacuum pump assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Vacuum pump is switched ON with the
help of Isolator with Zero crossing detectors U5 MOC3041 & U6 Triac T1235.
Vacuum Pump connected at J4
OR
9-78
Sleep mode PCB ELS62033R2

Sleep mode PCB assembly is being used to control mains supply of Lamp
assembly SMPS S60 -12 (12V: 5/A) ,OR LS75-12 ( 12V : 6A), Vacuum pump 110V
AC, Pressure pump.- 220V AC
Sleep mode signal J5 & 5V DC Power J6 to sleep mode PCB assy .: through J13
Pin 1,2,3 RoboADC PCB Assy.
RoboADC PCB assembly is detecting the hardware present in machine &
accordingly as per schedule in system sleep mode is enabling & disabling.
During sleep mode enable, Lamp assembly Mains Input of SMPS S60-12 / LS 75-
12 - J1 (Pin 2 &4) , Vacuum pump-J4, Pressure pump-J3 are made OFF, which
switched OFF the lamp assembly, Vacuum pump, Pressure Pump.
Mains input : 220V AC connected to J1 pin 1 & 3 , Mains input 110V AC at J3
During Sleep mode disable, At J1 Mains input of Lamp assembly SMPS is
switched ON with the help of 5V DC relay RL1.
At J4 Mains Input of Vacuum Pump 110V AC is switched ON with the help of 5V
DC Relay RL3.
At J2 Mains Input of Pressure pump 220V AC is switched ON with the help of 5V
DC Relay RL2.
Location: Sleep mode PCB assembly is mounted at 5V SMPS bracket.
9-79
9.21. Photometer PCB ELXLV2R1

Photometer PCB assembly is being used to measure absorbance of light during
Chemistry RUN by applying spectrometer method i.e. Light is being passes
through reaction cuvette to respective wave lengths of optical filter and Photodiode
of Photometer assembly.
Photodiodes are being used to convert absorbed light in cuvette to proportional
electrical signals for measurement.
Photometer assembly is consisted of lens, Grating, Optical filter for 12
wavelengths as 340nm, 376nm, 415nm, 450nm, 480nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
600nm, 660nm, 700nm & 750 nm and Photodiode.
Location: Photometer PCB assembly is located in a closed black box, called
Photometer assembly, to the left of RCT assembly.
The flow of signals is Light source through reaction cuvette in to photometer PCB
assembly – J4 to Interface board via a special shielded cable.
The shield of the cable is connected to the chassis through a ‘Molex’ connector.
Power Supply +15V DC and -15V Dc is being used to Photometer circuit.
OPA111AM –to 99 package low BIAS current (1pA) and highly stable Opamp is
being used for 340nm and 750nm wavelengths.
OPA2111KP – DIP 8 pin package is being used to other 10 wavelengths. It is a
dual Opamp with low bias current (1pA) and highly stable.
OPA2111KP is being replaced to LMC6082AIN with regulator IC’s to 7805 & 7905
for ±5V.
Photodiode S1337-16BQ – Silicon are used for all 12 wavelengths.
9-80
9.22. POS1 PCB ELS22006/R3/R4

Opto PCB assy is being used to get feedback of positions of Electro-mechanical
assemblies to microcontroller / FPGA to process further action.
It provides a logic ‘HIGH’ (+5V) signal when the opto isolator is being interrupted
i.e. cut by a mechanical assembly due to motion. Called as SENSE.
It provides a logic ‘LOW’ (0V) signal when the opto isolator is uninterrupted i.e. not
cut by mechanical assembly due to motion called as ‘NOT SENSE’.
The signal is interpreted by respective FPGA.
The flow of electrical signal is from Opto PCB › Baseboard1 PCB › Interface PCB.
Location: OPTO PCBs are distributed at various electromechanical assemblies in
the analyzer that is. RGT, RCT, CRU, ARM, and STIRRER etc.
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of Opto PCB
ELS22006R3
Refer to the PCB assy, the details of signals are as follows.CN1: VCC: +5V,
Output: SN, GND. Three wires are soldered to respective pads on the solder side,
The pad closer to the SMD LED is ground (0V) and the pad to the other extreme is
+5V. The center pad is for opto status.
It is LOW when the opto is not cut; it is HIGH when the opto is cut.
SSB
OR
9-81
9.23. Regulator PCB ELS22032R1 (+/- 15V)

(Photometer assembly w/o LMPS)
Regulator PCB assembly is being used to supply power for analog section on
interface board, It accepts 20-0-20 VAC from transformer TX3 secondary at
connector J1and delivers regulated output +/-15V DC, power to AC Drive & BKPL
pcb assy’s.
It consists of two separate power supply section. Positive fixed voltage regulator –
U1: IC 7815 TO220 Package for +15V (+/- 0.15V) and Negative fixed voltage
regulator –U2: –15V (+/- 0.15V).
9-82
9.24. Regulator PCB ELS22032 R1 +/- 5V: LLS Supply)

Regulator PCB assembly is being used to supply power for analog section on
interface board, It accepts 9-0-9 VAC from transformer TX1 secondary at
connector J1and delivers regulated output +/-5V DC, power to the LLS pcb assy.
It consists of two separate power supply section. Positive fixed voltage regulator –
U1: IC 7805 TO220 Package for +5V (+/- 0.15V) and Negative fixed voltage
regulator –U2 IC 7905 : –5V (+/- 0.15V).
9.25. SEN3 PCB ELS22031R2

SEN3 PCB assembly is used to locate RGT tray Opto Home & Direction.
Connector CN1: Home Position Opto, Position1, 2 Opto’s are connected.
Home Opto output is converted in to CMOS logic level with the help of IC1A –
40106 – Schmitt trigger inverter. Output of inverter is with AND logic Position1 opto
output. At Home position output of IC2A is Low to read Home Position at Pin3 of
connector CN2.
Position1, 2 Opto output is converted in to logic level at IC1B, IC1E respectively.
Direction output is at Pin4 of CN1.
Path of signal - Opto Output to Connector CN1, CN2 connected to Interface card
J13 Pin5 – Home, Pin2: Direction.
Location: SEN3 PCB assembly is located below RGT Assy, on the base of RGT
Assy to the left side towards bottom of Analyzer.
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST – SEN3 PCB Assembly
9-83
9.26. IoT PCI-E Modem PCB

IoT (Internet of Thing) PCI-E Modem PCB is used for transfers the data of errors
occurring on the XL Analyzer at customer site.
Location : PCIe slot of analyzer PC.
9-84
10. Electrical Wiring Diagram

Voltages present in the analyzer can produce severe electrical
shocks. Place the analyzer and the computer in the off (0) position
and disconnect all line chords before attempting any replacement
procedure.
To avoid electric shock, ground the analyzer, computer, printer, and

monitor using a 3 pin grounded electric outlet. Do not use an adapter,
as it could cause a loose contact and improper grounding.
10.1. Fuse Rating

Mains 220V AC
FUSE NO FUNCTION VOLTAGE FUSE RATING
Main incoming 220 V AC 5.0 A Slow blow
F1 Cooling fan for lamp P.S (TX 1). 140 V AC 500mA FB

F2 Heater supply (TX 1). 40 V AC 5.0 A FB
F3 AC DRIVE PCB (TX 1 CN2, AC DRV 100 V AC 1.0 A FB
PCB).
F4 TX2 CN3, PCB Regulator +\- 15V. 20 V AC 1.0 A FB
F5 TX2 CN3, PCB Regulator +\- 15V 20 V AC 1.0 A FB
F6 12 V Lamp power supply (TX 2). 20 V AC Use 5.0 A fuse
with LMPS PCB
assy OR
NA with 12V/5A
SMPS OR
Use 2A SB fuse
with 12V/6A SMPS
F7 12 V Lamp power supply (TX 2). 18 V AC NA
F8 To motors (TX 2 CN2). 26.5 V AC 6.3 A FB
F9 ISO 232 PCB assembly (TX 2). 8 V AC 250 mA FB
F11 SEC of ISE TX. 12 V AC 1.0 A use for 3 CH
ISE OR
NA for 4CH ISE
F12 Primary of ISE TX3 CN1 220 V AC 5A SB
F13 RGT cooling section. 220 V AC 3.15 A FB
F14 Primary of mains TX 1. 220 V AC 3.15 A SB
F15 Primary of mains TX 2. 220 V AC 2.5 A FB
F16 5 V SMPS. 220 V AC 1.25 A FB
10-1
F17 KNF pump. 220 V AC 2A FB

F19 TX1 CN3 , PCB Regulator +\- 5V 20 V AC 1.0 A FB
F20 Barcode power supply PCB. 12 V AC NA
F21 Liquid level sensor platform. 18 V AC 630 mA use with
Load cell
NA (with Float
Sensor)
Mains 110V AC

F2 Heater supply (TX 1 CN2, AC DRV 40 V AC 5.0 A FB
PCB, and HEATER SUPPLY).
PCB).
with LMPS PCB
assy OR
NA with 12V/5A
SMPS
F8 To motors (TX 2 CN2). 26.5 V AC 6.3 A FB
ISE OR
NA for 4CH ISE
F12 Primary of ISE TX3 CN1 220 V AC 1 A SB
F14 Primary of mains TX 1. 220 V AC 5 A SB
F16 5 V SMPS. 220 V AC 1.25 A FB
F19 TX1 CN3 , PCB Regulator +\- 5V 20 V AC 1.0 A FB
Load cell
10-2
10.2. WDXL001 Input Mains Power Distribution 220VAC
OR
10-3
10-4
10.3. WDXL024: Input Mains Power Distribution-110V

AC
OR
10-5
10-6
10.4. ISE 3 Channel Wiring Diagram
OR
10-7
10.5. WDXL029 ISE 4 Channel Wiring Diagram (Mains

230VAC)
OR
10-8
10.6. WDXL029A ISE 4 Channel Wiring Diagram (Mains

110VAC)
10-9
10.7. WDXL003 Reagent Cooling Wiring Diagram
10-10
10.8. WDXL004 Mains Transformer TX 1 Power

Distribution
10-11
10.9. WDXL005 Mains Transformer TX 2 Power

Distribution (w/o LMPS)
10-12
OR
Mains Transformer TX 2 Power Distribution (with LMPS)
10-13
10.10. WDXL006: +5V SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-14
10.11. WDXL007 PC Interface Communication Diagram

(with USB BAFO-810)
OR
10-15
10.12. WDXL007A PC Interface Communication

Diagram (with Serial Port)
OR
10-16
PC Interface Communication Diagram (with Serial Port & USB PORT)
10-17
10.13. WDXL008: Stepper Motors Power Supply
10-18
10.14. 12V Lamp Power Supply Wiring Connections

(With LMPS PCB)
10-19
10.15. WDXL009:12V Lamp Power Supply Wiring (With

12V/5A SMPS & Sleep mode)
10-20
10.16. WDXL010 DCDPS2 PCB Wiring Connection (With

Float Sensor)
OR
10-21
10.17. WDXL010:DCDPS2 PCB Wiring Connection (Old

PCB)
DCDPS2 PCB wiring connection
10-22
10.18. WDXL011 AC Drive Card Wiring Connections
10-23
10.19. WDXL012: PCB Housing Wiring Connection
PCB Housing Wiring Connection 1 of 5
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10.20. WDXL014 CNDS PCB Wiring Connections (With

Float Sensor)
OR
10-29
10.21. WDXL014: CNDS PCB Wiring Connections (With

Load Cell)
10-30
10.22. WDXL015 DI Water Pressure Tank Heater Wiring

Diagram (Thermostat)
10-31
10.23. WDXL016 Float Sensor PCB Wiring Diagram
OR
10-32
10.24. WGPT Board with Load cell platform
10-33
10.25. WDXL017: WGPT PCB Wiring Diagram (Use with

Load cell Platform)
10-34
10.26. WDXL047: Regulator PCB +/-15V Wiring Diagram
10-35
10.27. WDXLV205: Regulator PCB +/- 5V Wiring

Diagram
10-36
10.28. WDXL048: ARM OPTO & LLS Cable Wiring
10-37
10.29. WDXLV206: Canmax Barcode PCB Wiring
10-38
10.30. Microscan Barcode Assembly (Only for Closed

System)
10-39
10.31. WDXLV203 Sleep Mode PCB Wiring
OR
10-40
10-41
10.32. WDXLV201: R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with

ELS22036R2.1
10-42
10.33. WDXLV201: R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with

ELS52023R0
10-43
10.34. WDXLV202: SPT ARM Probe with ELS22036R2.1

PCB
10-44
10.35. WDXLV202: SPT ARM Probe - Dual with

ELS52023R0 PCB
10-45
10.36. WDXL25: Transformer TX3: Wiring Diagram
10-46
10.37. ROBO ADC PCB Assy. Wiring Diagram
10-47
10.38. Syringe Valve Assy: Burkert
10.39. R1PP/R2PP Syringe Electrical Assembly
10-48
10.40. SPP Syringe Electrical Assembly
10.41. Red LED Indicator Electrical Assembly
10-49
10.42. Green LED Indicator Electrical Assembly
10-50
10.43. Pressure Tank Assembly
10.44. Float Sensor Buzzer Elect Assembly
10-51
10.45. Motor Electrical Assembly
OR/ AND
10-52
10.46. Stepper Motor HS200 2221 0070 AF04 Assy.
10-53
10.47. Rocker switch Assy.- Arcolectric 8650
OR
10-54
10.48. Rocker switch Assy.- Arcolectric 8650
10-55
10.49. RGT Tray Window Heater Electrical Assy.

ELXLV2009
10-56
10.50. KEYTO Syringe Electrical Assy. 500uL FSPXL704

R2
10-57
10.51. KEYTO Syringe Electrical Assy. 100uL FSPXL705

R2
10-58
10.52. Barcode - Leuze Electrical Assy. CR100M2R2_

RGT_FSPXK720_R0
10-59
10.53. Cable Assy.from Roboadc pcb to Buzzer for

Dome-CWXLV244
10-60
10.54. Cable Assy.from Roboadc pcb to Dome Level 1,2

Sensor-CWXLV243
10.55. Reed SW Sensor for Dome Interlock ELXLV2010
10-61
10.56. RGT Cooling Fan Electrical Assy FXPXL721
10-62
10.57. RGT Peltier Elecrical Assy FXPXL722
10-63
10.58. Wiring Diagram for Dome Interface WDXLV211
10-64
11. Mechanical Description

11.1. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Arm Assembly
11-1
11.2. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Dilutor
11-2
11.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly
11-3
11.4. Sample Mixing Unit
11-4
11.5. Sample Transport Assembly
11-5
11.6. Reagent Transport Assembly
11-6
11.7. Reaction Tray (RCT) Assembly
11-7
11.8. Photometer Assembly
11-8
12. Hydraulic Description

12.1. Hydraulic System Operation
This subassembly consists of valves, pumps and tubing. This unit supplies the D-
ionized water to CRU for cuvette rinsing and to troughs for pipette rinsing.
12.2. Valve and Pump Functions

 Water CKD Valve
Enable / Disable flow of De-ionized water for Cuvette Washing
 Stir CKD Valve
Enable / Disable flow of De-ionized water to Stirrer troughs
 R2PT, SPT CKD Valve
Enable / Disable flow of De-ionized water to sampling trough and Reagent
2 arm trough.
 R1PT CKD Valve
Enable / Disable flow of De-ionized water to Reagent 1 arm trough
 Pinch Valve
To regulate flow of water pressure.
 Over Flow CKD Valve
To remove excess water.
 Pump 1 (P1)
Pump to pump in De-ionized water from can to Pressure Tank.
 Pump 2 (P2)
Pump from Detergent can to Laundry Probe.
 Pump 3 (P3)
Pump biohazards waste to Biohazards can from cuvettes.
 Pump 4 (P4)
Pump waste water to Waste can.
 Damper
Diaphragm pulsation damper is used to reduce the pulsation on the outlet
side of the pump.
12-1
12.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit

This unit consists of seven stages of rinsing (laundry) as shown in figure. In the
first stage, which consist of two probes the longer probe aspirates the Biohazards
waste from the cuvette and the second probe dispenses detergent into the cuvette.
The next four stages having 2 probes each. The longer probe aspirates the waste
from cuvette, and the smaller probe dispenses De-ionized water for rinsing.
The sixth probe only aspirates the water dispensed in the fifth stage of rinsing and
the seventh stage is for wiping the bottom of the cuvettes. Six and Seventh probe
goes down to the bottom of cuvette and have springs to sustain the shock.
12-2
13. Maintenance
Voltages present in the analyzer can produce severe electrical shocks.
Place the analyzer and the computer in the off (0) position and
disconnect all line chords before attempting any maintenance
procedure.
To prevent contaminating yourself and others, treat all human sera as

potentially bio-hazards.
Follow the laboratory's safety protocol for cleaning and

decontaminating the analyzer and surrounding work surface.
Do not perform any maintenance procedure other than those described

in this manual.
Electrostatic sensitive components present on the pc boards in the

analyzer require you to ground yourself even when the analyzer is in
the off (0) position, otherwise damage to the analyzer elector-sensitive
components and pc boards can occur.
13.1. Maintenance Intervals

The Clinical Chemistry Analyzer has been designed to require very little user
maintenance compared to the other analyzers of the same class. Regular cleaning
and periodic maintenance as per the schedule keeps the analyzer in good working
condition without any trouble. For example, clean the cuvettes externally once
every few months as per the cleaning procedure.
For easy understanding, different tables are included in this section.
Table 1 is the maintenance schedule for operator. This table should be used as a
reference for performing daily, weekly, quarterly and annual maintenance.
Table 2 is the replacement schedule for different consumables.
Regular maintenance of the analyzer will ensure trouble free operation and
consistent quality test results throughout its working. Hence, the user should
perform daily cuvette rinsing.
13-1
13.1.1. Daily Maintenance

Start of the day procedure
Serial Number Description
1 Fill the de-ionized water can.
2 Fill the cleaning solution can.
3 Clean the probes tips and stirrer paddles with alcohol.
4 Switch on the machine and perform prime (minimum 2 minutes).
5 Perform the sample probe wash.
6 Perform the reagent probe wash.
7 Replace the printer paper if necessary.
8 Perform the photometer check and verify that the auto span check has
passed successfully.
9 Perform the cuvette rinse, and verify cuvette blanks.
10 Verify the reagent tray and reaction tray temperature.
11 Replenish or replace the reagents if necessary.
12 In case of ISE unit, ensure that there is enough CAL A and CAL B solution
13 Perform the purge and calibrate operations for ISE.
End of the day Procedure
1 Remove and discard all sample / standard and controls cups or tubes from
the sample tray.
2 Perform the water save.
3 Take a backup of all patient reports.
4 Turn off the main switch located on the front of the (in case ISE and if
reagent cooling required, leave rear switch on) analyzer
5 Empty the waste and bio-hazardous waste cans.
6 Clean analyzer external surface to remove residues of serum, reagents etc.
13.1.1.1. Carry Out the Sample Probe Wash

The sample probe can be wash using sample probe option available in the
Maintenance screen. This option is to enable the operator to wash the sample
probe with some cleaning solution at the end of day’s work.
1. From the main menu select “Maintenance” option, and click “SAMPLE PROBE
WASH” option.
2. The user will be prompted to put the cleaning solution at the ISE2 position in the
standard tray. Pour 500 µl of cleaning solution in the sample tube and place it
on the required position.
3. Once the user clicks on <OK>, the sample probe picks up about 60 µl of
cleaning solution and dispenses it in the drain in micro jets.
4. The above action is performed 5 times.
13-2
5. The ISE cleaning solution itself is recommended for this cleaning but other
cleaning solutions such as 1% to 2% sodium Hypochlorite can be used for this
purpose.
6. After the sample probe wash with cleaning solution, the probe is washed
internally & externally with water to remove traces of cleaning solution.
7. It is recommended to ensure internal wash for approximately 1 to 1.5 min. from
“Service Check’ and ‘Syringe” options.
13.1.1.2. “Water Save” Operation

Carry out the “Water Save” operation three times a day. This option will ensure
flushing of Biohazard waste in line.
13.1.1.3. In case of Long Shutdown

If the analyzer is not likely to be used for more than two days, it is recommended to
follow bellow steps before the long shut down as well as after the first start-up after
long shutdown:
1. Place DI water in place of the detergent can.
2. Rinse the cuvettes twice by clicking on <CUVETTE RINSE> in the
“Maintenance” menu.
13.1.1.4. ISE cleaning

This option is available only when Ion Selective Electrode (Optional) is installed
on the analyzer to perform routine maintenance, purging, cleaning and calibration
of the ISE unit.
13.1.2. Weekly Maintenance

1 Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
2 Clean the cleaning solution can.
3 In case of ISE unit, ensure enough CAL A and CAL B solution, and replace
if required.
4 Clean the stirrer paddles and laundry probes with alcohol.
5 Check the sample, reagent 1, and reagent 2 syringes and surrounding
tubes.
6 Clean the computer, trolley, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
7 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item.
(Maintain proper room cleanliness).
8 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 probes.
9 Clean the stirrer paddles.
10 Clean the laundry probes.
11 Clean the sample tray.
12 Clean the reagent tray.
13-3
13 Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
14 Perform a cuvette rinse and check cuvette blanks.
15 Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and
kinetic test.
16 Clean the window glass piece of RGT barcode section
13.1.3. Quarterly Maintenance

1 Clean the waste can.
2 Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
5 Clean the level sensing platform.
7 Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
8 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item
(maintain proper room cleanliness).
14 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe.
15 Clean the fans.
16 Clean the bar code readers.
17 Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
18 Perform a cuvette rinse.
kinetic test.
20 Replace the lamp, 25 micron filter, drier chip.
21 Clean the internal surface free of dust.
wavelengths.
23 Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground,
ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory cleanliness
practice. See section 5.3 Site Requirement for more details
24 Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried out
and site verifications.
13-4
13.1.4. Annual Maintenance

1 Clean the waste can.
2 Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
5 Clean the level sensing platform.
7 Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
8 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item
(maintain proper room cleanliness).
14 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe.
15 Clean the fans.
16 Clean the bar code readers.
17 Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
18 Perform a cuvette rinse.
kinetic test.
20 Replace the lamp, 25 micron filter, drier chip.
21 Clean the internal surface free of dust.
wavelengths.
23 Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground,
ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory cleanliness
practice. See section 5.3 Site Requirements for more details
24 Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried out
and site verifications.
13.2. Cleaning the External Surfaces

1. Clean Reagent table.
2. Empty wash containers.
3. Wipe instrument panels.
4. Clean the working area / table.
Wipe the outer analyzer and Monitor surface with a non abrasive cleaner, before
using it make sure that you test it on a small section of the analyzer, wait till it
13-5
dries, see the results, only if you are satisfied then proceed to clean the entire
analyzer with this cleaning solution.
Some cleaning solutions can destroy the surface finish of the
analyzer.
 Use a soft lint free clot moistened with a 5.0% dilution of a
5.25% Sodium Hypo chloride (Bleach) solution to clean and
decontaminate the analyzer external surfaces, sample tray,
reagent tray, and covers.
 Use a soft brush if required to get to inaccessible areas of
the sample tray and reagent tray.
 Please instruct the operator not to place any patient samples
or reagent on the instrument as they could spill and damage
the instrument surface
13.3. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Probes

Maintenance
The sample probe comes directly in contact with human sera and is
highly bio-hazardous material. Please take the necessary precaution to
protect yourself when carrying out this procedure.
Although the Sample, Reagent 1, and Reagent 2 probes look
almost similar, but they are not the same. Make sure that they
don't get mixed up at the time of maintenance.
As a precautionary measure, remove and refit them one at a time,

thereby eliminating any chances of them getting interchanged.
Refer to chapter Probe Replacement, in order to remove and refit the sample
probe.
Remove the sample probe and place it into a beaker or test tube filled with a mild
Sodium hypochloride or extra solution. The level of the solution should be such
that only the lower two centimeters of the probe is in contact with the solution (no
liquid at any time should come in contact with the probe sensor wires embedded
within the probe upper half, if it does happen please rinse the probe in DI water
and thoroughly dry it before refitting).
The sample probe system comprises of two metal concentric probes that are used
for liquid level sensing. In order to clean this probe from the outside, soak a tissue
paper in alcohol and wrap it around the probes upper end, then gently slide the
tissue paper down towards the tip and out of the probe, repeat this cycle
numerous times until you are satisfied that the probe is thoroughly cleaned. Make
sure that this cleaning procedure is done only in one direction that is from top to
down and not in the reverse order. To clean the sample probe internally, gently
13-6
insert a metal stilt provided in the tool kit into the upper end of the probe until it
appears at the probe tip repeat this a number of times, then with the help of a
syringe flush the probe first with Extra or any mild detergent and then with DI
water.
13.4. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Syringe

Maintenance
Although the Sample and Reagent Syringes look almost similar,
they are not the same, make sure that they don't get mixed up at
the time of maintenance.
As a precautionary measure, remove and refit them one at a time, thereby
eliminating any chances of them getting interchanged.
1. Place the analyzer in the OFF mode.
2. Remove the front panel remove the syringe as described in 13 Replacement
and Calibration Procedure for Sapphire Syringe.
The water may be under pressure even after the instrument has
been switched OFF. Before removing the tubing's from the syringe,
take the necessary precaution to prevent the spillage of water into
the analyzer or on any of the electronic circuits.
3. Remove the Syringe assembly and place it in a shallow dish on a table.
4. Slide out the plunger out of the syringe then wipe the tip with a tissue
moistened with a mild laboratory detergent.
Fit the syringe assembly into the instrument as described in the Replacement
Procedure.
Tighten all screws and connect the inlet and outlet tubing to their respective
positions.
13.5. Barcode Reader

decontaminating the sample tray and reagent trays and their
respective wells.
1. Lift and remove the Sample and Reagent trays.
2. Locate the bar code windows on the walls of the of the Sample and Reagent
tray Wells, with the help of a lint free clot moisten with DI water gently wipe the
window clear of any spillage or dust.
3. Make sure that there are no scratches or permanent stains on the window, if
so have it replaced.
13-7
Make sure after carrying out the Barcode reader maintenance that
both sample and reagent windows are thoroughly dried.
13.6. Sample Transport

potentially bio-hazardous.
Take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from contamination

and personal injury.
1. Rotate the Knob and Lift the Calibration tray, with the help of a soft cloth.
2. Follow the same procedure for Sample tray. Lint a cloth moistened in 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium hypo chloride (bleach) solution, clean, and
decontaminate the Sample tray. Also remove all debris and spillage from the
well of the Sample tray.
3. Clean the entire Sample tray holding disk free of dust and debris, clean the
Sample tray holding disk OPTO coupler light path with the help of a very soft
dry brush.
4. With the help of an external light source thoroughly check the belt for wear and
tear as well as for proper tension.
5. Place the Calibration and Sample tray back into position. Make sure that the
index pin on the Sample transport slides into the index hole provided on the
sample tray.
13.7. Reagent Transport

potentially bio-hazardous.

1. Lift and remove the Reagent tray, with the help of a soft brush.
2. Follow the same procedure for reagent tray. Lint a cloth moistened in 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium hypo chloride (bleach) solution, clean, and
decontaminate the Reagent tray. Also remove all debris and spillage from the
well of the reagent tray.
13-8
3. Clean the entire Reagent transport free of dust and debris, clean the Reagent
transport OPTO coupler light path with the help of a very soft dry brush.
4. With the help of an external light source thoroughly check the belt for wear
and tear as well as for proper tension.
5. Place the Reagent tray back into position. Make sure that the index pin on the
Reagent transport slides into the index hole provided on the sample tray.
Verify the Reaction tray temperature in the Service menu after
allowing the instrument to warm up for 20 minutes.
13.8. Cuvette Reaction Transport

1. Locate and remove the thumbscrew on the top centre of the reaction tray. Lift
and remove the Reaction tray. Remove each individual cuvette from their
slots, making sure they do not get scratched, place them in a bowl containing
a laboratory detergent.
2. Clean the empty Reaction tray and incubation well with the help of a soft
brush and lint free cloth soaked in a much diluted solution of 15% dilution of a
5.25% sodium Hypo chloride.
3. Clean the entire Reaction transport free of dust and debris, clean the Reaction
transport OPTO coupler light path with the help of a very soft dry brush.
4. With the help of an external light source thoroughly check the belt for wear
and tear as well as for proper tension.
5. Place the Reaction tray back into position. Make sure that the index pin on the
Reaction transport slides into the index hole provided on the sample tray.
6. Make sure that the light path, which includes the photometer inlet slit,
incubation well, lens assembly, and Lamp housing are free of dust.
Before refitting the cuvettes make sure that the Reaction tray and
incubation well is absolutely dry. Failure to do so could damage
the analyzer.
Verify the Reaction tray temperature in the Service menu after allowing the
instrument to warm up for 20 minutes.
13.8.1. Individual Cuvettes

1. Remove each individual cuvette from their slots, making sure they do not get
scratched, place them in a bowl containing a laboratory detergent.
2. Rinse the cuvettes thoroughly in DI water, numerous times and dry them by
placing them inverted on a filter paper.
3. Clean the external surface of each cuvette using a lint free tissue paper,
moistened with Alcohol, replace them one at a time directly into the reaction
slots, they should not touch any other surface after being cleaned in Alcohol.
13-9
When replacing the cuvettes back into their slots, make sure that
you grip them by their sides and top end.
 Never let the fingers or any sharp object come in contact with the optical
area.
 Confirm that all cuvettes have fitted properly into their respective slots on
the reaction tray and none of them are jutting out.
13.9. Cuvette Rinsing Unit

1. Unscrew the metal thumbscrew Located above the cuvette rinsing unit plate
lift the cuvette rinsing unit upwards and place it in a shallow tray.
2. Clean individual probes with the help of a lint free tissue moistened with a
0.5% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium hypochloride rinse thoroughly with DI water
and dry.
3. Replace any aspiration tubing, probe or suction chip that has been discolored
or damaged.
4. Fit the unit back to it place.
When refitting the Cuvette rinsing unit make sure that the suction
probes go directly in the centre of the cuvette and they do not
touch the walls.
13.10. Stirrer Unit

1. Remove the screws and slide out both the stirrers place them in a bowl
containing a 0.5% dilution of a 5.25% sodium hypo chloride solution, rinse with
DI water and dry.
2. Refit the stirrers and confirm that they are in the center of both cuvettes.
3. To con firm the centering of the stirrers in both the cuvettes from the Main
menu go into the service menu then reset the system by clicking on the reset
icon, go to stirrers and click on Rotate to cuvette 2, take the stirrers down and
switch the stirrers on.
If the stirrers are not properly aligned they may touch the sides of
the cuvette, resulting in a permanent damage to the cuvette.
13.11. Cleaning Procedure for DI Water and Waste Can

The waste can comes directly in contact with human sera and is highly
bio-hazardous; Please take the necessary precaution to protect you
when carrying out this procedure.
13-10

13.11.1. DI Water Can

Disconnect the tubing from the water can by sliding it out of the cap. For cleaning,
fill the can with a 15% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium hypo chloride solution.
Rotate gently periodically in order to enable the solution to reach every corner of
the can, do this for about 5 minutes.
Drain the cleaning solution and repeat the same numerous times by filling the can
with DI water.
Rinse the can thoroughly as there should be no traces of Sodium
Hypo chloride left in the can, as it could affect the results.
Reconnect the tubing from the water can by sliding it into the cap.
Make sure that the water sensor cable from the water can is
connected to the connector marked as DI water, on the back panel
of the instrument.
13.11.2. Waste Can

Disconnect the tubing from the Waste can by rotating the white connector, by
unscrewing it. For cleaning, fill the waste can with a 25% dilution of a 5.25%
Sodium hypo chloride solution.
Rotate gently periodically in order to enable the solution to reach every corner of
the can, do this for about 10 minutes.
Drain the cleaning solution; by strictly following the laboratory's waste disposal
protocols. Fill the can with fresh DI water and repeat the above procedure with DI
water numerous times.
Place the waste tubing into a solution of sodium hypo chloride of the same
concentration as mentioned above. Allow it to soak for about 10 minutes and then
rinse it thoroughly with DI water.
Reconnect the waste tubing to the Waste can by rotating the white connector, and
tightening it.
Make sure that the Waste sensor cable from the waste can is
connected to the connector marked as Waste, on the back panel of
the instrument.
13-11
13.12. Trolley, Computer, Keyboard & Printer

Voltages present in the computer and monitor can produce severe
electrical shocks. Place the computer, monitor, and printer in the OFF
position and disconnect all line chords before attempting any
maintenance procedure.
Some cleaning solutions may destroy the surface finish of the
analyzer.
Use a soft lint free cloth moistened with a 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium
Hypochloride (Bleach) solution to clean and decontaminate the analyzer external
surfaces, Sample tray, Reagent tray, and Covers.
Use a soft brush if required to get to inaccessible areas of the sample tray and
reagent tray.
Wipe the Trolley, Monitor, Computer and Keyboard external surface with a non
abrasive cleaner, before using it make sure that you test it on a small section of the
trolley and Computer, wait till it dries, see the results, only if you are satisfied then
proceed to clean the entire Computer and Trolley with this cleaning solution.
 Use a soft lint free cloth moistened with a 5.0% dilution of a

5.25% Sodium Hypochloride (Bleach) solution to clean and
decontaminate the trolley, Computer, Monitor and Printer
external surface.
 Make sure that no solution falls or seeps into the Computer,
Monitor, Printer, or Keyboard.
13.12.1. Computer
1. Clean the external surfaces as described above, check and delete the
unwanted program, files and screen savers loaded by the customer, as these
could interfere with the analyzer program.
2. Take a backup of the test parameters, calibration data and patient results,
label each disc and store then safely.
3. If required clean the Computer internally free of dust. Preferably get the
regional distributor to do the maintenance for the computer.
4. Schedule this maintenance a few days before the analyzer maintenance and
not on the same day, in order to prevent any technical complications that may
arise.
13.12.2. Monitor
Voltages present in the Monitor can produce severe electrical shocks. Even after it
is switched off. Clean the external Surface as described above. Adjust the Vertical
13-12
and Horizontal height and width for optimal performance. Adjust the Brightness
and contrast setting for optimal performance.
13.12.3. Printer
1. Clean the external surfaces as described above, Clear the printer free of any
debris and paper pieces.
2. Replace the printer ribbon/ Cartridge if necessary.
13.12.4. Analyzer Fan

Remove the back panel and locate the two fans behind the analyzer one on the
top left hand side and the other on the lower end.
Moisten a lint free clot or tissue in water and clean each individual blade of the
fans.
Make sure that no water should enter the electrical or mechanical
parts of the fan. Make sure that the fan is absolutely dry as this
could damage the analyzer.
13.12.5. Optics
Verify the lamp voltage by placing a calibrated and confirmed accurate multimeter
across the lamp terminals, the ideal voltage should be 12.07 Volt on lamp terminal.
Although the lamp is factory pre aligned, after replacing the lamp it is
recommended that you verify the light beam alignment, though chances of
misaligned of beam is very remote. For checking the alignment, removes the
cuvette in front of the light beam and follow the following steps.
1. Switch ON the instrument.
2. Go to the service menu and press Reset which will initialize the instrument.
3. Open the RCT Cover and remove the cuvette which is in line with photometer
slot. Insert the `Light Beam Alignment Plate' in the empty cuvette position.
4. Verify the alignment at the [+] position on the plate. Remove the `Light Beam
Alignment Plate'.
5. Turn off the lamp.
6. Mount the cuvette back, and perform an Auto span check.
13-13
13.13. Replacement Schedule for Spares and

Consumable
Serial Spares/Consumables 3 Months 6 Months 9 Months 12 Months
Number
1 Sample Probe * 
2 R1PT probe 
3 R2PT probe 
4 Stirrer paddles  
5 CRU drier chip    
6 Laundry dispense tubing 
7 Laundry aspiration tubing  
8 Laundry probe assembly 
9 Photometer lamp assembly    
10 Sample syringe plunger  
with Teflon tip (100 µl)
11 Sample syringe assembly 
(100 µl)
12 Reagent 1 and 2 syringe 
(500 µl) Teflon tip
13 DI water 25 micron filter    
13.14. Preventative Maintenance

13.14.1. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble
When any abnormal conditions are found in the analyzer, the operator is requested
to check the following items:
1. Preparation and preservation methods of reagents.
2. Preparation and preservation methods of sample.
3. Operational procedures of the analyzer and maintenance work.
When such an abnormal condition is considered to be caused by
an electrical or mechanical failure, do not try to carry out the
inspection of the analyzer by your own and call for service at our
customer service department.
13.14.1.1. Information Requested by Our Customer Service

Department
When any technical service will be called for at our customer service department,
the following information is requested to be prepared.
 Trouble in assay.
 Serial number of analyzer in use.
13-14
 Explanation of encountered trouble.

 Method used.
 Serial number and lot number of reagent, calibrator and QC sample in
use.
 A few calibration results that were carried out recently.
 A few measurement results of QC sample, that were carried out
recently.
 Measurement results.
 Trouble in analyzer.
 Serial number of analyzer in use.
 Software version numbers in use (PC, Operating System and Sub-CPU).
 Explanation of the relevant alarm and problem.
 Other information about the analyzer in use and maintenance.
13.14.1.2. Malfunction at the Time of Operation
If the analyzer cannot be activated, follow the procedures shown below:
1. Check that the main switch located on the back side of the analyzer is at
"ON" position.
2. Check that the main fuses are not burnt. When the main fuses are checked,
turn the main switch off without fail and then pull out the plug of power
supply cable from its receptacle on the analyzer. Open up the fuse cover
and pull the fuses out.
3. Check that the circuit breaker of the power supply system to which the
analyzer is connected is not cut off.
13.14.1.3. Anomalous Measurement Results

There may be two cases that the analytical errors are noticed, i.e., by error flag or
unexpected results. In the following cases, troubleshooting is requested.
1. Error flag is set to the calibration results.
2. Error flag is set to the measurement results of QC sample or normal
sample.
3. The measurement results of QC sample are out of range of judgment
criteria. Investigate which situation shown below is applicable to the error in
the measurement results of calibration, QC sample or normal sample.
Based on the investigation, further check may be requested.
13-15
4. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are

high for all samples.
5. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are
low for all samples.
6. Erroneous results are randomly derived from the measurement.
7. Two or more anomalous measurement results are observed:
a. From all methods,
b. Or randomly.
13.14.1.4. Check for Preparation of Reagent, Calibrator or QC

Sample
Perform the following checks in order to track down the cause for high, low or
random resultant measurement results. When a reagent, calibrator or QC sample
is prepared, read the respective statement of virtues carefully and follow its
instruction.
1. Preparation of reagent.
a. Was there any change of the reagent?
b. Is the term of validity of the prepared reagent still valid?
c. Was the reagent prepared according to the correct procedures?
d. Was the reagent prepared using fresh, non-bacteria contaminated and
DI water or appropriate diluents?
2. Preparation of QC sample.
a. Was the volume used for preparation correct?
b. Does the sample have been preserved as recommended?
c. Is the term of validity of the sample still valid?
d. Was the sample prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of volume?
e. Is the term of validity of the sample lot still valid?
f. Was the sample prepared using appropriate diluents?
3. Preparation of calibrator.
a. Was there any change of the lot number?
b. Was the calibrator prepared using volume correctly?
c. Does the calibrator have been preserved as recommended?
d. Is the term of validity of the calibrator still valid?
13-16
e. Was the calibrator prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of

volume?
f. Was the calibrator prepared using appropriate diluents?
The further checks are requested to track down the cause referring to the following
lists after the above checks have been completed.
13.14.1.5. High Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all

Samples
Serial Number Cause Corrective action
1 Incorrect calibration results.  Check the preparation of the
calibrator.
 Check that the calibration
settings are correct.
 The calibration is performed
again if necessary.
2 Too high inside temperature of RCT  Check the temperature
unit. shown in Service Check >
Temperature > Read.
 Call for service at our
customer service
department when the
indicated temperature
deviates from the specified
value of 37 ± 0.2ºC.
3 Improper preparation of reagent. Check the preparation of the
reagent.
4 Improper preparation of calibrator. Check the preparation of the
calibrator.
13.14.1.6. Low Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all

Samples
1 Expiration of the term of validity of  See the statement of virtues that
reagent. comes together with the reagent
kit for its stability.
2 Improper preparation of reagent.  Check the preparation of the
reagent.
3 Improper preservation of reagent. See the statement of virtues that
comes together with the reagent kit
for its proper preservation method.
4 Too low inside temperature of  Check the temperature shown in
RCT unit. Service Check > Temperature >
Read.
 Call for service at our customer
service department when the
indicated temperature deviates
from the specified value of 37 ±
0.2ºC.
13-17
5 Improper preparation of calibrator. Check the preparation of the

calibrator.
6 Excessive volume of reagent Check if there is any leakage or drip
dispensed. at junction of reagent sampling
system.
13.14.1.7. Randomly Derived Erroneous Measurement Results

1 Fibrin clots formed on specific sample Clean the SPT nozzle.
tube or sample cup.
2 Insufficient water or solution supply Check if the tip of water or
from respective external tank. solution tube is positioned below
the water or solution level. Call
for service at our customer
service department in case of
trouble.
3 Insufficient stirring. Check if the stirrer rotates in the
center of cuvette and at the
correct speed.
13.14.1.8. Anomalous Resultant Values from all Methods for a

Sample
1 Improper preparation of reagent. Prepare newly the reagent
referring to the statement of virtues
that comes together with the
reagent kit.
2 Expiration of term of validity, Prepare newly the reagent
contamination or paleness of referring to the statement of virtues
reagent. that comes together with the
reagent kit.
13.14.2. Equipment Malfunction

It may be difficult for the user to deal with the problem, the troubleshooting of
which is beyond this limited extent. In such a case, call for service at our customer
service department.
13.14.2.1. Detection of mechanical problem

All the mechanical movements are controlled and monitored by the computer.
When a problem arises, the computer becomes aware of it and generates the
visual error message to call the operator's attention.
In the event of the problem that may affect the performance of the analyzer, the
sampling stop or emergency stop will be executed. In the case of sampling stop
mode, the analyzer carries on and completes the processing of the sample that is
not affected by the problem. In the case of problem that may affect the entire
measurements of sample, the emergency stop will be executed.
13-18
The Report > Error Log screen can be used to view all the errors occurred on the
analyzer during the test run or service check. This data is generally useful for
servicing/diagnostic purposes.
The period of Error List can be selected using From and To Date Calendar. Refer
section 20.1.1.2 Error Log for more details.
Remedial actions for all error conditions are given below in section 20.1.1.1 Error
Messages for each unit.
When user clicks on Start Run button on Status Monitor, if any
error is detected during initialization of the instrument then the
error message will be displayed in the error grid on the Screen. In
such case, the instruments will stop. The user has to take the
corrective action.
Problem may arise, which is not monitored by the computer. Any alarm message
may not be indicated on the display for such a problem. Such a problem includes
abrasion of parts, leakage in the sampling system, etc. When this type of problem
occurs, decide whether the processing of sample is carried on or the measurement
is terminated, considering that such problem may result in damage to the analyzer
or erroneous outcome of measurements.
13-19
13.15. Maintenance Menu

To open maintenance screen, go to main screen, and click on the Maintenance on
the left side of screen. The following screen will be displayed:
Figure 13-1. Maintenance screen

Using this screen, the routine maintenance of the analyzer is performed using the
following function:
 Span
 Manual Span
 Auto Span
 Wash
 Dead Volume Calibration
 ISE (available only if ISE is installed on the analyzer)
 Auto Maintenance
13-20
13.15.1. Auto Span

This screen is useful to view and adjust the photometer gains at different
wavelengths. The analyzer adjusts the photometer gains automatically if he/she
selects {Auto Span} bullet and clicks on <Start> button. Whether the gain is within
the factory set limits or not is indicated by a green or red background. If the gain at
any wavelength is not within the factory set limits, the background is filled with red
color.
The photometer gains can also be adjusted manually, however it is not
recommended.
Before starting the Manual Span set, it is necessary to do one Auto
Span Set so that a cuvette filled with DI water stands between the
lamp and the photometer.
If the absorbance of the DI Water placed inside the cuvette is not between 0.05-
0.085 Abs, then following corrective measures should be taken.
• Check the cuvette
• Perform cuvette rinse to ensure that the cuvettes are clean
• Check the particular wavelengths and the photometer lamp.
• Call the service engineer
Auto Span is recommended after change of Lamp, Lamp Voltage

and any other photometer related hardware.
The Auto Span option will be the default option when the Maintenance screen is
clicked first time. Later it can be change, as appropriate.
13-21
13.15.2. Manual Span

This screen can be used to view the photometer stability. It displays the Voltage
and Absorbance at different wavelengths.
Following is the procedure:

1. Select a wavelength using which the absorbance and voltage needs to be
checked.
2. Click on START button. Continuous online update of voltage and
absorbance takes place and is displayed on the screen.
3. Click on STOP once the check is performed.
4. User can select another wavelength to check the voltage and the
absorbance at the other wavelength. Again user needs to click on START to
start the reading and STOP to stop the reading.
13.15.3. Wash Screen

The following screenshot shows the wash screen:
13.15.3.1. Cuvette Rinse

On selecting Cuvette Rinse option, the user can perform a Cuvette Wash of all 72
cuvettes by clicking on the Start button. This wash is done using DI Water. At the
end of Cuvette Rinse, the cell blanks are updated automatically and can be seen
by clicking on the Cell Blank tab under Maintenance menu:
13-22
Figure 13-2. Cell blank screen

This menu enables the user to view the cuvette blank absorbance values (obtained
with DI water in the cuvette) at any particular wavelength.
The screen displays the cuvette blank for the requested wavelength. Wavelength
can be selected by the pull-down option provided on the left side of the screen.
The and buttons can also be used to view the cuvette blanks for
the next and previous wavelength. There is also a Graph option available for
display. The cuvette blank table consists of three sections.
13-23
Figure 13-3. Cell blank graph

Present abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured
after the last run or Cuvette Rinse.
Previous abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured
after the second last run or Cuvette Rinse.
Graph: On clicking GRAPH button, the user can view the absorbances in
graphical format for the required wavelength. To view the graph, you need to
select the required wavelength from the Select Wavelength drop-down list, and
then select the appropriate graph type from the Type option.
Three options are available to view the graph:
Present: This option will displays the previous absorbance graph obtained for the
selected wavelengths.
Previous: This option will displays the present absorbance graph obtained for the
selected wavelengths.
Both: The comparison of both graphs (previous and present) can be viewed using
this option.
The maximum and minimum acceptable value of the cuvette blank absorbance
can be set in the Settings > System Parameter menu. If the absorbance of the
cuvette blank exceeds the set maximum blank absorbance, then that particular
cuvette absorbance is indicated by Red background. On the other hand, if the
13-24
absorbance of the cuvette blank is below the minimum acceptable absorbance,

then it is indicated by Blue background.
The values on the cuvette blank value table display should not exceed 0.1
normally. Cuvette Rinse and/or Auto Wash procedure from Maintenance menu
must be performed if the cuvette blanks are higher than the maximum limit. If the
Cuvette O.D.s exceed 0.2 Absorbance, the cuvette should be replaced with a new
cuvette or should be cleaned externally using fresh water.
If the cuvette blank for some cuvettes are less than 0.03, the
cuvette with the lowest blank absorbance should be placed at
cuvette position 1 in the reaction tray.
This procedure should be done daily before starting the batch.
13.15.3.2. Water Save

This option enables the operator to wash the reaction tray cuvettes with some
cleaning solution and fill all cuvettes with DI water at the end of a day’s work or at
beginning of the day.
This operation can be performed any time using Water Save option.
To perform this, select WATER SAVE, and click START.
On clicking this button, the analyzer first washes all the 60 cuvettes with the
cleaning solution through laundry probes, and then using the Arm probe, the
analyzer fills DI water in all the 60 cuvettes. This water remains in the cuvettes
until the next run or cuvette wash/rinse.
Overnight filling of the cuvettes with DI water is helpful in loosening the dirt on the
cuvette walls.
Perform water save daily, at the end of the day’s work.
Poor quality DI water should not be used for Water Save, as
bacteria growth can take place inside the cuvettes.
13.15.3.3. Auto Wash

The cuvettes, arm probes, and stirrer can be cleaned with external detergents or
cleaning solution through Auto Wash option.
It is recommended to perform this procedure once a week or when needed. If one
is using latex based assays regularly, it is recommended to perform a Cuvette
Wash daily. Detergent or cleaning solution with appropriate concentration can be
used for this operation. These solutions are not kept in the detergent Can but in
reagent bottles on the Reagent Tray and in sample tubes on the Sample Tray.
13-25
Use 0.1N HCL for AC (Acid) and 0.1N NaOH for AL(Alkali) to
perform Auto Wash.
1. Place 24 ml of Auto Wash AC (Acid) solution at position 1 and Auto Wash AL

(Alkali) solutions at positions 3 on the reagent tray (in 50 ml large bottles).
2. Place 5.2 ml of Auto Wash AC (Acid) solution at sample position 1 and Auto
Wash AL (Alkali) solution at 3 on the sample tray (in 2 ml Cups).
3. Click on START button.
On clicking, a message box will be displayed indicating the user for placing
cleaning solution.
4. Click OK to perform auto wash.

At the end of the procedure, the user can check the Updated Cuvette
Blanks by going to the Maintenance > Cell Blank screen. If the user wants
to stop the operation, click on the STOP button which will be active after the
START button is clicked.
13-26
It is recommended to perform the Auto Wash once a week or

when needed.
If the user has not performed auto wash for 7 days, then on the
next day, MultiXL reminds the user to perform Auto Wash by
displaying a pop-up message on the right-bottom corner of the
Status Monitor screen after first batch run of the day.
Reminder pop-up will stay on screen, till user click on (Close)
button. The pop-up message will remain on the screen, even
after clicking Close button, if the mouse-pointer is placed on the
pop-up.
This reminder will be displayed once in a day.
The following buttons will be displayed after performing the auto wash operation:
SHOW REPORT: This button will display the list of dates with time on which the
auto-wash was performed.
EXPORT: This option is used to download and save the auto-wash history in excel
(.XLS) file in location C:\MultiXLLOG
13.15.3.4. Sample Probe Wash

This option enables the operator to wash the Sample Probe with some cleaning
solution at the end of a day’s work or at beginning of the day. This operation can
be performed any time using this option.
1. Place the cleaning solution at position ISE2 in the Sample Tray.
2. Select SAMPLE PROBE WASH, and then click START.
On clicking, the following message box will be displayed indicating the user
for placing cleaning solution.
13-27
3. Click OK button.
On clicking, the Probe picks up the cleaning solution and dispenses it in the
drain with internal and external cleaning.
The Probe wash action is repeated 5 times.
4. After the action is completed the analyzer gets initialized.
Use Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning
solution for sample probe wash.
13.15.3.5. R1/R2 Probe Wash

This option enables the operator to wash the Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Probe with
Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning solution at the end of a
day’s work or at beginning of the day. This operation can be performed any time
using this option.
1. Select the desired number of cycles from 01 – 09.
2. Click START button.
On clicking, a prompt window will be displayed for the user to enter/confirm
the position of the cleaning solution on the reagent tray.
In case, if the cleaning solution is already defined through Utility > Reagent
Position, on clicking START the prompt window will displays the position
number where the wash solution is placed. You can edit the wash solution
position by entering new position number. Refer figure below.
Enter the cleaning solution position, and click OK, the Probe picks up the
appropriate volume of cleaning solution (in µl) and dispenses it in the drain
with internal and external cleaning.
13-28
The Probe wash action is repeated based on the number of cycles selected.
3. After the action is completed the analyzer gets initialized.
Use Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning
solution based on the chemistries performed/to be performed.
13.15.3.6. Prime Wash

This option is used at the beginning of the day before the Cuvette Rinse operation.
The syringe valve of the Probe is kept ON (depending on the time set by the user:
One or two minutes) to remove the air trapped inside the tubing. Also, the valves
of the CRU tubing’s are kept open to remove the air trapped in them. The following
operation occurs after the button is clicked:
1. Machine Initializes
2. CRU goes in DOWN position in the RCT.
3. The syringe valves for CRU and Probe open sequentially.
4. The priming continues for “x” minutes.
5. After the priming operation is completed, the CRU initializes to home
position.
13.15.3.7. Dead Volume Calibration

This screen enables the user to calibrate the Dead Volume for Sample Containers
and Reagent Bottles.
This procedure should be carried out at the time of software installation

(application or analyzer embedded).
The procedure to carry out the Dead Volume Calibration is given below:
13.15.3.8. For Reagent Bottle Calibration

The following steps should be done to carry out the Reagent Bottle calibration:
1. User should select the Reagent bottle type from the Dead Volume
Calibration list.
13-29
2. Select the desired dead volume within the range displayed.

3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the Dead Volume in the Reagent
Bottle.
4. Place the Reagent bottle according to the bottle type on the position
specified in the list.
5. Click on CALIBRATE button.
6. Once the calibration process is completed, message is displayed whether
successful or failed.
7. If the calibration is successful then the values are automatically stored in the
software.
RGT1 and RGT2 tube the default dead volume range is 1 ml. The
default dead volume range for RGT Large bottles is 2 ml and for
RGT Small bottles the range is 1.5 ml.
13.15.3.9. For Sample Cup/ Standard Cup Calibration

The following steps should be done to carry out the Sample container calibration:
1. User should select the appropriate sample or standard cup from the Dead
Volume Calibration list.
3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the Dead Volume in the Sample
container.
4. Place the sample or standard cup according to the sample container type
on the position specified in the list.
software.
13.15.3.10. For Sample Tube Calibration

The following steps should be done to carry out the Sample container calibration:
1. User should select the sample tube from the Dead Volume Calibration list.
3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the Dead Volume in the Sample
container.
4. Place the sample tube according to the Sample container type on the
position specified in the list.
13-30

software.
During calibration, if the assembly error is occurred then the error
message “Dead Volume Calibration Failed” will be displayed on the
error message grid.
13.15.3.11. Reset Calibration

This button is used to reset the Dead Volume Calibration values to default. A
confirmation message will be displayed before resetting calibration.
If the Application Software or any hardware program is changed,

then the Dead Volume Calibration should be repeated again.
13.15.4. ISE
This option is available only when Ion Selective Electrode unit is installed on the
analyzer to perform routine maintenance, purging, cleaning and calibration on the
ISE unit.
13-31
The following ISE maintenance commands are explained below.

When the ISE ON button is clicked, the system will check for the volume of CAL
A and CAL B. Once it is done, the lot number and expiry date of the ISE reagent
pack will be displayed in the Lot No. and Expiry Date.
There are various ISE commands available for ISE maintenance. To start the
maintenance, click on the appropriate command and then click START.
 PURGE A
This is used to purge Calibrant A solution through the tubing from the
reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant A from
the reagent module through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path.
On successful PURGE A cycle, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is
failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE
maintenance screen.
 PURGE B
This is used to purge Calibrant B solution through the tubing from the
reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant B
through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path.
On successful PURGE B cycle, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is
failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE
maintenance screen.
 CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the electrodes (Na, K, Cl, and Li) of the ISE
Module. The ISE calibration range is as follows:
Na :52-64
K :52-64
13-32
Cl :40-55
Li :47-64
On successful calibration cycle, if the values are in range, it is indicated by
green colored box. If it is not in range, then coral (deep pink) colored box
will be displayed.
On clicking SHOW REPORT, it will display the last 30 calibration values.

See figure as shown below.
The column Status displays the status of the electrodes after calibration.
Scroll the horizontal bar to view the complete report
Also, if the difference of the calibration values of (Na, K, Cl,

Li) electrodes and calibration values of reference electrodes
(Ref_Na, Ref_K, Ref_Cl, Ref_Li) are more than
1.5mV/decade, then the values are displayed in Yellow
colored box and considered as Unsuccessful calibration.
13-33
The appropriate status (Partial, Failed or Pass) will be displayed on the

basis of following conditions:
 Pass: If all electrodes are calibrated successfully.
 Partial: If at least any one of the electrodes is calibrated successfully.
 Failed: All electrodes are unsuccessfully calibrated.
 CLEAN
This command is used to remove protein build-up from the ISE Module
electrodes. The Clean command should be performed once per 24-hour
period.
On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is failed,
then Coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed.
 PUMP CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the peristaltic pumps of the ISE Module.
 BUBBLE CALIBRATION
The bubble calibration command is used to allow the module to reestablish
a baseline for detecting air-liquid interfaces. It can also be used as a
diagnostic tool to see if the bubble detector is functioning properly.
 MAINTENANCE
This is used to clear fluid from the flow path of the ISE Module and to pause
the Sip Cycle.
The Sip Cycle is used to refresh the Calibrant A in front of the electrodes.
Every 30 minutes after the last sample is run, the ISE Module will
automatically run a Sip Cycle. No command is required from the host
13-34
analyzer to initiate a Sip Cycle. The ISE Module automatically clears the
flow path, next the ISE Module dispenses 36 μL of Calibrant B into the
Sample Entry Port, and it pulls it past the electrodes using the waste pump.
The ISE Module then dispenses 95 μL of Calibrant A into the sample entry
port, and positions it in front of the electrodes.
 PRIME A
This command is used to prime Calibrant A solution from the reagent pack.
It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack.
 PRIME B
This command is used to prime Calibrant B solution from the reagent pack.
It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack.
 SHOW BUBBLE CALIBRATION
This command is used to display the bubble calibration values.
 SHOW LAST SLOPE CALCULATED

This command is used to display last calibration values for the Na, K, Cl,
and Li.
 SHOW ISE PUMP CALIBATION
This command is used to display the ISE pump calibration values.
 READ ISE VERSION
This command is used to display the ISE module software version.
On clicking ISE ON button, the system will check for the (calculated) volume of
Calibrant A and Calibrant B.
 In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is less than
10% of the total Volume then the message “ISE Reagent Pack Volume Low
(Less than 10% of Total Volume)” will be displayed in error grid and logged
in the database. This message is only for the user information.
 In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is below the
respective threshold level, then the alert message “ISE Reagent Pack
Volume Very Low (Less than 3 Days Sip)” will be displayed with RED
background in error grid.
Once the check is completed, the ISE reagent pack Lot Number and Expiry date
will be displayed in the Maintenance screen.
However, you can proceed with RUN and other maintenance activities.
13-35
13.15.4.1. Checking ISE Pack Details

The ISE pack details can be view by ISE PACK button, through the Status Monitor
screen. These details are viewable only before starting the run as this option is
disabled during the run.
ISE PACK button will be visible in STATUS MONITOR only if
product login is for 4 channels ISE.
On clicking this button, the ISE reagent pack information will be displayed which
contains.
 Lot Number, Installation Date and Expiry Date of current ISE Reagent Pack
 Details of all ISE Calibration values
 Remaining ISE Reagent Volume Indicator (approximate remaining volume
of Calibrant A and Calibrant B; whichever is lesser).
13-36
The system detects New / Change in ISE Reagent Pack only on

interacting with ISE module (by clicking ISE ON from the
Maintenance screen or on starting the ISE run). Hence, if the user
clicks ISE Details button just after (physically) installing the New
ISE Reagent Pack, System will still display the ISE Details of the
earlier Reagent Pack.
On detecting (and registering) new ISE Reagent Pack, Backup of

ISE inventory data of earlier Reagent Pack will be taken by the
system on the analyzer PC.
13.15.5. Auto Maintenance

To maintain the efficiency of the analyzer, you must clean and deproteinize the
probes and cuvettes regularly to prevent the buildup of contaminants.
By default, this action is performed automatically at the beginning of the day when
the application is started first time, but you can initiate it at any time from the
Maintenance screen. This is an automatic service action that does not require
manual intervention.
13-37
This operation can be initiated any time from the AUTO MAINTENANCE option
from the Maintenance screen:
There are some series of actions performed during the auto maintenance startup
and shut down operation.
13.15.5.1.1. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Startup
Startup
1. Pump Calibration (automatic step)
2. Prime Wash (automatic step)
3. Cuvette Rinse (automatic step)
13.15.5.1.2. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Shutdown

Shutdown
1. ISE clean (only if ISE module is attached)
3. Wash (Arm, Stirrer, Cuvette, Laundry unit) (automatic step)
5. Water Save (automatic step)
13.15.5.1.3. Steps to initiate Auto Maintenance at Startup

The auto-maintenance at startup is initiated to perform
automatically when the analyzer and computer are turned on for
the first time each day
To perform auto startup action manually, do the following:
1. In the Maintenance screen, select START-UP from the AUTO
MAINTENANCE frame.
2. Click START.
13-38
3. Click OK to continue with the maintenance.

This will start the auto maintenance operation.
13.15.5.2. To Perform Auto Maintenance at Shutdown

To perform auto shutdown manually, do the following:
1. In the Maintenance screen, select SHUTDOWN from the AUTO
MAINTENANCE frame.
2. Click START.
Put the required amount of cleaning solution on the mentioned reagent

and sample position, and then click OK.
This will start the maintenance operation and the instrument will be
shutdown once it is completed.
13-39
13.16. Service Check Screen

The Service Check screen can be used only by a Service Personnel. Only specific
users can be given access rights after permission from the Service Personnel.
The Service Check screen consist of the following options:
Figure 13-4. Service check screen

 Arm/Stirrer
This option is used for checking the alignment of the ARM Probe or Stirrer
Assembly. Upon selecting the Arm or Stirrer Option, the service personnel
can check the alignment of the respective assembly in trough, in sample
tray (outer, middle and inner positions), in reagent tray (outer positions and
inner positions), in cuvette and in dilution cuvette. The operator can check
stirrer motor rotation speed STR On options as shown in picture below:
13-40
 Initialize
This will initialize the arm assembly as per the available options selected
from the list.
 Dummy Run
On clicking this button, user can define the Sample, Diluents and reagent
position. After defining the respective positions, on clicking START button,
Dummy run is initiated. On clicking STOP button, Dummy run can be
stopped when required.
 Execute
This will move the respective assembly in the selected path. This is used to
check the motion of an arm assembly in a particular path. Also for checking
the Opto conditions.
 Sample Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize the Sample Tray. (Position # 1)
Pulse: This command is used to move the sample tray step by step (one
pulse gives micro-step change between 2 positions)
Rotate 1: Using this command, the sample try will rotate one sample
position.
Rotate: Using this command, the reagent tray will take one complete
rotation.
Barcode Scan: This option is used to perform Sample Barcode Scan. All
the Barcode(s) Read is displayed on the screen (No cross check or
verification of Duplication done). Display remains until user performs some
other operation. To view the same Barcode(s) again user has to click on the
button with Barcode label (This option is available until user remains on the
Service Check Screen).
Single Barcode: Using this command, the only single bottle will be scanned
for barcode.
ASP Barcode Scanner Beam ON/OFF: This option is used to Turn ON or
OFF the ASP Barcode Scanner Beam. On reading the Barcode the Beam
turns OFF automatically.
13-41
 Reagent Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize the Reagent Tray. (Position # 1)
Pulse: This command is used to move the reagent tray step by step (one
pulse gives micro-step change between 2 positions).
Rotate 1: Using this command, the reagent tray will rotate one sample
position.
Rotate 50: Using this command, the reagent tray will take one complete
rotation.
Barcode Scan: This option is used to perform Reagent Barcode Scan. All
the Barcode(s) Read are displayed on the screen (No cross check or
verification of Duplication / Checksum / Number of Digits / Invalid Reagent
Code / Invalid Bottle Type are done). Display remains until user performs
some other operation. To view the same Barcode(s) again user has to click
on the button with Barcode label (This option is available until user remains
on the Service Check Screen).
Single Barcode: Using this command, the only single reagent bottle will be
scanned for barcode.
RGT Barcode Scanner Beam ON/OFF: This option is used to Turn ON or
OFF the RGT Barcode Scanner Beam. On reading the Barcode the Beam
turns OFF automatically.
 RCT Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize RCT Tray to initial position.

(Cuvette Number 54 in path of Light Beam).
13-42
Pulse: This option is given for moving the reaction tray in micro steps
(between 2 cuvettes) to check for the Opto-coupler alignment.
Offset: Using this command, the reaction tray rotates to achieve the half
rotation.
Steps: Using this command, the RCT tray will rotate one cuvette position.
Rotate To: This option is used for rotating the reaction tray to “X” position.
60 Cuvettes: This option is used for rotating the reaction tray by one
complete rotation.
 CRU Unit
This function allows the service personnel to check the CRU Functionality.
A CRU RUN CHECK button.
Initialize: This option initializes the CRU Assembly to home position (UP).
Up: This option brings CRU Up from the cuvette.
DOWN: This option brings CRU Down in Cuvette.
Make sure the RCT Cuvettes are aligned before executing
this command.
Following options are available after CRU is Down in Cuvette:

CRU BIOHAZARD SUCTION PUMP ON / OFF: This option Turns the Bio-
Hazard Suction Pump ON or OFF.
CRU WATER DISPENSES VALVE ON / OFF: This option turns the Water
Dispense Valve ON / OFF.
To try this option first brings CRU Down in Cuvette and
keep Bio-Hazard Suction Pumps ON to avoid any overflow
and keep Overflow Suction Valve OFF.
 Syringe
13-43
In this sub-menu, there are 3 syringe assemblies displayed – Sample,

R1PT, and R2PT. Select any one of them (this button highlights). All the
following commands are available for the selected syringe.
Initialize: – Moves the Syringe motor to attain the Home position.
Aspirate:
You can check the ASPIRATE steps by entering the desired volume in the
field provided. The maximum volume that can be entered for ASPIRATION
movement is 95µl.
Dispense:
You can check the DISPENSE steps by entering the desired volume in the
field provided. The maximum volume that can be entered for DISPENSE
movement is 95µl.
 Valve and Pump
This option is used for checking the Valve operations for the ARM Trough,
ARM PROBE and Stirrer Trough.
SPT-R2PT Trough Valve: Turns ON or OFF the ARM (SPT-R2PT) Trough
Valve.
R1PT Trough Valve: Turns ON or OFF the ARM (R1PT) Trough Valve.
Stirrer Trough Valve: Turns ON or OFF the ARM (R1PT) Trough Valve.
SPT Clean Valve: Turns ON or OFF the SPT Clean Valve.
R1PT Clean Valve: Turns ON or OFF the R1PT Clean Valve.
R2PT Clean Valve: Turns ON or OFF the R2PT Clean Valve.
 Temperature
RGT/RCT: This option is used for displaying the RCT and RGT
temperature. The RCT Temperature should be within 37 +/-0.2 degrees and
the RGT Temperature within 8-12 degrees.
13-44
READ: This button starts reading operation and given Temperature Display
till Stopped.
STOP: STOP button should be clicked before moving out of next screen.
 Communication
This option is used for checking the communication between PC and the
analyzer. The service personnel select the COM port and then click on the
TEST COMMUNICATION button.
Misc Commands
This option helps to view Version Numbers for MultiXL Software and
Embedded Software Versions (Analyzer, Micro Blaze, FPGA, PDC and
RCT Heater). Click on this button, and then select “Software Version”.
 Calibration
This section of Service Check Form is used to Calibrate ARM centering at

various applicable positions. Pre-requisites for this operation is to bring the
ARM or STIRRER to required position using the ARM/STIRRER Move
options.
Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as Clockwise.
Anti Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as
Anticlockwise.
13-45
Accept: Saves the Course / FINE adjusted value of ARM / STIRRER in to

local memory. Values are not saved in Analyzer until “Save Calib.” Button is
clicked.
Default Calibration: Cancels and reloads the default position of ARM /
STIRRER at respective position of calibration.
Save Calib: This option is mandatory after calibrating the ARM . STIRRER.
The locally Accepted values are Saved in the Analyzer Non-volatile memory
and are used by Analyzer henceforth.
Calibration Menu Button:
The following options are displayed when this button is clicked:
13.17. Hibernate/Wake-Up
This option is used to manually hibernate or wake-up the analyzer. This feature is
hardware dependent and option is visible only if the sleep mode hardware is
installed in the analyzer.
To hibernate, use the following procedure:

1. Click on Hibernate.
13-46
A message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
On clicking, analyzer will go to power saving sleep mode and the option will
be displayed as Wake Up.
Similarly, to wake-up the analyzer:

1. Click on Wake Up.
A message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
Analyzer will come out from hibernate (power-saving sleep) mode and again
the option will be displayed as Hibernate.
13-47
During hibernation, the following activities will wakeup the analyzer when
you click on the following screen:
 Service Check
 Maintenance
 Sample Barcode Scan, Reagent Barcode Scan and Volume Scan in
Status Monitor screen.
 Shut Down
On clicking, it will first ask the user by displaying the confirmation message
“Do you really want to Wake Up?” If clicked Yes, then it will wakeup.
On starting the batch run from the Status Monitor > Sample Tray,
the analyzer will wake-up on its own, if it is hibernated.
Hibernate option will be disabled during any activity on the

analyzer.
13.18. Archive Data

The archive data is the process of moving patient results to separate data storage
for long-term use. Data archives consist of older patient data which can be used
for future reference, if required.
Data archiving improves the performance of (Live) database with the following key
benefits.
 Faster search of patient results
 Quick accessibility of patient results
 Reduces the amount of storage required for patient results
For archiving and restoring patient data, the Archive option will appear on the
main menu as shown in the following figure.
13-48
Figure 13-5. Archive option on the main menu

Initially when the software is installed, this option is not visible. It appears only
when the patient results reaches to a specific limit. In this case, at specific time
interval, software automatically prompts the user to archive the data when it is
necessary. Thereafter, this option will be always visible.
It is advisable to archive the older patient results to separate data storage.
It is mandatory to archive the data before starting the batch run
when the patient result reaches a specific limit (software shows
alert message, as required).
Only Patient results will be archived. The Calibration, Control and

Consumables data will always remain in the (Live) Database.
While archiving the patient results, the required additional
information such as Area, Location, Doctor, Reference Range etc
are copied to the separate data storage (Archive Database) and
available while reviewing archived results.
13-49
13.18.2. Archiving Data

Use the following procedure to archive the data:
1. Click on the Archive from the main menu. See Figure 13-5.
2. In this screen, two options are available.

 Archived List to View Reports
 Archive Patient Data
3. Select the Archive Patient Data option, and click on OK.
On clicking, the archive process starts and the status will be displayed on
the progress bar.
13-50
During the archive process, all other menus will be

disabled.
4. After completing the archive process, a message “Archived data

successfully” will be displayed on the screen.
13.18.3. Viewing Archived Data

Use the following steps to view the archived data:
1. Click on the Archive option. See Figure 13-5.
13-51
2. Select the Archived List to View Reports, and then select the desired
archive to connect to archive database to view the reports.
3. Click OK.
On clicking, a message will be displayed “Connection successful. You
may view the Patient Reports”.
During this time, only Reports, Search and Shut down
menus are available. Rest of the menus will not be
accessible.
13-52
4. After connecting to achieve database, you will be able to connect to Live

database again by selecting Live record from the list and click on OK
button.
13.18.4. Observations
When the archive database is connected, the patient data can be viewed only in
the following screen:
 Reports > Patient Report
 Reports > Result Reprint
 Reports > Test Statistics
 Reports > Error Log
 Reports > Reaction Curve
 Reports > Other > Reagent Consumption
 Search > Patient Results
13-53
Other main menu screens are not accessible for the user except the following
screens:
 Search
 Reports
 Archive
 Shutdown
During batch run, the Archive screen will not be accessible
13-54
14. Accessories, Spares, and Consumables

SR.
CODE DESCRIPTION
NO.
ACCESSORIES & CONSUMABLES
1 100592 ADAPTOR REAGENT 5 ML (set of 50)
2 109855 HOLDER FOR 5 ML REAGENT ADAPTOR OUTER (XLV2/XL‐640)
3 100660 PVC BOAT SUPPORT (set of 25)
4 182581 REAGENT BOTTLE (white colour) (20ml) ASSY. WITH RED COLOUR CAP
5 182584 REAGENT BOTTLE (white colour) (50ml) ASSY. WITH MILKY WHITE COLOUR CAP
6 102932 SAMPLE CUP (set of 450 )
7 100634 TUBE ADAPTER TEST TUBE FOR MOULDED SAMPLE HOLDING PLATE (set of 50) NEW
8 107613 10 MICRON FILTER (125mm LENGTH)
9 100521 DRIER FOR CUVETTE (set of 2 )
10 182220 PHOTOMETER LAMP ASSY_S
11 100896 STIRRER TYPE‐1 (TEFLON BLACK COATING)
12 100279 CUVETTE
13 182681 LAUNDRY ASPIRATION TUBING SET ‐ 2 PROBE CONSTRUCTION
14 182682 LAUNDRY DISPENSING TUBING SET‐ 2 PROBE CONSTRUCTION
15 105480 FUSES SET FOR XL V2 ‐ SPXL549
16 103439 KIT AM FOR XL( UHMWPE SYRINGES)
17 107888 AM KIT‐B FOR XL600/300/V2/A4/EM360
18 112710 BI‐ANNUAL SPARES KIT_XL‐300/XL‐600 (IT0)
19 115326 BI‐ANNUAL SPARES KIT_XL‐300/XL‐600 (NEW)
20 103978 TOTAL TUBING SET ‐ V2
21 105319 ASSEMBLY TUBING SET FOR XL
ASP ASSEMBLY
22 103098 ASSEMBLY OF ASP ‐ XLV2
23 107711 ASSEMBLY CANMAX BARCODE FOR ASP/RGT _S2_S
24 103668 POWDER COATED DEEP DRAWN CONTAINER FOR SAMPLE TRAY XL300
25 105221 PAINTING OUTER RIM SAMPLE CONTAINER FOR XL‐600
26 182638 MOULDED SAMPLE TRAY ASSY WITH EMERGENCY PLATE
27 182639 MOULDED SAMPLE TRAY ASSEMBLY WITH STANDARD PLATE
28 103440 ASSEMBLY OF SAMPLE TRAY (1‐50) WITHOUT STANDARD PLATE
29 103441 ASSEMBLY OF SAMPLE TRAY (51‐100) WITHOUT EMERGENCY PLATE
14-1
30 105586 ASSEMBLY STANDARD TRAY

31 105587 ASSEMBLY EMERGENCY TRAY
32 104956 ASSEMBLY SAMPLE TRAY HOLDING DISK (NEW)
ARM ASSEMBLY
33 182575 R1PT PROBE ASSY.
34 182576 R2PT PROBE ASSY.
35 182574 SPT PROBE ASSY.
36 103095 ASSEMBLY OF R1PT PROBE (CAPACITANCE) WITH BUSH & NUT
37 103096 ASSEMBLY OF R2PT PROBE (CAPACITANCE) WITH BUSH & NUT
38 103097 ASSEMBLY OF SPT PROBE (CAPACITANCE) WITH BUSH & NUT
39 112725 ASSEMBLY SPT PROBE WITH CONNECTOR FOR XLV2_S
40 112726 ASSEMBLY R1PT PROBE WITH CONNECTOR FOR XLV2_S
41 112727 ASSEMBLY R2PT PROBE WITH CONNECTOR FOR XLV2_S
42 103094 ASSEMBLY OF R1PT ASSY FOR XL‐600/300‐V2
43 182632 R2PT ASSEMBLY.
44 182630 SPT ASSEMBLY
45 105315 ASSEMBLY SPT (SPARE) FOR XL‐600/300‐V2
46 105281 R1PT ASSY(SPARE) FOR XL‐600/300‐V2
47 105316 ASSEMBLY R2PT (SPARE) FOR XL‐600/300‐V2
48 105215 PAINTING COVER ARM FOR XLV2
RGT ASSEMBLY
49 182591 MOULDED REAGENT TRAY ASSY.
50 117145 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY OF LEUZE BARCODE READER_RGT_XLV2_S
51 117148 ASSEMBLY OF LEUZE BARCODE READER WITH BRACKET_RGT_XLV2_S
52 104958 RGT IMPROVED COOLING (UPGRADE)
53 182634 Rgt Assembly (W/O Sensor)
54 104158 RGT TEMP. CONTROLLER MODULE, 2 CHANNEL MAKE : SUB‐ZERO ( TA ‐ 32 )
55 182223 RGT THERMISTOR ASSY. ( RGT Tray to ADC PCB )
56 103448 ASSEMBLY OF RGT SENSOR ( RGT Tray to Temperature Controller )
57 182508 ASSEMBLY RGT COVER FOR XLV2_S
58 103082 REAGENT TRAY COVER
59 105212 PAINTING OUTER RIM RGT
60 114595 RGT COOLING ASSY WITH 6MM COPPER PLATE & SPACER_XLV2
61 102135 MOUNT FOR REAGENT TRAY
62 117126 Thermoelectric Modules/Peltier CP14,71,10,L2,RT,W7.87,TIM, (Part no. 101071040303)
63 100773 SPACER FOR PELTIER FOR XL‐600
14-2
64 100683 ACRYLIC PLATE FOR SCANNER

65 117307 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY FOR RGT TRAY WINDOW HEATER ELXLV2009_S
66 180408 CAPACITOR MP 1 uF/63V ‐ 100V +/‐ 5%
CRU ASSEMBLY
67 103090 ASSEMBLY OF CRU WITH PACKING
68 105321 ASSEMBLY LAUNDRY FOR TWO PROBE CONSTRUCTION
69 182582 CRU DRIER PROBE ASSY
70 182583 CRU SUCTION PROBE ASSY (NEW)
71 182644 CRU DETERGENT WASH PROBE ASSY (2 PROBE CONSTRUCTION)
72 182645 CRU WASH PROBE ASSY (2 PROBE CONSTRUCTION)
73 182647 CRU ASPIRATION MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY ( Red)
74 182648 CRU DISPENSING MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY ( Blue )
75 182649 SUCTION & DRIER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY ( Yellow )
PHOTOMETER ASSEMBLY
76 103093 ASSEMBLY OF PHOTOMETER WITH PACKING
77 101472 CABLE ASSEMBLY FLAT FOR PHOTOMETER TO XLADC PCB (ADC CN2) ASSY.
78 104842 LENS ASSY (LENS DIA 12)
79 104843 LENS ASSY (LENS DIA 9.5)
80 102127 MOUNT FOR LAMP XL‐600/300
RCT ASSEMBLY
81 105303 ASSEMBLY RCT COMPLETE FOR XL‐600/300‐V2
82 103443 ASSEMBLY OF RCT THERMISTOR.
83 102047 COVER (VACUUM FORMED) FOR RCT TOP XL‐300 & XL‐600
84 182530 Cuvette Ring Set Assembly ( W/O Cuvettes )
85 105187 ASSEMBLY HEATER WITH 60 SLOT BOTTOM RING FOR XL
86 104961 CUVETTE RETAINING PLATE
87 104962 ASSEMBLY HEATING JACKET (NEW) ‐ RCT TROUGH
SYRINGE ASSEMBLY
88 108602 RETROFITTABLE KIT FOR BURKET VALVE ASSY. (XL)
89 116903 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY SPP_XL_KEYTO SYRINGE 100uL FSPXL705 REV‐2_XL_S
90 116910 ASSEMBLY 100 ul Syringe Pump ‐ KEYTO WITH BRACKET_S_XLV2
91 116904 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY _XL_KEYTO SYRINGE 500uL ‐ FSPXL704 REV‐2_XL_S
14-3
92 116908 ASSEMBLY 500 ul Syringe Pump KEYTO WITH BRACKET_S_XLV2

93 109902 ASSEMBLY BURKERT VALVE WITH MANIFOLD_S (XLV2)
94 182108 ALIGNMENT JIG FOR SYRINGE ASSY. ‐ R1pp / R2pp
95 182109 ALIGNMENT JIG FOR SPP ASSY (PC)
STIRRER ASSEMBLY.
96 103091 ASSEMBLY OF STIRRER WITH PACKING.
97 182493 STIRRER MOTOR ASSY.
98 106298 ASSEMBLY PCB STIRRER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY ELS22001/R2_S
99 105219 PAINTING COVER STIRRER FOR XL‐600
ELECTRONICS
100 114236 KIT FOR ROBOADC PCB ASSY RETROFIT_WITHOUT SLEEP MODE MACHINE XL_S”
101 109979 ASSEMBLY PCB ELS22035R2.1 ROBOADC_XL_Open System_S
102 KIT FOR ROBOADC PCB ASSY RETROFIT_WITH SLEEP MODE MACHINE
114104
XL_S
103 103113 ASSEMBLY PCB OPTO ELS22024/R1
104 106334 ASSEMBLY PCB STEP ARM FOR SAPPHIRE SYRINGE ELS22011/R0_S
105 103123 ASSEMBLY PCB STEP TRAY ELS22010/R0
106 103115 ASSEMBLY PCB BKPL ELS22014/R0
107 103104 ASSEMBLY PCB XLLMPS ELS22004/R1
108 115367 SMPS 12V/6A LS‐75‐12 (UNIVERSAL AC INPUT) WITH MOUTING PLATE_XL _S
109 109235 ASSEMBLY PCB AC DRIVE ELS22009R3
110 113635 ASSEMBLY PCB DC DRIVE ELS22002R2(XLDCDPS)_S_XL
111 182319 ELS22015/R0 RSLS PCB ASSY.
112 103453 ASSEMBLY OF PCB ISO232 ELS22030/R2
113 103109 ASSEMBLY PCB CNDS ELS22012/R2
114 182242 BAR CODE P S PCB ASSEMBLY
115 103110 ASSEMBLY PCB SEN3 ELS22031/R2
116 103105 ASSEMBLY PCB WGPT04 LOAD CELL
117 103111 ASSEMBLY PCB STIRRER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY ELS22001/R2
118 103451 ASSEMBLY OF PCB XLISPS REGULATED POWER SUPPLY ELS22019/R2
14-4
119 182341 XL V2 LLS POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSY.

120 103112 ASSEMBLY PCB REGULATOR ELS22032R1
121 109709 ASSEMBLY PCB SAMPLE LLS ELS52023R0_S2_S
122 109710 ASSEMBLY PCB R1/R2 LLS ELS52023R0_S2_S
123 182507 OPTO ASSY. (R1PP, CRU‐D)
124 103458 ASSEMBLY OF OPTO (R2PP)
125 103457 ASSEMBLY OF OPTO (SPP, CRU‐U)
126 182506 OPTO ASSY. (SPT,R1PT,R2PT,STIR.)
127 115230 ASSEMBLY PCB SLEEP MODE ELS62033R2 RELAY_XLV2_S
128 103456 ASSEMBLY OF OPTO (ASP / RCT / RGT)
ELECTRICALS
129 181205 POWER SUPPLY SMPS 24V/6.5A P150E‐24 WITH ENCLOSURE
130 100830 POWER SUPPLY UNIT MAKE : COSEL # P30E‐5‐N
131 100821 POWER SUPPLY SMPS 5V/5A S‐25‐5/LS‐25‐5(5A) NEW
132 114499 ASSEMBLY PCB –USB CONNECTOR ELLC2003R6_S
133 115035 ASSEMBLY_SMC VALVE WITH OUT CONNECTORS_S
134 114798 RETROFITTABLE KIT CKD VALVE TO SMC VALVE_XLV2/XL‐640
135 182514 MAINS INLET WIRING ASSY.
136 182505 XL SWITCH ASSY.(XL300)
137 SWITCH ROCKER 8650VB 10(4) A 250VAC GREY / WHITE / BLACK WITH SWITCH COVER
113938
FOR XL600/300_S
138 182222 GREEN INDICATOR LAMP ASSY.
139 182221 RED INDICATOR LAMP ASSLY.
140 182399 R‐320 TYPE II TRANSFORMER ASSY.
141 182398 R‐620 TYPE I TRANSFORMER ASSY.
142 103455 ASSEMBLY OF ISE TRANSFORMER
143 103449 ASSEMBLY OF ISE TRANSFORMER TX3 ELEC. ( FOR 110 V )
144 104948 SLIP RING 4 POLE
145 182504 LAMP PS FAN ASSY.
146 182224 LOAD CELL BYPASS DONGLE
147 101251 CABLE ASSEMBLY OF EARTHING FOR XL‐300 & XL‐600 FSPCW369
148 182496 BIG KNF PUMP ASSY.
14-5
149 182495 BIO HAZARD WASTE PUMP ASSY.

150 182494 DETERGENT PUMP ASSY.
151 100570 MOUNT FOR NF 30KPDC PUMP
152 ASSEMBLY PUMP VACUUM DOUBLE HEADED GD ‐ 6EA WITH NOZZLES_XLV2/XL‐
114795
640/2R_S
153 103454 ASSEMBLY OF TANK HEATER & SENSOR ASSY.
HYDRAULICS INTERNAL
154 104476 ASSEMBLY OF DEEP DRAWN PRESSURE TANK
155 104490 ASSEMBELY KEYENCE DIGITAL PRESSUR SENSOR WITH BRACKET & NOZZLE_XLV2_S
156 116257 ASSEMBELY ELECTRICAL KEYENCE DIGITAL PRESSUR SENSOR APC33W_XLV2_S
157 10‐32 Special Tapered Thread with 1/4? Hex to 200 Series Barb 3/32? (2.25mm) ID
107623
Tubing, Natural kynar PVDF; X220‐J1A
158 100917 PRESSURE REGULATOR FDV30KPZ
159 182531 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ASSY.
160 181211 PRESSURE GUAGE (0‐2 BAR 1/8" BSP)
161 104850 SHUT OFF VALVE ASSY
162 104946 COMPLETE HEAD NF30KPDC (Bio Hazard Pump)
163 180447 COMPLETE HEAD NF30KP.27DC(ID.NO.068215/MAKE KNF) ( Detergent Pump)
164 104848 COMPLETE HEAD NF1.100KPE (Water KNF Pump)
HYDRAULICS EXTERNAL
165 113006 ASSEMBLY 20 LITER CAN WIO FLOAT BASED LEVEL SENSOR FOR DI WATER_S
166 113005 ASSEMBLY 20 LITER CAN WIO FLOAT BASED LEVEL SENSOR FOR WASTE_S
167 113008 ASSEMBLY 10 LITER CAN WIO FLOAT BASED LEVEL SENSOR FOR CLEANING SOLN _S
168 ASSEMBLY 10 LITER CAN WIO FLOAT BASED LEVEL SENSOR FOR BIO‐HAZARDOUS WASTE
113007
_S
169 101990 CAP FOR 20 LTR WASTE CAN
170 100659 CAP FOR 20 LTR. WATER CAN
171 104967 ASSEMBLY OF BIO‐HAZARD CAN TUBE & CAN CAP
172 104968 ASSEMBLY OF CLEANING SOLUTION CAN TUBE & CAN CAP
173 100675 COUNTERWIEGHT FOR DETERGENT
174 100561 CAP DELRIN FOR 10 LTR. CAN
175 104858 DI WATER SPIGOT ASSY.
14-6
176 104969 ASSEMBLY WASTE SPIGOT ASSY.

177 180736 HUB FOR WASTE
178 107612 SS TUBE FOR WATER FILTER
179 104681 ASSEMBLY CAN 20 LTR WITH LEVEL SENSOR FOR DI WATER
180 104684 ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTR. CLEANING SOLN WITH LEVEL SENSOR
181 104683 ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTR WITH LEVEL SENSOR FOR BIO‐HAZARDOUS WASTE
182 104682 ASSEMBLY CAN 20 LTR WASTE WITH LEVEL SENSOR
183 106655 ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 10 LTR BIO‐HAZARDOUS SOLUTIONCAN_S
184 106656 ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 20 LIT WASTE CAN_S
CABLES, MOTOR ASSY.AND BELTS
185 201215 CABLE ASSEMBLY REAR PANEL TO COMPUTER CW316 R‐4
186 101252 CABLE ASSEMBLY TRANSDUCER UNIT ASSY TO REAR PANEL ASSY SPCW372
187 180174 CABLE ASSEMBLY ADC PCB TO ISE MODULE ASSY CW394
188 101267 CABLE ASSEMBLY ADC PCB TO ISO MODULE ASSY CW395
189 101455 CABLE ASSEMBLY FOR LAMP ASSY FSPCW337‐R6
190 101470 CABLE ASSEMBLY REAR PANEL TO ISO PCB (CN1) FSPCW357
191 111805 ASSEMBLY PULLEY 10 T AND MOTOR FOR ASP
192 111806 ASSEMBLY PULLEY 18 T TIMING & MOTOR
193 111804 ASSEMBLY MOTOR FOR RCT ROTATION
194 105234 ASSEMBLY MOTOR FOR ARM ROTATION
195 111807 ASSEMBLY MOTOR ARM UP DOWN
196 111803 ASSEMBLY MOTOR CRU UP DOWN
197 100842 BELT: 230XL‐037
198 100839 BELT TIMING; 80XL037 (ROTATIONAL)
199 100841 BELT TIMING 130XL037 (VERTICAL)
200 100840 BELT TIMING ; B 110 MXL 8.0
201 101473 CABLE ASSEMBLY FLAT FOR XL OPTO PCB TO XL CNDS PCB CABLE ASSY SPFC303
ISE
202 103962 ASSEMBLY ISE UNIT FOR XL 600
203 180446 ISE MODULE W / O ELECTRODES CAT NO:‐ 5004
14-7
204 181250 PUMP CASETTE FOR ISE MODULE CAT # 5501

205 4 CHANNEL ISE CAL A / CAL B / WASTE MOTOR/PUMP ASSY (CATALOGUE / PART NO.
162030
006390‐001)
206 104980 BUBBLE DETECTOR (CATALOGUE / PART No. 004763‐001)
4 CHANNEL ISE
207 113954 NA ELECTRODE FOR ISE, CAT # 5201
208 113953 K ELECTRODE FOR ISE, CAT # 5202
209 113956 EPOXY CHLORIDE ELECTRODE, CATALOG NUMBER # 5207
210 113952 REFERENCE ELECTRODE FOR ISE, CAT # 5204
211 100316 LI_ ELECTRODE ‐ REF 5205 FOR ISE (CAT. NO. 5205)
212 100346 SPACER ELECTRODE ‐ REF 5206
213 104984 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE BUBBLE DETECTOR KIT Cat. No. 5621
214 103865 ISE 4CH PUMP TUBING KIT Cat no.5625
215 100317 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE
OTHERS
216 101677 CLEANER FOR PROBE
217 182641 TROUGH ASSLY FOR XL
218 100672 TROUGH TUBING JUNCTION
219 116557 ASSEMBLY PINCH VALVE (DELRIN‐FABRICATED) & PLATE_S
220 182518 TOOL KIT FOR XL
221 104808 CONNECTOR FLAT BOTTOM;1/4‐28 UNF PORTS COLOR ‐ RED (PART NO DB200‐12951‐05)
222 CONNECTOR FLAT BOTTOM;1/4‐28 UNF PORTS COLOR ‐ BLACK (PART NO DB200‐12951‐
104807
02)
223 111846 RCT BASE ASSY WITH DOWEL PIN_XLV2
224 111845 RCT BASE ASSY WITHOUT DOWEL PIN_XLV2
PANELS
225 105145 PAINTING FOR PANEL FRONT FOR XL‐600
226 107828 PRESSURE TANK CONNECTOR SET (OLD TYPE ) XL
227 1/16‐27 NPT Thread with 5/16" Hex to 200 Series Barb, 1/8"(3 mm) ID Tubing, Natural
107621
kynar PVDF; 16230‐J1A
228 1/16‐27 NPT Thread with 5/16" Hex to 200 Series Barb, 3/32" (2.25 mm) ID Tubing,
108084
Natural Kynar, PDVF‐16220‐J1A
229 100871 KNF Vaccum pump Elbow Connector(Set of 2)
14-8
230 JIG‐TOOL REMOVAL TOOL FOR PRESSURE TANK TUBING(6X4) (NEW CONCEPT WITH
220129
HANDLE).
231 105836 CONNECTOR SET FOR XL
232 101728 CASTOR WHEEL
233 115984 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY RGT PELTIERS FOR XLV2_S
234 107870 DOME ASSY (XL300)
235 114592 ASSEMBLY PCB FLOAT SENSOR ELS22037_S_XL
236 108778 ASSEMBLY PCB ELS22035R4 ROBOADC_S2
237 114044 ASSEMBLY RGT BASE FOR XLV2_S
238 114235 CABLE ASSY ROBOADC PCB J29(SLAVE PORG) & J32 TO PC COM CWXLV232 R0
239 116446 5635 – 4 channel ISE side cover
240 116445 5634 – 4 channel ISE chasis assembly
241 116444 5633 – 4 channel ISE module w/o pumps
242 ADAPTER CABLE FROM SLEEP MODE CABLE (CWXLV228)TO ROBOADC PCB J13CWXLV230
114103
R0
243 114595 RGT COOLING ASSY WITH 6MM COPPER PLATE & SPACER_XLV2
244 104638 ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY RGT PELTIERS EAD1304 R1
245 114856 CABLE ASSEMBLY RS232 PCB ASSY. (PC) TO USB CONN. PCB J4 CONN. CWXLV233 R0
246 113672 RETROFIT ASSEMBLY RS232‐USB COMMUNICATION XL600_S
247 107061 RETROFITABLE KIT_ NEW BUSH FOR PROBE GUIDE, PLATE & ARM BASE (XL600/300)
248 112677 ASSY.LAUNDRY PROBES,CRU BASE & TUBINGS FOR XLV2_S
249 104037 RETROFIT ‐ RCT BASE ASSEMBLY
250 114857 RETROFIT KIT OF USB CONN PCB_XL_S
251 RETROFITABLE KIT OF TYGON TUBE R‐3603, 3/8"x7/8" (PART NO‐AAC00030), ELBOW &
111789
NOZZLE ASSY., HUB FOR WASTE WITH WASTE CAN CAP (R‐920)
252 112853 ASSEMBLY RCT BASE SLIPRING SRC022_W/O DOWELL PIN_XL_S
253 112854 ASSEMBLY RCT BASE _SLIPRING SRC022_With DOWELL PIN_XL_S
254 106739 RUBBER WASHER FOR STIRRER MOTOR
255 100937 SILICON TUBING R3350 2 MM X 4 MM (INTEGRA)
256 115537 5MM x 1/8” BSP STRAIGHT ADAPTOR; PART NO RM010511
257 115482 SS SWIVEL ELBOW‐BSPP 1/8” TUBE OD 6 mm ; KQB2L06‐G01
258 106654 ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 10 LIT CLEANING SOLUTION CAN_S
259 106653 ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 20 LTR DI WATER CAN_S
260 TYGON LABORATORY TUBING FORMULATION E‐3603 1/16" X 3/16" (PART NO‐
100912
ACF00003)
14-9
261 100803 POLYURYTHINE TUBING TRANSPARENT ID 4 MM X OD 6 MM

262 105364 ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTR WITH LEVEL SENSOR FOR BIO‐HAZARDOUS WASTE
263 102181 SPIGOT FOR 10 LTR BIO HAZARD CAN
264 102644 Y Connector with 200 series Barbs 1/8" (3 mm) ID Tubing; Part No. Y230‐1
265 116887 STICKER FOR RGT BARCODE ALIGNMENT
266 117580 HF RFID ( TEST LOADER) KIT_S
14-10
15. Introduction to ISE Module

ISE (Electrolyte Measurement System) is placed on extreme left side of the
chemistry analyzer, and it measures the concentration of Li+, Na+, K+, and Cl- of
serum, plasma or diluted urine with the ion electrodes.
The ISE unit consists of ISE module, ion electrode and three pumps, two for
supply and other for waste. ISE Reagent pack containing Calibrant A and Calibrant
B is attached to the ISE module.
ISE module This module consists of electrodes (Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference)
and pumps. Measurement of concentration is done at electrodes
and rinses/calibrates after every measurement
Communication to the analyzer is carried out through RS232C.
Ion electrode This unit consists of Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference electrodes.
Cal A pump This pump supplies Calibrant-A into ISE module.
Cal B pump This pump supplies Calibrant-B into ISE module.
Waste pump This pump drains liquid from ISE module.
All waste liquid are discharged into the external tank for high concentration waste
liquid.
The Module is completely self-contained. All sample and Calibrant positioning
within the module is controlled by an integral microprocessor, which assures
reliable electrode operation and maximum lifetime. The electrolyte measurement
system’s microprocessor applies proprietary mathematical algorithms to electrode
output voltages, converting them to clinical units of mmol/L.
15-1
15.1. Part Location
Figure 15-1. Front View
Figure 15-2. Rear View
15-2
Figure 15-3. ISE Module
15-3
Figure 15-4. Interconnection tubing diagram
15-4
Figure 15-5. ISE Reagent Pack with built-in waste circuit diagram
15.2. ISE Technical Specification

Sample type Serum, Plasma or Urine (Urine requires dilution)
Sample size 70 µl serum

140 µl diluted urine
Analysis time Serum – 35 seconds, including one point calibration

Urine – 40 seconds, including one point calibration
Throughput Serum – 100 samples per hour

Urine – 90 samples per hour
Power 24V DC, 1.0A (SMPS, four channel ISE)
Module Size 161 mm high x 65.5 mm wide x 98.6 mm deep
Reagent Pack Calibrant A, Calibrant B

includes
Other Reagents Cleaning Solution, Urine Diluents
Operating Ambient 15°C - 32°C

Temperature
15-5
15.3. ISE Measurement Theory

The electrolyte measurement system measures Sodium, Potassium, Lithium, and
Chloride ions in biological fluids using ion selective electrode technology. A
diagram of the electrode measurement system.
Figure 15-5. Schematic diagram for electrolyte measurement system

The flow-through electrodes use selective membrane tubing, specially formulated
to be sensitive to the respective ions. The potential of each electrode is measured
relative to a fixed, stable voltage established by the double junction Silver/Silver-
chloride reference electrode. An ion-selective electrode develops a voltage that
varies with the concentration of the ion to which it responds. The relationship
between the voltage developed and the concentration of the sensed ion is
logarithmic, as expressed by the Nernst equation:
RT log(C )
E  Eo 
nf
15-6
Where:
E = the potential of the electrode in sample solution
Eo = the potential developed under standard conditions
RT/nF = A temperature dependent “constant”, termed the slope
log = Base ten logarithm function
α = Activity coefficient of the measured ion in the solution
C = Concentration of the measured ion in the solution
15.4. Electrodes and Reagents Used

Electrodes used in the ISE module
The electrodes are maintenance-free and are warranted on a prorated basis for up
to 10,000 samples or 6 months, whichever occurs first Cleaning Solution, aspirated
from an operator designated sample cup, is used at least once a day at the end of
the day in order to minimize protein buildup in the fluid lines. A two-point calibration
of the ISE module is also done at least once a day at the beginning of the first
sample run. If the user is running more than 50 samples a day, cleaning and
calibration must be performed after completion of 50 samples.
The entire double-junction reference electrode is disposable. The reference
electrode is filled with sufficient KCl so that no filling solution must be added during
the lifetime of the electrode. The lifetime of the reference electrode is 6 months or
10,000 samples. No addition of internal filling solution is required for this electrode.
Electrodes require Calibrant A sampling at 30-minute intervals for reliable
operation, but this is completely controlled by the electrolyte measurement system
without any need for operator intervention.
It is not necessary to regulate the electrode housing temperature if its
environmental temperature does not exceed 32 degree C.
Reagents used in the ISE Module:
The sample is aspirated from a sample cup and dispensed into the sample port at
the top of the ISE module by the sample probe. The sample is then positioned in
front of the sensors using the double detector and the waste pump.
Four reagents are needed to operate the ISE module:
Calibrant A: Used as wash solution and single-point calibrator. Calibrant A is
pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant A pump and then positioned in front
of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each serum sample run and 100
µl is sufficient for each urine sample run.
15-7
Calibrant B: Used as the second point in two-point calibration. Calibrant B is

pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant B pump and then positioned in front
of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each urine sample run.
Cleaning Solution: It is used once a day to prevent protein buildup on the
electrodes and fluid path. It must be used more frequently if the ISE Module
performs greater than 50 sample measurements per day. 100 μL of cleaning
solution must be aspirated by the host analyzer from a sample cup on the host
analyzer and dispensed into the sample entry port. The sample cup must be
covered to eliminate evaporation.
Urine Diluent: This is required for urine samples. Urine samples must be diluted
by 10 times (1 part sample to 9 parts urine diluent) to perform urine measurement.
The operator must keep the urine diluent on the Reagent Tray.
15.5. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun

Urine ISE sample should be Re-run with different Dilution ratio (increase /
decrease Sample volume), based on the Result flags in the order of K, Na then Cl.
The ISE Urine sample is performed with 10X dilution during its first run. During
ISE-rerun, the 3X and 15X dilutions may be performed, depending upon the flag
attached to the result (based on increased or decreased sample volume).
On receiving the result, the test will go for rerun on the following conditions:
 If the sample result is attached with PANH flag, then sample will go for
rerun with normal dilution that is 1:9 (10X). If the sample result is
attached with RANGH flag, then the sample will go for rerun with
decreased sample volume that is 1:14 (15X) dilution.
 After receiving the result for the sample replicates, if both the replicates
are attached with different flag that is RANGH (requiring decrease rerun)
and RANGL (requiring increase rerun). But the priority of RANGH is
higher so this sample will go for a Re-run with decrease sample volume.
The number of replicates sent to Rerun will be the same as number of
replicates sent during the 1st (original) determination.
The software will display re-run result (after applying the
volume correction) for only those tests having flags that
required re-run. The Attach Rerun Flag (“#”) and Volume
Increase/ Volume Decrease Flag (“V-I”/ “V-D”) will be
displayed after correcting the results. Flags H, L, PANH,
PANL , RANGH and RANGL will be applicable to ISE results
15.6. Storage and Usage of the Reagents

1. Store all solutions in a dark and cool place at room temperature.
15-8
2. Don't preserve the reagents such as or cleaning solution once they are
dispensed to sample cup.
3. Don't use the expired solution.
4. When opening new bottle for a solution, don't mix remaining solution from
the previous bottle.
5. Reagent Pack has one month of on board stability.
15.7. Turning Off the Power

As Calibrant-A is automatically dispensed into ISE unit every 30 minutes to prevent
electrodes from drying out; it is not recommended to turn off the main power
supply of the analyzer. Switch off only the analyzer at the end of the day. This will
keep the above function activated.
When Calibrant-A remains in fluid path for over two hours without flowing, the Na
ion from reference electrode can reach Na electrode and saturate the membrane
resulting in effected Na measurement.
When the power to the analyzer needs to be turned off for a reason such as
maintenance, follow the procedure below to purge Calibrant-A solution in the path.
Also refer to the procedure when turning off the power for more than several hours,
as it requires storage of the electrodes.
15.8. Maintenance
15.8.1. Shutdown Procedure
15.8.1.1. Preparing the ISE Module for Storage
If the laboratory plans to store the ISE module for a period greater than one week,
during which the analyzer will not be connected to power, the following steps
should be performed:
Before removing the electrodes, they should be cleaned using the cleaning
solution and then running 3 Purge cycles from the Maintenance > ISE.
15.8.1.2. Reference, Na+ and Cl- Electrodes

1. Depress the compression plate and remove all electrodes, including the
reference electrode from the ISE module
2. Place the Na+ and Cl- electrodes into individual sealed bags
3. Reinsert the reference electrode flow path line with yellow flag, if available,
and then put into individual sealed bags.
15-9
15.8.1.3. K+ and Li+ Electrode

1. Aspirate a small volume of Calibrant A from the top port of the reagent
module into a syringe fitted with a blunt needle.
2. Inject sufficient Calibrant A into the lumen of the K+ and Li+ electrode until
fluid fills the lumen.
3. Cover both ends of the lumen (both sides of K+ and Li+ electrode) with
cellophane tape to hold the Calibrant A in place.
4. Insert the K+ and Li+ electrode into a sealed bag.
15.8.1.4. Reagent Pack

Remove the Reagent pack from the analyzer and discard it.
15.8.1.5. Analyzer Tubing

Remove all the fluidic tubing and thoroughly rinse with DI water.
15.8.1.6. Analyzer Re-activation

1. Remove all electrodes from sealed bags.
2. Remove cellophane tape from K+ and Li+ electrode.
3. If necessary, soak the reference electrode in warm water until the lumen of
the electrode has been cleared of salt build-up.
4. Place electrodes into the sensor module.
5. Place new reagent pack on analyzer.
6. Use Purge cycle to prime the calibrants.
7. Calibrate the analyzer.
15.9. ISE Calibration

It is mandatory to perform calibration (two points) before ISE measurement. It is
recommended to make it a routine operation to run calibration before running first
sample of the day.
One point calibration is automatically performed at each sample processing by
Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is used for two-point calibration.
The calibration is required at the following cases:
IMPORTANT:
 The power switch of analyzer is turned off.
 Eight hours have passed since the last ISE calibration.
15-10
 Environmental temperature has changed more than 4 degree C since the

last ISE calibration.
 More than 50 samples are processed after ISE Calibration in the morning.
15.9.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration

Before starting analysis of sample for electrolytes, user should first clean and
calibrate the ISE module.
The following sequence should be used for ISE unit calibration:
1. Install the Reagent Pack and connect it to the ISE module. If the Reagent
Pack is already in place, shake it gently.
2. Pour the Cleaning solution into the sample cup and place on the ISE2
position of the standard sample tray.
3. Go to the Maintenance from the main menu screen.
4. Click ISE ON button.
5. Select PURGE A and click START.
On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent
pack and dispenses it into the sample entry port to wash out the electrode
flow path. Repeat the procedure if required.
6. Select PURGE B and click START.
On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant B from the reagent
7. Select PURGE A and click START.
8. On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent
9. After completion of purge cycles, select CLEAN, and then click START. On
clicking, the analyzer dispenses 100 μl of cleaning solution and 180 μl of
Calibrant A in the sample entry port during the cleaning process.
10. After cleaning cycle is over, perform 6 to 8 PURGE A cycles. Now the
system is ready for calibration.
11. Select CALIBRATION and click START.
This command is used to calibrate the electrodes of the ISE Module. The
ISE Module then cycles Calibrant B and Calibrant A solutions in front of the
electrodes and measures the millivolt output of the electrodes for each of
the respective solutions.
15-11
These millivolt readings are then used to set up a relationship between

sample concentration and electrode millivolt output. The change in millivolts
per change in concentration is the slope of the electrode. The slope of the
electrodes is reported in mv/dec (millivolts per decade change in
concentration), and should be within the following limits:
Li+ 47-64 mV/dec
Na+ 52-64 mV/dec
K+ 52-64 mV/dec
Cl- 40-55 mV/dec
After the calibration process is completed, electrode calibration slopes are
displayed on the right side of screen. If any error occurs during the
calibration process, the error code is also displayed in the error message
grid. If the slopes are within range then a box with green color is displayed.
If slopes are out of range then a box with coral (deep pink) color is
displayed. The previous calibration details with date and time along with the
slope values can be viewed. To view them select CALIBRATION, and then
click SHOW REPORT.
If the electrode calibration slopes are in the acceptable range, the
electrolyte measurement system is ready for the sample analysis.
For Serum samples 70 μl and for Urine 140 μl (10 times diluted with urine
diluent) of sample is required for the Electrolyte measurement.
The slope is defined as:
Where CA = Calibrant A concentration in mmol/L

CB = Calibrant B concentration in mmol/L
EA = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant A solution in mV
EB = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant B solution in mV
12. To perform Pump Calibration, select PUMP CALIBRATION and click on
START.
175 μl of Calibrant A solution and 375 μl of Calibrant B solution are
dispensed in the sample port. Once the process is completed successfully,
values for all the 3 pumps CAL A, CAL B and Waste are displayed. If the
values are between 1500 and 3000, calibration is displayed OK with green
colored box else it is displayed NOK with red colored box.
15-12
13. To perform Bubble Calibration, select the option BUBBLE CALIBRATION and
click on START button. 75 μl of Calibrant A solution is dispensed in the
sample port. Bubble calibration allows the module to reestablish a baseline for
detecting air-liquid interface. It can be used as a diagnostic tool to see if the
bubble detector is functioning properly. If the process is successful without
any error it s displayed OK with green colored box else it is displayed NOK
with red colored box.
15.10. Maintenance Schedule

The Electrolyte Measurement System has been designed to require very little
operator maintenance. The only daily maintenance required is to run the Cleaning
Solution after the last sample of the day. All other parts and expendables are
replacement items (see schedule below).
Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (low volume user).
Pump Cassette : 9 months
Na+ Electrode : 6 months
K+ Electrode : 6 months
Cl- Electrode : 6 months
Li+ Electrode : 6 months
Reference Electrode : 6 months
Reagent : Refill reagent as required by testing needs
Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (greater than 100

samples/day
Pump Cassette : 6 months
Na+ Electrode : 10,000 samples
K+ Electrode : 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode : 10,000 samples
Li+ Electrodes : 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode : 10,000 samples
Reagent : Refill reagent as required by testing needs
15-13
15.11. Acceptable Calibration Ranges

The following are the acceptable calibration values displayed at the bottom of the
screen after completion of an ISE calibration.
Na+ :Slope 52 to 64 milli volt / Decade
K+ :Slope 52 to 64 milli volt / Decade
Cl- :Slope 40 to 55 milli volt / Decade
Li+ :Slope 47 to 64 milli volt / Decade
15.12. Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause Corrective actions
System does 1. No power

not respond
2. Communication failure Turn off power, reapply power.
3. RS232 cable is disconnected or Reconnect or replace cable.

damaged
4. ISE Module connector has been Replace board.

damaged
5. Component failure on board Replace board.
Low Slope Na+ 1. Misalignment of electrodes Remove electrodes. Inspect o-rings.

or K+ <52 Reassemble properly.
mV/decade Cl-
<40mV/decade, 2. Calibrator solutions Replace Reagent pack
Li+<47mV
mV/decade or 3. Electrode (low slope) Replace electrodes.
High Slope
Na+, 4. Air bubble on reference electrode Remove electrode, tap to dislodge
membrane bubble, replace, and recalibrate
K+, or Li+>64
mV/decade 5. Reference electrode Replace reference electrode and retest
Cl- >55
mV/decade 6. ISE Module or Fluid temperatures Change ISE Module location if ambient
0
exceed 32 C (high slope) temperature is too great.
Noise Error 1. Electrode. Replace problem electrode and

Flag Single recalibrate
electrode
2. Electrical noise spike from a) Find source of spike and eliminate.
environmental source b) Check grounding of ISE module.
3. Component failure on ISE Module Replace Board.

board
15-14
Noise Error 1. Reference Electrode Replace reference electrode and

Flag recalibrate
Multiple
electrodes 2. Electrical noise spike from a) Check for electrical noise coincident
environmental source with activation.
b) Check grounding of ISE Module
3. Component failure on ISE Module Replace board.

board.
Drift Error Flag 1. May occur when new electrode Purge Purge the Cal A and recalibrate the
Single the Calibrant A is installed. If the module.
Electrode electrode is new it may initially drift as it
rehydrates over the course of 15 minutes
2. Electrode Replace the electrode and recalibrate.
Drift Error Flag 1. May occur when new electrode or Purge the Calibrant A and recalibrate
Multiple reagent pack is installed on system. the ISE Module
Electrode
2. Reference electrode Replace reference electrode and
recalibrate
3. Electrical spikes from environmental a) Find source of spike and eliminate

source b) Check the grounding of ISE Module.
4. Component failure on ISE Module Replace the board

board
Air in Sample 1. Insufficient sample pipetted into the Host instrument must deliver 70µl.
ISE Module sample entry port. Increase dispensed sample volume.
2. Fluid leaks. Determine source of leak and resolve
3. Sample not positioned properly. a) Electrode not seated properly.

Remove electrode. Inspect o-rings and
reassemble.
b) Replace pump tubing.
4. Pump tubing obstructed. Replace pump tubing.
4. Bubble in sample. Host must deliver sample free of

bubbles.
Air in Sample 1. Cal B and Cal A are segmented with a) Electrodes are not properly seated
and Cal A air or compressed. Check compression
plate, spring and seal. Remove and
reassemble electrodes.
15-15
2. Fibrin or salt is plugging the electrode a) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
flow path. b) Remove electrode and clean or
replace electrode with plugged flow
path. Reinstall electrodes and
recalibrate.
3. Bubble detector is malfunctioning Replace bubble detector.
4. Waste pump is malfunctioning Replace Waste Pump.
5. Dirty sample cup Clean with cotton swab and DI water.
Air in Cal B and 1. Cal B and Cal A are segmented with a) Electrodes are properly seated.
Air in Cal A air Check compression plate, spring and
seal.
b) Ensure that all electrodes and o-
rings are properly installed.
c) Ensure tubing between reagent pack
and sample entry port is connected
properly.
d) Replace tubing between reagent
pack and sample entry port.
e) Reagent low or out.
f) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
2. Fibrin or salt is plugging the electrode a) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
flow path. b) Remove electrodes and clean or
replace electrode with plugged flow
path. Reinstall electrodes and
recalibrate.
3. Bubble detector is malfunctioning Replace bubble detector.
4. Waste pump is malfunctioning Replace waste pump
5. Bubble detector malfunction Replace bubble detector
Air in Cal A 1. Calibrant A Replace reagent pack with new one,

prime and recalibrate
2. Tubing from reagent module is Reconnect or replace tubing.

disconnected, plugged or crimped
3. Calibrant A pump is not working a) Check electrical connections.

properly b) Replace pump tubing
c) Replace motor
d) Replace pump.
15-16
15.13. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack

The MultiXL application automatically detects the newly installed ISE reagent pack
if it is replaced or installed. For detection of new ISE reagent pack, follow the pre-
requisites.
MultiXL software with ISE Reagent Pack Inventory feature with the New ISE
Reagent Pack. For existing partially utilized pack, the inventory will not be correct.
Software is using a counter to calculate ISE inventory. Any manipulation,
like releasing and attaching the reagent pack connector, will falsify the
inventory.
ISE Reagent Pack from one analyzer should not be interchanged with Pack on
other analyzer. In such event, the inventory will not be correct.
ISE Module should be always ON (for periodic sip cycles).
Follow this procedure for installing the new reagent pack:
Connect the new Reagent Pack on the analyzer.
Click on ISE ON button in the Maintenance screen. The software will
automatically detects the new pack and perform some series of ISE maintenance
commands automatically till ISE module sends OK status (air removed), The
following maintenance commands are
PURGE A and PURGE B maximum up to 10 times
PRIME A and PRIME B up to 9 times
During this operation, the following error message may be displayed on the error
grid:
Air in Calibrant A. ISE tubing may be bent, closed or not attached or
Air in Calibrant B. ISE tubing may be bent, closed or not attached.
15-17
This will help the user in detection of bended or closed tubing. In this case, correct
the closed or bent tubing and again perform the PRIME A and PRIME B
commands manually through the Maintenance > ISE MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS. See figure below.
Once the auto priming operation performed correctly, the lot number and expiry
date of the new reagent pack will be displayed on the Lot No. and Expiry Date
information along with the following details:
ISE Pack Installation Date
Distributor code (This information is stored in the reagent pack’s Dallas chip and
not visible to user.)
Volume of Cal A and Cal B in full Pack.
The above information can be checked through ISE Pack button available on the
Status Monitor screen. See section 13.15.4.1 Checking ISE Pack Details for more
information.
Perform Calibration with the new reagent pack and check the values.
On detecting (and registering) new ISE Reagent Pack, Backup of ISE inventory
data of earlier Reagent Pack will be taken by the system on the analyzer PC.
15-18
15.14. Error Message for ISE Unit

The following error codes with description will be displayed on the Maintenance
error grid, if any error occurred during the ISE operation.
Assembly Error Code Description Possible Corrective Actions
Failure
ISE ID ISE Pack - Installation Reagent Change ISE Pack
Date Mismatch. pack
Inventory may not be expired or
Correct invalid
ISE IE ISE Pack - Expired -- Change ISE Pack
ISE IL ISE Reagent Pack Required Change ISE Pack
Volume Low (Less volume
than 10% of Total insufficient
Volume)
ISE IN ISE Pack - No Dallas Dallas chip Ensure reagent
Chip absent connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
ISE IR ISE Pack - Dallas Dallas chip --
Read Error absent
ISE IT ISE Pack - Time Out Dallas chip 1. Check ISE module
Occurred absent connection
2. Ensure reagent
connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
ISE IU ISE Pack - Unknown -- Change ISE Pack
Distributor
ISE IV ISE Reagent Pack Required Change ISE Pack
Volume Very Low volume
(Less than 3 Days insufficient
Sip)
ISE IW ISE Pack - Dallas No Dallas Ensure reagent
Write Error chip, date connector properly
already connected on Dallas
written chip
ISE ISES* Air in Sample / Urine 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
volume 2. Ensure proper tubing
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEA* Air in Calibrant A 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEB* Air in Calibrant B 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
15-19

insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEC* Air in Cleaner 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEM* Air in Segment 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEP* Pump Cal 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
3. Check motor wiring
2. Tubing
leakage 4. Change motor
3. Motor
problem
ISE ISEF* No Flow 1. Motor 1. Check motor wiring
problem 2. Change motor
2. Tube 3. Replace Tubing
choked/bent
ISE ISED* Bubble Detector 1. Bubble Change ISE Module
Detector
module
problem
ISE ISER* Dallas Read 1. Dallas Change ISE Pack

chip absent
2. Dallas
chip
connection
improper
ISE ISEW* Dallas Write No Dallas Ensure reagent
chip, date connector properly
already connected on Dallas
written chip
ISE ISET* Time Out Dallas chip 1. Check ISE module
absent connection
2. Ensure reagent
connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
15-20
15-21
16. Preventive Maintenance

This section provides the necessary and minimal maintenance procedures in order
to ensure that the analyzer operates correctly and provides the accurate
measurement results.
It is always recommended that the instrument is maintained by the
user with proper instructions from the service personal to get the
optimum output and to avoid any possible damage to the analyzer.
16.1. Servicing a Customer Site

procedure.



in this manual.

16.1.1. Verifying Proper Room Temperature

Measure the room temperature at different corners of the Laboratory, the
recommended temperature is 15 to 30 degrees Celsius.
There should not be a variation of more than 5 degrees in Room temperature per
hour.
16-1
16.1.2. Verifying Line Voltage

With the help of a Voltmeter Measure the following AC Voltages to the instrument.
Test points : Expected voltages
Phase and Neutral : 220 Volts
Phase and Ground : 220 Volts
Neutral and Ground : Not more than 5 Volts
16.1.3. Verifying Proper Grounding

Place the analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0) position and
disconnect all line chords.
With the help of an Ohm meter measure the continuity between all the ground
points.
Place one end of the probe on the AC input ground terminal and the other on the
upper chassis of the instrument it should ideally be zero ohms, repeat the same for
the lower half of the instrument.
16.1.4. Verifying Proper Ventilation

Make sure there is at least 0.5 meters of space between the wall and the
instrument on all three sides, to enable proper ventilation. There should not be any
Stationary items or objects in the vicinity that hinder proper access to the analyzer.
There should not be a direct draft of air from the air-conditioning system on to the
analyzer.
16.1.5. Verifying External Interferences

Heavy-duty electrical devices like Air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens, centrifuges
etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the Analyzer or in the
close vicinity of the analyzer.
The room should be free of any vibrations from heavy-duty devices like
Centrifuges and Compressors.
The room should be free from strong magnetic fields caused by other medical
equipment, like CT Scans, MRI etc.
16.1.6. Verifying Proper Room Lighting

There should be sufficient room lighting to enable efficient operator use and clear
visible access to the internal components of the instrument during servicing.
16-2
16.1.7. Verifying Proper Laboratory Cleanliness (Practice)

The instrument and the surrounding area should be maintained clean and regularly
decontaminated to prevent contaminating yourself and others.
There should be no spillage of Serum, Reagents, Waste or DI water.
Make sure that no Reagents or Samples are placed on top of the analyzer or
trolley as they could spill causing a permanent damage to the analyzer.
16.1.8. Maintaining an Error Log Book

Maintain a log book at the customer site every visit and error reported with the date
should be entered make sure that this book is updated after performing the
maintenance.
16-3
17. Replacement and Alignment Procedure

procedure.



in this manual.

This section explains the replacement of the following:
 Fuse Replacement
 Lamp Replacement
 Sample, Reagent 1 And Reagent 2 Probe Replacement
 Sample, Reagent 1 And Reagent 2 Syringe Replacement
17.1. Fuse Replacement-Mains 220V AC


PCB).
17-1

with LMPS pcb
assy OR
NA with 12V/5A
SMPS OR
Use 2A SB fuse
with 12V/6A SMPS
F8 To motors (TX 2 CN2). 24 V AC 6.3 A FB
ISE OR
NA for 4CH ISE
F14 Primary of mains TX 1. 220 V AC 3.5 A SB
F16 5 V SMPS. 220 V AC 1.25 A FB
Loadcell
NA (with Float
Sensor)
17.2. Fuse Replacement – Mains 110V AC


PCB).
with LMPS pcb
assy OR
NA with 12V/5A
SMPS
17-2

F8 To motors (TX 2 CN2). 24 V AC 6.3 A SB

ISE OR
NA for 4CH ISE
F14 Primary of mains TX 1. 220 V AC 5 A SB
F16 5 V SMPS. 220 V AC 1.25 A FB
Loadcell
NA (with Float
Sensor)
17.3. Lamp Replacement

The photometer lamp replacement should be done by well trained
authorized person only.
1. Turn off the analyzer. Allow the lamp to cool down.

2. Remove RCT cover
3. Remove cuvette numbering plate by unscrewing the nuts.
Remove nuts
by rotating
anticlockwise.
17-3
4. Open RCT Tray cover.
5. Rotate RCT table & loosen Lamp terminals.
Rotate RCT table window

to view proper lamp
terminals. Loosen the
lamp terminals.
6. Loosen lamp fixing grub screw using Allen key of size 1.5
Allen Key
Grub screw
17-4
7. Remove the lamp.
8. Take new halogen lamp and clean it properly to avoid any finger
impressions. Place halogen lamp gently & tighten the grub screw.
9. Fix lamp connection & tighten backlit lamp terminals.

10. Fix the cuvette numbering plate.
11. Ensure Alignment of RCT & laundry unit, before switching on machine.
Switch ON the analyzer & check the photometer beam.
The photometer lamp replacement should be done by well trained
authorized person only.
17.4. Probe Replacement

1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. To open the probe cover, grip the probe cover by its sides and remove by lifting
it vertically upwards.
3. Disconnect the LLS input connector.
4. Disconnect the Teflon tubing that is connected to the probe by sliding it out.
5. Rotate and unscrew the white plastic holder that holds the probe in place.
17-5
Do not remove the OPTO connector. Gently slide out the

probe in upwards direction.
6. Slide in the new probe and make sure that the metallic flag slides into the
OPTO coupler. Rotate and tighten the white plastic holder that holds the probe
in place. Reconnect the LLS connector and slide in the Teflon tubing onto the
probe.
The Teflon tube must fit tightly onto the probe, if not, cut off the
flared end of the Teflon tube and refit it firmly.
17.5. Sample, Reagent 1, and Reagent 2 Syringe

Replacement Procedure
1. Switch off the analyzer. Wait for some time so that the pressure in pressure
tank drops to zero.
2. Locate the three dilutor syringes by removing the front panel of the instrument
and choose the appropriate syringe to be removed or replaced.
17-6
3. Now grip the Diba connector with your right hand, and rotate it in
anticlockwise to loosen the tube connection.
4. Similarly, loosen the black connector.

5. Disconnect the SYR UP/DOWN Molex connector as shown in figure below.
6. Disconnect the connector as shown below.
17-7
7. With the help of Allen key or screw driver, loosen the screw located on the
right side of the syringe assembly as shown below.
8. Loose the screw located on the left side of the syringe assembly as shown
in figure below.
9. Gently pull out the assembly from the resting plate by your hands.
10. Replace with new syringe assembly and place all the tubing’s back in place.
17.6. RGT Temperature Calibration Procedure
The following parameters can be controlled by the RGT unit:

 Set point of the controller for compressor 1 and compressor 2
 Heating or cooling function.
 Maximum high temperature limit and alarm.
 Minimum low temperature limit and alarm.
 Differential (Hysteresis)
17-8
 Probe calibration.
 Time delay (relay restart after cutoff)
 Keypad lock.
 Relay status on probe failure.
 Restore factory defaults.
 End Programming and keypad functions.
Follow these instructions to set the parameters for compressor 1 and compressor
2:
1. Turn on the analyzer.
2. To change the set point of compressor 1, press SET key for two seconds
and then release.
3. Display will show C1 (channel 1) and flashes.
4. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and
down key.
5. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory.
6. Once the temperature is set, you will see “—“which confirms that the
temperature has stored in the memory.
7. To change the set point of compressor 2, press SET key for two seconds
and then release.
8. Display will show C1 (Channel 1) and flashes. Use up and down key to
change C1 to C2 (Channel 2).
9. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and
down key.
10. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory.
11. To end the temperature setting mode, press SET key.
12. Once the set key is pressed, the controller goes to the normal mode and
displays the temperature. The set points will be recorded in the memory.
13. Refer the following instructions for more details.
17-9
Press & Hold

"SET" Key for 2
sec. & release.
Display will show
C1 for channel 1 &
Flash
CH1 - For Cooling.

With the help of
Arrow key, Set
"SET" temp. to 10
Deg. as Set Point
for control action &
to save in to
memory press
"SET Key".
Display will show
“---" as an
indication of
parameter saving
in to the memory.
17-10
CH2 - For
Heating. With the
help of Arrow key,
Set "SET" temp. to
37 Deg. as a Set
Point for control
action & to save in
to memory , Press
"SET key" to save.
Display will show
"--- "as an
indication of
parameter saving
in to memory.
EP to End of
Program for SET
point of CH1,
CH2.
Follow these instructions to set the other parameters.

1. Press PRG key for two seconds and then release.
2. Display will show P1 and flashes.
3. Use up and down key to change the appropriate parameter, and press SET
key to confirm.
4. Again use up and down key to change the appropriate channel (C1 or C2),
and press SET key to set the range.
5. Set the appropriate range, and the press SET to save the settings.
6. Refer the following instructions for more details.
17-11
Press & Hold

"PRG" key for
2 second. The
display will
show P1 for
channel 1
parameter
setting.
P1 value for
CH1 - 0: For
Cooling to be
selected by
UP/DN Key
P1 Value for
CH2 - 1 For
heating to be
selected by
UP/DN Key.
17-12
Press SET
Key to change
Parameter P2
-CH1 -
Maximum
Temperature.
to be set to 12
Deg. with the
help of UP/DN
Key. CH2 -
Max. Temp. to
be set to 40
Deg. with the
help of UP/DN
Key. to
indicate Error
as "Ht"
Press SET
Key to change
Parameter P3
- CH1 - Min.
temp. to be
set to 4 Deg.
with the help
of UP/DN Key.
CH2 - Min.
Temp. to be
set to 34 Deg.
with the help
of UP/DN Key
to indicate
Error as "Lt".
17-13
Press SET Key

to change
Parameter P2 -
CH1 -
Differential
temperature. set
to 4 Deg. to
restart control
action on 12
Deg. wrt. Set
Temp. 4 Deg .
CH2 -
Differential
temperature to
be set to 3 Deg.
to restart control
action on 36
Deg. with the
help of UP/DN
Key wrt. Set
temp. 37 Deg.
CH1: 0
CH2: 0
17-14
Select P6 &
Press SET
key to change
parameter.
With the help
of UP/DN Key
set CH1 to 1
minute.
CH2 to 1
minute.
To Lock
parameter
setting, Select
LP & Press
SET key after
LP function
with the help
of UP/DN Key
To Unlock
Keypad Select
"0".
To Lock
Keypad select
"1".
17-15
To Set relay
status after
Probe failure,
Select E1
function &
press "SET"
Key.
CH1 - With the
help of UP/DN
Key Set to "1"
to make relay
duty cycle of
10 min. ON &
4 minutes
OFF.
CH2 - With the
help of UP/DN
key set to "1"
to make relay
duty cycle of
10 min. ON &
4 minutes
OFF.
Select EP &
Press SET to
exit from
Programming
mode.
17-16
Press & Hold

"Auto" key to
select Auto
mode.
Respective
channel will
display
temperature in
scanning
mode.
17.7. Alignment Procedure for RGT Barcode (Canmax)

1. Mount the barcode scanner bracket on the base.
2. Fix the barcode scanner to clamp holder.
3. Fix the clamp holder screw.
4. Align the barcode scanner mounting bracket at distance initially to 60 mm
between scanner & outer bottle.
5. Go to service check and initialize the reagent tray.
6. Ensure the distance between the scanner and outer bottle is 60 mm to 70
mm.
7. Go to Service Check>RGT Tray>click on ”ON” to give the RGT barcode
beam ON command. Place barcoded bottle at position 35 in RGT tray.
Mount the barcode reader such that the beam falls on the left corner (i.e.
3mm approx from the center) of the barcoded sticker of inner bottle of
position 35 of the RGT tray. Barcoded bottle position 35 will be facing the
barcode scanner. The beam will go ON and remain ON if the barcode
scanner is not able to read the barcode. If alignment done proper i.e. if the
barcode scanner is able to read barcoded bottle properly, the beam should
go ON and OFF with beeping sound.
8. Maintain the distance of 60 mm to 70 mm, such that the scanner Beam
goes OFF with beep and continues ON –OFF followed by Beep.
9. Place the inner bottles, run the barcode scan in service check.
10. Now remove inner bottles and place the outer bottle and again run the
barcode scan.
17-17
11. Finally place all barcode and confirm that both inner and outer barcode are
read consistently
17-18
17.8. BAFO setting for Low Speed Procedure

1. Select My Computer, click on Prosperities
2. From System properties select Hardware & click on Device Manager
3. Screen will displays the list of devices

4. Double click on Ports (COM & LPT), screen displays list of ports.
5. Select Prolific USB-to-serial Comm. Port and right click to Properties
17-19
6. Select Port Settings and click on Advanced
7. On Advanced setting screen, move the green bar for Receive Buffer
& Transmit Buffer to lower side & Press Ok
17-20
Move to lower side
17-21
18. Pressure Settings

The digital pressure indicator is used to adjust the tank pressure.
18.1. Digital Pressure Indicator
18.2. Access for Different Settings
18-1
18.3. HL/LO Pressure Setting Procedure
1. Connect the digital pressure module connector on the Base Board 2 PCB
“PRE SENSOR”. Connector > Insert tubing > Turn on machine.
2. Press increase push button more than 3 to 4 seconds.

3. Set pressure upper level P1 = 1.20 (Use up/DN key for increase or
decrease pressure) Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter
P2.
4. Set pressure level lower P2 = 0.80 (Use up/DN key for increase or decrease
pressure) after 4 to 5 seconds the display will come in normal mode.
18-2
18.4. Mode Configuration
Set the basic pressure switch settings as mentioned below

1. Press MODE KEY for 3 sec.
2. Digital pressure indicator in the configuration mode select
a. Pressure unit. = bar.
18-3
Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter.

b. Detection mode (General purpose) = F-1.
c. Operating mode (Standard) = std.
d. Control output = no.
e. Zero shift input = in.
f. Chatter prevention, set response time. = 5 (msec).
g. Display color (When pressure within limit Green and when out of limit
red.) = rGr.
h. Power mode (Standard) = nor.
i. After above setting press Mode key Module will display the present
pressure.
To Lock key pad to avoid changes in Parameter Setting > Press and hold either
UP or DN key at least 3 seconds while pressing Mode key will lock the key pad
and wait till LOC display to flash. The same key combination will deactivate the
Key lock feature.
18.5. Error Check during Run

1. Adjust the pressure with help of pinch valve.> Increase pressure above 1.20
bar. Color of reading on pressure display turns from Green to Red above
1.20 bar.
2. Adjust pressure at 1 bar. Color of pressure display changes from Red to
Green below 1.15 bar pressure. (Green color from 0.80 to 1.20bar).
3. During run decrease pressure from .9 bar to .5 bar. When pressure goes
below 0.80 bars on application screen error appeared “Check pressure
level” and sampling get paused.
4. Increase pressure from 0.50 to 0.90 bars. When pressure goes above 0.85
bar Error message get disappeared from application screen and sampling
get start for remaining schedule.
18-4
5. During run increase the pressure from 0.90 bars to 1.25. When pressure
goes up above the 1.20 bar, the pressure error displayed on application
screen and pressure indicator color change from green to red.
6. When pressure decreases below 1.15 bar indicator color change from red to
green and error message get disappeared from application screen and start
sampling again for pending schedule paused.
Pressure
Regulator
Figure 18-1. Pressure regulator mounting location
OR
18-5
18.6. Programming Procedure: Pressure Sensor

Panasonic DP 102
Operating Procedure as mentioned below.
18-6
18-7
18-8
For Pressure HI/LO

setting
Sr.no Action
Press mode selection key

1
Set P1=1.2 BAR by
increase /decrease push
2 button
Set P2=0.6 BAR by
increase /decrease push
3 button
18-9
18-10
18-11
18-12
18-13
19. Troubleshooting
The following list is an extension of the troubleshooting section outlined in the
operator's manual. The reader should familiarize with the set-up, operation and
troubleshooting sections of the operators manual before attempting to service the
unit.
This section deals with the following problems and their recommended solutions.
 RESULTS
 OPTICAL SYSTEM
 INITIALISATION ERROR
 SAMPLE ARM SYSTEM
 REAGENT 1 ARM SYSTEM
 REAGENT 2 ARM SYSTEM
 CUVETTE RINSING UNIT
 SAMPLE TRANSPORT
 REAGENT TRANSPORT
 REACTION TRANSPORT
 HYDRAULICS SYSTEM
 STIRRER SYSTEM
 BARCODE SYSTEM
It is very important while diagnosing problem to look at the non
instrumental aspects of troubleshooting. This will save time and
efforts for reaching to the correct solution.
19-1
Please ensure the following before opening the instrument.

1. The quality of reagents and samples used is good.
2. There are no voltage fluctuation or stabilization problems in mains
voltage.
3. There are no operator level problems.
4. Quality of consumable for e.g. test tubes, pipettes, pipette tips,
tissue papers is satisfactory.
5. While re-programming new /old tests for instrument, ensure the
parameters entered are as per the reagents brands used.
6. There are no environmental problems
 Results
 Results obtained are zero or negative Item Description
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Check the Reaction direction entry in Correct the Reaction direction entry if it is wrongly
parameter entered
b) Check factor for kinetic test in as per Correct the factor (negative or positive) as per the
calibration menu reaction direction for kinetic test.
c) Improper dispense of sample Refer 8.8 below
 Instrument reports High results

CHECK DESCRIPTION
Check the calibration data and calibration Recalibrate using a fresh standard and crosscheck
curve results using a Control
 Optical System
 Instrument indicates lamp break down
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Cuvette blank higher than 0.8 Give additional cuvette rinsing in order to clean cuvettes
If problem persists, carry out external cleaning
b) Lamp fused Replace the lamp
c) Supply to the lamp not available Check Power supply PCB board, if faulty replace it.
 Initialization Error
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Check communication Check the computer to machine interface and also
check the interface cable.
b) Assembly getting stuck in initialization Remove the obstruction and free the assembly manually
process after turning the instrument off and bring the same to
home position. Reinitialize the instrument
19-2
Refer to the error code displayed and check particular sub

assembly for detailed operation.
 Sample Arm System

 Sample Probe Not Sensing Sample
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Contaminated Probe Clean only the Tip of the Probe to remove the
contamination
b) Loose contact Refasten Connectors & check the probe for sensing
sample & Reagent.
c) Improper grounding Check the grounding of instrument top plate
d) Faulty Liquid Level Sensing PCB Replace the Liquid Level Sensing PCB
 Sample arm tries to go up continuously

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Loosely fitted belt Tighten the belt
b) Dirty UP position sensor Clean the sensor
c) Defective UP position sensor Replace the sensor
 Improper dispense of sample volume

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Sampling pipette does not reach up to the Check and realign the sampling pipette mechanical
cuvette movements.
b) Linked or clogged aspiration tubing. Change the tube with new one
c) Leaking sample aspiration pump Replace the leaky pump
d) Leakage in the aspiration tube Fix the tube properly or Replace the aspiration tube
e) Blocked sampling pipette Remove the block or Replace the pipette
 Sample arm gives error (time over) while in horizontal movement

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Mis-aligned horizontal sensors Align sensors properly
b) Mechanical obstruction Clean / grease the mechanical movements
 Reagent 1 arm System

 Reagent 1 Probe Not Sensing Sample
CHECK DESCRIPTION
contamination
sample & Reagent.
19-3
 Reagent 1 arm tries to go up continuously

CHECK DESCRIPTION
 Improper dispense of Reagent 1 volume

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Reagent 1 pipette does not reach up to the Check and realign the sampling pipette mechanical
cuvette movements.
 Reagent 1 gives error (time over) while in horizontal movement

CHECK DESCRIPTION
 Reagent 2 arm System

 Reagent 2 Not Sensing Sample
CHECK DESCRIPTION
contamination
sample & Reagent.
 Reagent 2 tries to go up continuously

CHECK DESCRIPTION
 Improper dispense of Reagent 2 volume

CHECK DESCRIPTION
19-4
a) Reagent 2 pipette does not reach up to the Check and realign the sampling pipette mechanical
cuvette movements.
 Reagent 2 gives error (time over) while in horizontal movement

CHECK DESCRIPTION
 Cuvette Rinsing Unit System

 Cuvette Rinsing Unit tries to go up continuously
CHECK DESCRIPTION
 Cuvette Rinsing Unit gives error (time over) while in horizontal

movement
CHECK DESCRIPTION
 No. of Dirty Cuvettes is very high

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Dirty Cuvettes Remove dirty cuvette and clean it form in side as well as
outside.
 Sample Transport
 Sample tray not initializing
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Misaligned sensors Align sensor
b) Faulty sensor Replace sensor
c) Faulty SEN3 PCB Replace SEN3 PCB
 Sample Probe Not Sensing Sample

CHECK DESCRIPTION
19-5
contamination
sample & Reagent.
 Reagent Transport
 Reagent tray not initializing
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Mis-aligned sensors Align sensor
 Reagent table not cooling

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Poor contact .Refasten the Reagent table cools down only to
connectors b) Room temperature very 15ºC20ºC below room temperature
high
c) Defective temperature sensor Replace the temperature sensor
d) Defective peltier device Replace the peltier device
 Reaction Transport
 Reaction tray not initializing
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Mis-aligned sensors Align sensor

 Reaction tray attaining set temperature

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Poorly set factors Set the factors properly

b) Bad contact Refasten connector
c) Defective temperature sensor Replace the temperature sensor
 Hydraulics System
 Suck Pump not Functional or no Aspiration from cuvettes
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) No Power Supply. Check the supply to the Pump.
b) Obstruction in inlet Clean and remove the obstruction.
19-6
c) Faulty Pump Replace Pump.
 Stirrer System
 Not coming back to the normal 'Home' position
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Mechanical obstruction Remove the obstruction and free the assembly manually
after turning the instrument off and bring the same to
home position. Reinitialize the instrument
sample & Reagent
 Stirrer Very Loose

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Stirrer motor loosely fitted Re-fix the stirrer motor
 Stirrer not rotating properly

CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Stirring rod bent Straighten the stirring rod
b) Stirring rod not aligned properly Realign the stirring rod.
c) Stirrer motor defective Replace the stirrer motor.
 Barcode System
CHECK DESCRIPTION
a) Poor quality of barcode sticker Use good quality barcode stickers
b) Dirty barcode sensor Clean the barcode sensor
c) Poorly adjusted sample barcode sensitivity Adjust the sample barcode sensitivity Properly.
For ordering the replacement assemblies, please refer to

section17: Accessories, Spares & Consumable shortlist. For
ordering individual replacement parts refer to Volume2 of the
Service Manual.
19-7
19.1. Troubleshooting Guide

SR. Cause Corrective action
No
1 LLS/LLD Sensing 1. Check the earthing Rectify the earthing.
failure. voltage, it should be
less than +5V.
2. Clean the probe- Internally clean with cleaning
internally and solution and DI water.
externally. Externally with Menthyl
alcohol. Scrape lightly with
sand paper.
3. Check the connections Check the wires crimping is
on LLS PCB proper. Tighten them if
connectors wires at the loose.
crimping Recrimp the wires.
4. Check the connection Resolder the wire.
of Black wire connected
to probe.
5. Check the voltage Check the LLS cable.
between –black & blue Replace the cable if broken.
and black & green wire,
it should be approx
4.25V when probe in air
(black wire-
ground).When dipped
in water voltages on
blue & green wire
taking black wire as
ground should be near
to 0V.
6. Check the voltage +5V Check the cable, replace if
between – Red and broken.
Black, voltage -5V Check the +/- 5V on Power
between brown and Supply PCB
black on LLS PCB .
Check the continuity of
LLS wires.
7. Check the voltage +/- Check the cable continuity
5V on Interface pcb on LLS PCB.
connector J26. Replace the cable if it faulty.
8. Check the +/- 5V at the If +/- 5V supply not present
power supply Pcb. on the power supply pcb
replace the pcb.
9. Check the continuity of Resolder the blue and green
FRC cable from IF PCB wire on LLS PCB.
to Arm Assy. Replace the cable.
10. Check the Robo PCB. Check the +/-5V on IF PCB
Replace the PCB if faulty.
19-8
11. Check the carbon Remove the carbon

formation at ball deposits.
bearing of ASP hub.
12. Check the ASP Clean the wire contacts or
earthing of ASP with replace slip ring or base
chassis plate.
13. If +/- 5V coming to LLS Replace the LLS pcb
pcb and all other things
are O.K.
14. .Check continuity of Replace the cable if faulty.
wire cable coming
through the shaft.
2 Autospan Failure. 1. Give the Cuvette Rinse
and then give Auto
Span again to check
the gains.
2. Clean the 1 no. cuvette Replace cuvette if scratches
and then give auto seen.
span again & check.
3. Check the water levels Adjust the level if less than

in the cuvettes. half, and then adjust with the
help of pinch valve.
4. Cuvette overflowing. Check the external tubing for
bent or kept under can.
Check the vacuum pump &
biohazardous pump for
suction & detergent pump
for dispensing detergent
Also check for tubing
blockages and clean
blockages in probe,
manifold, or tubings if
required, or replace if faulty.
5. Check the lamp. Replace if faulty
6. Check Lamp Voltage If fluctuating check for loose
should be 11.8V and contacts of nuts below
not fluctuating. thumb screw or thumb screw
is loose, tighten them.
7. Lamp voltage Check for loose contact of

fluctuating from SMPS. nuts below the thumb screw.
Check the Capacitor at the
SMPS replace if faulty
tighten the screws if loose.
Or Replace SMPS if no
voltage found at terminals.
8. Check the lamp cooling Clean the tubing if blocked
path. or nozzles if blocked.
Replace if broken.
19-9
9. Check for particular Clean the filter or replace

filter showing in red. the filter.
10. Clean the lense & heat Replace heat filter or lense if
filter faulty.
11. Check for alignment of Align to be properly focused
lamp. on the photometer.
12. Check photometer Replace if faulty.
3 Cell Blank error 1. Give cuvette rinse and Clean the cuvettes
then give auto span manually.
again to check the
gains.
2. Clean the 1 no. cuvette Replace cuvette if scratches
and then give auto seen.
span again & check.
3. Check the water levels Adjust the level if less than
in the cuvettes half, and then adjust with the
help of pinch valve.
4. Cuvette overflowing Check the external tubing for
bent or kept under can.
Check the vacuum pump &
biohazardous pump for
suction & detergent pump
for dispensing detergent
Also check for tubing
blockages and clean
blockages in probe,
manifold, or tubings if
required, or replace if faulty.
5. Check the lamp Replace if faulty.
6. Check Lamp Voltage If fluctuating check for loose

should be 11.8V and contacts of nuts below
not fluctuating. thumb screw or thumb screw
is loose, tighten them.
7. Lamp voltage Check the Capacitors at the
fluctuating from SMPS. SMPS replace if faulty
tighten the screws if loose.
Or Replace SPMS if no
voltage found at terminals.
8. Check the lamp cooling Clean the tubing if blocked
path. or nozzles if blocked.
Replace if broken.
9. Check for particular Clean the filter or replace
filter showing in red. the filter.
10. Clean the lense & heat Replace heat filter or lense if
filter. faulty.
11. Check for alignment of Align to be properly focused
lamp on the photometer.
12. Check the photometer Replace the photometer if
faulty.
19-10
4 RCT Rotational Error 1. Check the home and Clean the opto's for dust.
position opto's. At
Home Position the
home opto is off and
position opto should be
ON
2. Check the interrupter Clean it for dust
3. Check the position opto The home opto if off in home

and Home opto position then after 6-7
alignment pulses it should be on. The
position opto should be off
after 7-8 pulses ie 1 pulse
after the home opto lights.
4. Check for faulty optos Replace the home or
position opto if faulty and
ensure its alignment
5. Check for the belt If found very loose then can
tension be tighten the tension such
that the motor is rotating
smoothly and then check the
opto setting by giving pulses
6. Check for 5V of the Check wire continuity or
opto. then change the cables or
5V SMPS.
7. Check if drier probe or Remove the drier chip & run
any other probe of cuvette rinse & check.
laundry is obstructing Align the probe if touching to
the RCT movement. the cuvette.
8. Check the RCT motor Replace if jammed or faulty.
9. Check base plate Replace if faulty
10. Check for loose Reconnect the cables

connections or loose properly or tighten the
crimping of wires. crimping
11. Check 33V at Replace FWR nor check
Backplane pcb at the wire
driver IC output
12. Check 33V from the Replace if faulty.
FWR.
13. Check the 26.5 V to the Rectify accordingly.
FWR from the TX.
14. Check the transformer Replace if faulty.
5 Low Pressure Error 1. Check the 25µ filter in Replace if dirty

the DI water can
2. Check tubing Tighten the tube connection
connection of Di water or replace the tube.
& lamp cooling nozzle
is proper & not
interchanged. Check
for loosely connected
19-11
tubing or leakage or cut

in DI water tube.
3. Check the Di water Clean the head or replace if
pump faulty
4. Check for leakage from Clean it or replace if faulty
the damper
5. Check for breakage of Replace if broken or cut
nozzles of pressure
tank, leakage in
tubings.
6. Leakage from Pressure Rectify or replace the
tank pressure tank.
7. Check for water in the Dry the tube & digital
tubing of digital pressure regulator and refix
pressure regulator the tubing.
8. Check digital pressure Do the proper settings if
indicator setting P1=1.2 different.
bar & P2=0.6
9. Check the pressure If someone turned it
regulator & its anticlockwise then set it
adjustment. right. Replace if faulty.
6 Analyzer not 1. Check the USB Refix the cable or check with
responding or communication cable printer cable.
communication error. for loose connection or
breakage.
2. Check the port settings Correct them.
on the computer.
3. Check the USB driver Reload USB driver.
setting. (No yellow ?)on
the port
4. Check the setting in the Change and correct them if
ASW should be the different.
same in setting &
service check
menu.(Should be the
same as the port on the
computer usually)
5. Check the 5V to the Refix if loose & replace
USB pcb & continuity of cable if faulty. Replace 5V
cable J28 to USB pcb. SMPS if no 5V.
6. Check the USB pcb. Replace if faulty
7. Check whether the Rectify it.

RCT & CRU are
initializing proper.
8. Check the Robo pcb Replace if faulty.
9. Check by fixing USB Change the USB cable

cable on another port position from back to front
on the computer. side port.
19-12
10. Check the hardware of Replace if faulty

port in computer.
11. Check for any virus Reload OS & then the ASW
12. Check the computer Replace if faulty
7 Database connection 1. Double click on MultiXL Wait For few minutes after
Not established. icon after some time computer boots up and then
on startup double click the MultiXL
icon. If still error comes then
follow the next step
2. Check in the task If not seen then check in add
manager in processes or remove programmers if all
whether SQLservr.exe 4 -5 entries of SQLserver
process is seen on 2005 are present.
display.
3. Check for corrupt Reload the database from
database. backup taken previously and
try or if not working then
reload ASW again with blank
data.
8 RCT temperature out 1. Check the Rct heater & Refix firmly. Tighten the
of range error thermistor connections. crimping
2. Check the resistance of The resistance should be
heater coil & supply to 80Ώ for each heater taking
thermistor. black sleeve wire as
common; the supply to
thermistor is 5V each taking
black wire as common.
Replace if heater or
thermistor is open.
3. Check continuity of Replace cables if cut or
cables from top faulty.
through slipring till
Robo pcb connectors.
4. Check slipring Replace if faulty
5. Check heater IC's Replace if burnt.
6. Check the thermistor Replace pcb if faulty.

supply IC at Robo pcb
7. Check 24V SMPS IF not o/p replace SMP
8. If temperature is seen Then thermistor of cuvette

is room temperature or ring set is ok & heater side is
equal to ambient in faulty. Replace cuvette
service mode ringset if heater shows open.
9. If temperature is The thermistor is faulty.
increasing Replace cuvette ring set.
continuously.
9 RGT temperature out 1. Check the ambient Should be air-conditioned &
of range temperature. 22˚C.
19-13
2. Check for dirt on the Clean if dirty.

reagent cooling unit
heat sink
3. Check the 12V at the Replace wire cable if cut or
peltier terminals. Check 12/18A SMPS if faulty.
continuity of wire.
4. Check for loose Refix if loose
connectors.
5. Check the peltier Replace the reagent cooling
resistance Should be unit if peltier is faulty
40Ώ
6. Check whether the duct If 230V AC not present
fan is working and check the noise filter.
230V AC to duct fan. Replace if faulty. Replace
Check capacitor capacitor if faulty. Replace
2.5uf/400VAC and duct duct fan if faulty
fan
7. Check the airflow fans Replace if faulty
8. Check the reagent Resistance of thermistor

cooling unit thermistor. should be 100KΏ at 37˚C.
Replace if faulty.
10 Arm up/down & 1. Check the arm Set it right
rotational error. assembly for
mechanical obstruction.
2. Check for dirty opto or Clean them if dirty
interrupter.
3. Check whether the Adjust the opto if required
opto's are being cut
properly at the proper
position.
4. Check the belt tension Adjust the belt tension if
for older instruments required
5. Check the bearing in Grease them if required.
the older instruments
6. Check the motor Replace if faulty.
resistance.
7. Check the supply 24V Replace cable if cut or
to motor. faulty. Replace IF board if
faulty.
8. Check if pulley is Tighten the 2 grub screws
become loose. on the pulley.
9. Check the Alignment at Align if required.
each position.
11 Improper Results 1. Check the parameter Set the correct chemistry
for particular chemistry parameters.
if improper result for
particular chemistry. If
for all parameters then
follow the steps below.
2. Check by standardizing Use new reagent of
19-14
or calibrating. calibrator or standard and

recalibrate the test.
3. Check whether the filter Clean filter or change lamp if
gains are proper. all gain are high.
4. Check the lamp Set the lamp voltage to
voltage. 11.8V. Adjust if required.
5. Check the photometer Replace if faulty.
pcb,mirror assembly or
AGC pcb
6. Check the cuvettes Clean if required. Replace if
scratches are found on
cuvettes.
7. Check the dispensing Adjust if required.
of detergent
8. Check whether Replace the drier chip.
cuvettes are dry Check tubes & vacuum
pump. Replace if faulty
9. Check the dispensing Clean the probe if blocked.
of Sample Air bubbles in tube &
syringe. Remove them.
Replace and refit the ferule if
required. Replace syringe if
faulty.
10. Check the alignment of Adjust & align if necessary.
cuvette ring set
11. Check the probe height Should be 12mm above
cuvettes.
12. Check the tube Cut the teflon tube a little &
insertion at probe. reinsert the tube
13. If probe damaged. Replace it. Do probe height
again. Also the Dead
Volume calibration.
14. Check the DI water Should be less than 5.
ppm
15. Check the stirrer Check whether the stirrer is
movement. rotating and alignment. Align
if required.
16. Check the stirrer motor Check for cut wires at the
voltage. bottom of shaft. Replace
cable if faulty or resolder
cable.
17. Check stirrer motor Replace if faulty.
problem
19-15
20. Error Code List

All the mechanical movements are controlled and monitored by the computer.
When a problem arises, the computer becomes aware of it and generates the
visual error message to call the operator's attention.
In the event of the problem that may affect the performance of the analyzer, the
sampling stop or emergency stop will be executed. In the case of sampling stop
mode, the analyzer carries on and completes the processing of the sample that is
not affected by the problem. In the case of problem that may affect the entire
measurements of sample, the emergency stop will be executed.
The Report > Error Log screen can be used to view all the errors occurred on the
analyzer during the test run or service check. This data is generally useful for
servicing/diagnostic purposes.
The period of Error List can be selected using From and To Date Calendar. Refer
section 20.1.1.2 Error Log for more details.
Remedial actions for all error conditions are given below in section 20.1.1.1 Error
Messages for each unit.
When user clicks on Start Run button on Status Monitor, if any
error is detected during initialization of the instrument then the
error message will be displayed in the error grid on the Screen. In
such case, the instruments will stop. The user has to take the
corrective action.
Problem may arise, which is not monitored by the computer. Any alarm message
may not be indicated on the display for such a problem. Such a problem includes
abrasion of parts, leakage in the sampling system, etc. When this type of problem
occurs, decide whether the processing of sample is carried on or the measurement
is terminated, considering that such problem may result in damage to the analyzer
or erroneous outcome of measurements.
20-1
20.1.1.1. Error messages for each unit

Assembly Error Error Message Possible Failures Action to be Taken
Code
NR Analyzer Not • WRONG PC COM • MAKE SURE THAT A
Responding PORT SELECTION CORRECT PORT HAS
FOR ANALYZER BEEN SELECTED IN
• PROBLEM IN [SERVICE CHECK: PC
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION]
CABLE SCREEN
• RS 232 ISOLATOR • MAKE SURE THE
BOARD CONTINUITY OF THE RS
232 COMMUNICATION
• PROBLEM IN RCT CABLE BETWEEN
ROTATION ANALYZER AND PC
• CHANGE RS 232
ISOLATOR PCB
• CHECK WHETHER RCT
IS ROTATING DURING
INITIALIZATION OR NOT.
• IF PROBLEM IS NOT
RESOLVED, CONTACT
SERVICE ENGINEER
R2PT A00 R2PT • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE R2PT
during Trough • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
to Reagent AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Inner Rotation CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
ROTATION • THEN SWITCH ON THE
STEPPER MOTOR INSTRUMENT; GO TO
AND ITS [SERVICE CHECK:
CONNECTIONS REAGENT 2 ARM] MENU;
GIVE <INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
• IF THE INITIALIZATION
OR ROTATION FAILS,
CALL SERVICE ENGINEER
20-2
A10 R2PT • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

Outer R2PT CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
Rotation ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
during Reagent • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
to Cuvette AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Rotation CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
A21 R2PT Up/Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
• STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
AND ITS HAND AND MAKE SURE
CONNECTOR THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
• UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
AND ITS • THEN SWITCH ON THE
CONNECTIONS INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
REAGENT 1 ARM] MENU;
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A22 R2PT Up/Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
20-3
STEPPER MOTOR • THEN SWITCH ON THE

AND ITS INSTRUMENT; GO TO
CONNECTIONS [SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A23 R2 Arm • R2PT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RGT AND RCT
Interlocked SIGNALS AND TRY THE SAME
• RGT/RCT TRAY ACTION
ARE ROTATING OR • SWITCH OFF AND
THEIR OPTOS ARE SWITCH ON THE
GIVING FALSE INSTRUMENT
SIGNAL • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
• STEP TRAY AND ERROR, CALL SERVICE
STEP ARM CARD ENGINEER
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
A24 Obstacle in R2 • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 2
Arm Path OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT
• R2PT PROBE THROUGH [SERVICE
ASSEMBLY AND CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
ITS SPRING AT THE EDGE OF THE
ACTION REAGENT BOTTLE, THEN
CALIBRATE THE PROBE
USING SERVICE CHECK
SCREEN
• REMOVE THE COVER OF
THE REAGENT 2 ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
PROBE SPRING AND ITS
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
during Cuvette • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
to Drain AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
20-4
OR ROTATION FAILS,
during Drain to • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Trough Rotation AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
A81 R2 Arm is • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Misaligned SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
during Down • STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Movement. AND ITS HAND AND MAKE SURE
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A82 R2 Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
Error. • STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A83 R2 arm Down • R2PT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RGT AND RCT
Movement Error SIGNALS AND TRY THE SAME
Due to • RGT/RCT TRAY ACTION
20-5
RCT/RGT ARE ROTATING OR • SWITCH OFF AND

rotating. THEIR OPTOS ARE SWITCH ON THE
SIGNAL
• IF STILL IT IS GIVING
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
A84 R2 arm Down • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 2
Movement Error OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT
Due to obstacle • R2PT PROBE THROUGH [SERVICE
in R2 Arm path. ASSEMBLY AND CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
CALIBRATE THE PROBE
USING SERVICE CHECK
SCREEN
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
CALIBRATE THE PROBE
USING SERVICE CHECK
SCREEN
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
CALIBRATE THE PROBE
USING SERVICE CHECK
20-6
SCREEN
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
A85 R2 Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down CARD ANALYZER; MOVE
Movement • STEP TRAY CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP
Error. AND ITS AND DOWN BY AND MAKE
CONNECTOR SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
• SYRINGE MOVEMENT
UP/DOWN MOTOR
• THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
SYRINGES] MENU, GIVE
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A25 R2 Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
995 R2 Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
20-7
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
999 ISE Urine • IF THE URINE • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Diluent Absent VOLUME IS BELOW DRY IT.
THE DEAD • REMOVE THE ARM
VOLUME INSIDE COVER AND CHECK FOR
THE BOTTLE. LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS.
A87 R2 Syringe •WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error. ENTRY REAGENT 2 VOLUMES IN
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE.
A27 R2 Syringe •WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error. ENTRY REAGENT 2 VOLUMES IN
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE.
A89 R2 Probe • R2 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Shorted NOT FUNCTIONING DRY IT.
CORRECTLY • REMOVE THE ARM
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS.
A29 R2 Probe • R2 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS.
989 R2 Probe • R2 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS.
during • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Initialization AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
20-8
OR ROTATION FAILS,
A92 R2PT Up/Down • R2PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
during OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Initialization • R2PT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ASSEMBLY AND THAT NOTHING IS
ITS SPRING OBSTRUCTING THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
• STEP ARM CARD • THEN SWITCH ON THE
CONNECTOR [SERVICE CHECK:
• UP/DOWN AND GIVE <INITIALIZE> AND
ROTATION <UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
STEPPER MOTOR
AND ITS • IF THE INITIALIZATION
CONNECTIONS OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
A93 R2 Arm down • R2PT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RGT AND RCT
movement error SIGNALS AND TRY THE SAME
during • RGT/RCT TRAY ACTION
initialization due ARE ROTATING OR • SWITCH OFF AND
to RCT/RGT THEIR OPTOS ARE SWITCH ON THE
misalignment GIVING FALSE INSTRUMENT
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
A94 R2PT • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 2
Rotational Error OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT
during • R2PT PROBE THROUGH [SERVICE
Initialization due ASSEMBLY AND CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
to Obstacle in ITS SPRING AT THE EDGE OF THE
R2PT Path ACTION REAGENT BOTTLE, THEN
CALIBRATE THE PROBE
USING SERVICE CHECK
SCREEN
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
RGT C00 RGT Rotational • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during ASSEMBLY OF ANALYZER; ROTATE RGT
Initialization RGT TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
• STEPPER MOTOR SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
20-9
AND ITS ROTATION

CONNECTIONS • THEN, SWITCH ON THE
• STEP TRAY CARD INSTRUMENT; GO TO
CONNECTOR REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
• SEN3 PCB AND GIVE <INITIALIZE>
ITS CONNECTOR COMMAND.
• IF INITIALIZATION FAILS,
C01 RGT Rotational • R1 OR R2 ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER R1
Error during DOWN IN RGT AND R2 ARMS ARE DOWN
Initialization due TRAY IN RGT TRAY
to R1 or R2 Arm • R1 OR R2 ARM • SWITCH OFF THE
Down OPTO IS GIVING INSTRUMENT; BRING R1
WRONG SIGNAL AND R2 ARMS TO THEIR
HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
C20 RGT Rotational • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotate_1 RGT TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
Command • STEPPER MOTOR SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Execution AND ITS OBSTRUCTING THE
CONNECTIONS ROTATION
• STEP-TRAY CARD • THEN, SWITCH ON THE
REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
Error due to R1 DOWN IN RGT AND R2 ARMS ARE DOWN
or R2 Arm TRAY IN RGT TRAY
Down during • R1 OR R2 ARM • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotate_1 OPTO IS GIVING INSTRUMENT; BRING R1
Command WRONG SIGNAL AND R2 ARMS TO THEIR
Execution HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Rotate_50 RGT TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
20-10

• SEN3 PCB AND REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
ITS CONNECTOR GIVE <INITIALIZE>
COMMAND.
Rotate_50 OPTO IS GIVING INSTRUMENT; BRING R1
Command WRONG SIGNAL AND R2 ARMS TO THEIR
Execution HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Link Mode RGT BY HAND AND MAKE
• MECHANICAL SURE THAT NOTHING IS
SETTING OF POS1 OBSTRUCTING THE
OPTO PCB ROTATION
• STEPPER MOTOR • THEN, SWITCH ON THE
REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
• STEP-TRAY CARD GIVE <INITIALIZE>
AND ITS COMMAND.
CONNECTOR
• SEN3 PCB AND CALL SERVICE ENGINEER
ITS CONNECTOR
Link Mode OPTO IS GIVING INSTRUMENT; BRING R1
HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Barcode Scan RGT BY HAND AND MAKE
AND ITS OBSTRUCTING THE
20-11

• SEN3 PCB AND REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
COMMAND.
Barcode Scan OPTO IS GIVING INSTRUMENT; BRING R1
HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error During ASSEMBLY OF ANALYZER; ROTATE RGT
Run RGT TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
REAGENT TRAY] MENU;
DA0 RCT rotational • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
error during ASSEMBLY RCT ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
offset TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
• STEP TRAY CARD • THEN SWITCH ON THE
CONNECTOR [SERVICE CHECK: CRU
and REACTION TRAY]
• SEN3 PCB AND MENU; GIVE <INITIALIZE>
ITS CONNECTOR COMMAND
• ARMS ARE DOWN • IF INITIALIZATION FAILS,
IN RCT OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
DB2 Laundry Down • CRU POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
Due to Obstacle • RCT POS1 OPTO UP AND DOWN BY HAND
in Laundry Path. SIGNALS AND MAKE SURE THAT
20-12
• STEP-TRAY CARD NOTHING IS

AND ITS OBSTRUCTING THE CRU
CONNECTOR MOVEMENT
• STEPPER MOTOR • THEN SWITCH ON THE
CONNECTIONS [SERVICE CHECK: CRU
and REACTION TRAY]
MENU; GIVE <INITIALIZE>
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
DC1 Dirty Cuvette • CUVETTE IS • CLEAN OR REPLACE
DIRTY THE DIRTY CUVETTE.
• PHOTOMETER, • CHECK THE
LAMP ASSEMBLY PHOTOMETER, LAMP
• PROBLEM IN ADC ASSEMBLY.
CARD
RCT DA2 RCT Arm Down • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during • STEP TRAY CARD ANALYZER; ROTATE CRU
Offset AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• SEN3 PCB AND OBSTRUCTING THE
ITS CONNECTOR ROTATION
and REACTION TRAY]
COMMAND AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
D00 RCT Rotational • THREE POS1 • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during OPTO ASSEMBLY ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
Initialization OF RCT BY HAND AND MAKE
• STEP-TRAY CARD • THEN SWITCH ON THE
and REACTION TRAY]
OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
D01 RCT Rotational • ANY ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER ANY
20-13
Error due to DOWN IN RCT ARM IS DOWN IN RCT

Arm Down TRAY • SWITCH OFF THE
during • ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
Initialization GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, R1 AND R2
SIGNAL ARMS TO THEIR HOME
POSITIONS AND THEN
SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
D20 RCT Rotation • THREE POS1 • SWITCH OFF THE
Interlocked OPTO ASSEMBLY ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
during Rotate_1 OF RCT BY HAND AND MAKE
Execution. AND ITS OBSTRUCTING THE
and REACTION TRAY]
OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
D21 RCT Rotation • ANY ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER ANY
Interlocked due DOWN IN RCT ARM IS DOWN IN RCT
to Arm Down TRAY • SWITCH OFF THE
during Rotate_1 • ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
Command GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, R1 AND R2
Execution. SIGNAL ARMS TO THEIR HOME
POSITIONS AND THEN
SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error During OPTO ASSEMBLY ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
Rotate_50 OF RCT BY HAND AND MAKE
and REACTION TRAY]
OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-14

during • ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
Rotate_50 GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, R1 AND R2
Command SIGNAL ARMS TO THEIR HOME
Execution POSITIONS AND THEN
SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error in Link OPTO ASSEMBLY ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
Mode OF RCT BY HAND AND MAKE
and REACTION TRAY]
OTHERWISE CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
during Link • ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
Mode GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, R1 AND R2
SIGNAL ARMS TO THEIR HOME
POSITIONS AND THEN
SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
RCT V1 “Bottle over- 1. Scanned Reagent Decrease the Reagent
filled at Pos. N“, volume is more than volume at the required
where N = 47ml for Large bottle position
Position No.
2. Scanned Reagent Decrease the Reagent
volume is more than volume at the required
23 ml for Small bottle position
20-15
CRU D52 CRU Up/Down • CRU POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
during • RCT POS1 OPTO UP AND DOWN BY HAND
Initialization SIGNALS AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• STEP-TRAY CARD OBSTRUCTING THE CRU
AND ITS MOVEMENT
CONNECTOR
• STEPPER MOTOR INSTRUMENT; GO TO
AND ITS [SERVICE CHECK: CRU
CONNECTIONS and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
D53 CRU–RCT • CRU POS1 OPTO • CHECK RCT AND CRU
Alignment Error SIGNAL ALIGNMENT
during • RCT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE CRU AS WELL
Initialization SIGNALS AS RCT THROUGH
• STEP-TRAY CARD [SERVICE CHECK] MENU
AND ITS • SWITCH OFF THE
CONNECTOR INSTRUMENT AND THEN
• STEPPER MOTOR SWITCH ON THE
AND ITS INSTRUMENT
CONNECTIONS • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
ERROR CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
D62 CRU Up • CRU POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
• STEP-TRAY CARD UP AND DOWN BY HAND
AND ITS AND MAKE SURE THAT
CONNECTOR NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE CRU
• STEPPER MOTOR MOVEMENT
AND ITS
CONNECTIONS • THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK: CRU
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-16
D72 CRU Down • CRU POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

• RCT POS1 OPTO UP AND DOWN BY HAND
SIGNALS AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
AND ITS MOVEMENT
CONNECTOR
CONNECTIONS and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
D73 CRU Down • RCT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RCT AND
Movement Error SIGNALS CHECK RCT AND CRU
Due to RCT • STEP-TRAY CARD ALIGNMENT
Misalignment AND ITS • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
CONNECTOR ERROR, CALL SERVICE
• STEPPER MOTOR ENGINEER
AND ITS
CONNECTIONS
D82 CRU Up/Down • CRU POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
in Link Mode • RCT POS1 OPTO UP AND DOWN BY HAND
SIGNALS AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
AND ITS MOVEMENT
CONNECTOR
CONNECTIONS AND REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
E00 RCT Rotational • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during ASSEMBLY OF RCT ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
Run TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
and REACTION TRAY]
20-17

SERVICE ENGINEER
RCT E01 RCT Rotational • ANY ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER ANY
• ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, STIRRER, R1
SIGNAL AND R2 ARMS TO THEIR
HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
E02 CRU Up/Down • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE
Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
NOTHING IS
• SEN3 PCB AND OBSTRUCTING THE CRU
ITS CONNECTOR MOVEMENT
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
E03 CRU Down • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; CHECK RCT
due to RCT AND ITS AND CRU ALIGNMENT
Rotation CONNECTOR • SWITCH ON THE
• SEN3 PCB AND INSTRUMENT; INITIALIZE
ITS CONNECTOR CRU AS WELL AS RCT IN
[SERVICE CHECK]
• STEPPER MOTOR
AND ITS • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
CONNECTIONS ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Miscellaneous E04 DI Water • DI WATER IS • FILL THE DI WATER CAN
Insufficient LOW/FINISHED
E05 Problem in • WATER FILTER • CLEAN THE WATER
Water Pressure HAS BEEN FILTER
BLOCKED • IF PROBLEM NOT
BECAUSE OF RESOLVED, CALL
SOME DIRTY SERVICE ENGINEER
PARTICLES.
20-18
E10 RCT Rotation • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

Cuvette Rinse TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
and REACTION TRAY]
SERVICE ENGINEER
E11 RCT Rotational • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE
error due to • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
Arm Down AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
during Cuvette CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
Rinse NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
during Cuvette AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
Rinse CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
E20 Auto Span • RCT_CRU • SWITCH OFF THE
Failure ALIGNMENT ANALYZER; ROTATE RCT
• STEP TRAY CARD BY HAND AND MAKE
20-19
AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS

• STEPPER MOTOR ROTATION
<SERVICE CHECK: CRU
and REACTION TRAY>
MENU AND GIVE
<INITIALIZE> COMMAND
E21 RCT Rotational • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE
Error due to • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
Arm Down AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
during CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
Autospan. NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
during AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
Autospan. CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
due to RCT AND ITS AND CRU ALIGNMENT
Rotation. CONNECTOR • SWITCH ON THE
[SERVICE CHECK]
20-20
• STEPPER MOTOR • IF PROBLEM NOT

AND ITS RESOLVED, CALL
CONNECTIONS SERVICE ENGINEER
E24 Check Water • DI • FILL THE DI WATER CAN
Pressure/DI WATER/CLEANING
Water SOLUTION IS LOW
Insufficient.
Insufficient.
Insufficient.
Insufficient.
D25 Check Water • DI • FILL THE DI WATER CAN
Insufficient.
Error at the End • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
of Run AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
NOTHING IS
ITS CONNECTOR MOVEMENT.
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
at the End of AND ITS AND CRU ALIGNMENT
Run CONNECTOR • SWITCH ON THE
[SERVICE CHECK]
• STEPPER MOTOR
AND ITS • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
CONNECTIONS RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-21
RCT E71 RCT • ANY ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER ANY

Initialisation DOWN IN RCT ARM IS DOWN IN RCT
Error due to arm TRAY • SWITCH OFF THE
down • ARM OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT; BRING
GIVING WRONG SAMPLE, STIRRER, R1
SIGNAL AND R2 ARMS TO THEIR
HOME POSITIONS AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
CRU E76 CRU Positional • CRU OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
initialisation • STEPPER MOTOR TO HOME POSITION BY
CONNECTION THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
• STEP TRAY CARD MOVEMENT
AND ITS
CONNECTOR • THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK: CRU
AND REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
E80 RCT Rotation • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Beginning of TRAY BY HAND AND MAKE
Run • STEPPER MOTOR SURE THAT NOTHING IS
CONNECTOR <SERVICE CHECK: CRU
and REACTION TRAY>
• SEN3 PCB AND MENU AND GIVE
ITS CONNECTOR <INITIALIZE> COMMAND
IN RCT CALL SERVICE ENGINEER
20-22
E81 RCT arm down • RCT ALIGNMENT • SWITCH OFF THE

Error during • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
Beginning of AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
Run CONNECTOR AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
Error at Run • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE CRU
Start AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
NOTHING IS
and REACTION TRAY]
AND <UP/DOWN>
COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
SERVICE ENGINEER
at Run Start AND ITS AND CRU ALIGNMENT
CONNECTOR • SWITCH ON THE
[SERVICE CHECK]
• STEPPER MOTOR
CONNECTIONS ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
20-23
T9 RCT • ADC CN1/CN2 • CONNECT THE ADC

Temperature CONNECTOR IS CN1/CN2 CONNECTOR
Out of Range NOT CONNECTED. PROPERLY.
• ADC CN1/CN2 IS • IF PROBLEM NOT
LOSSELY RESOLVED, CALL
CONNECTED TO SERVICE ENGINEER.
ADC PCB.
• PROBLEM WITH
RCT ASSEMBLY
DOME OPEN DOME IS OPEN CLOSE THE DOME

DOME 201 LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1 PROPERLY.
CHECK THE OPTO.
DOME OPEN DOME IS OPEN CLOSE THE DOME

DOME 203 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2 PROPERLY.
CHECK THE OPTO.
OPERATION
NOT DOME OPEN CLOSE THE DOME
PERFORMED ABRUPTLY ABOVE PROPERLY.
DOME LEVEL 2 LEVEL2
OPEN CHECK THE OPTO
ABRUPTLY
DOME DM CLOSE DOME
TO PROCEED DOME IS OPEN CLOSE THE DOME
PROPERLY.
CHECK THE OPTO.
Stirrer 3B0 Stirrer • POS1 OPTO PCB • SWITCH OFF THE

Rotational Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; ROTATE
during AND ITS STIRRERS BY HAND AND
Initialization CONNECTOR MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• STEPPER MOTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
STIRRERS] MENU; GIVE
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Stirrer 3B2 Stirrer Up/Down • POS1 OPTO PCB • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE
during AND ITS STIRRERS UP AND DOWN
Initialization CONNECTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
SURE THAT NOTHING IS
• RCT ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
20-24

INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Stirrer 302 Stirrer Up • POS1 OPTO PCB • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD ANALYZER; MOVE
AND ITS STIRRERS UP AND DOWN
CONNECTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
• RCT ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Stirrer 313 Stirrer Down • RCT ALIGNMENT • GIVE RCT OFFSET
Movement Error • RCT IS NOT AT COMMAND AND TRY THE
OFFSET SAME ACTION
CONDITION OR • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
RCT ALIGNMENT IS ERROR, CALL SERVICE
NOT PROPER ENGINEER
Stirrer 320 Stirrer • STIRRER • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error ROTATION MOTOR ANALYZER; ROTATE
during Stir One OR OPTOS OR STIRRERS BY HAND AND
STEP TRAY CARD MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Stirrer 322 Stirrer Up/Down • PROBLEM IN • SWITCH OFF THE
Error STIRRER ANALYZER; MOVE
ROTATION and STIRRERS UP AND DOWN
UP/DOWN MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
20-25
• STIRRER OPTOS OBSTRUCTING THE

MOVEMENT
• STEP TRAY CARD
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Stirrer 330 Stirrer • PROBLEM IN • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error STIRRER ANALYZER; ROTATE
during Stir Two ROTATION MOTOR STIRRERS BY HAND AND
• STIRRER OPTOS MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• STEP TRAY CARD OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
error STIRRER ANALYZER; MOVE
ROTATION and STIRRERS UP AND DOWN
UP/DOWN MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
• STIRRER OPTOS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
• STEP TRAY CARD MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Stirrer 340 Stirrer • PROBLEM IN • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error STIRRER ANALYZER; ROTATE
during ROTATION and STIRRERS BY HAND AND
stirrer_stir UP/DOWN MOTOR MAKE SURE THAT
execution • STIRRER OPTOS NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
• STEP TRAY CARD ROTATION
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
20-26
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
error STIRRER ANALYZER; MOVE
UP/DOWN STIRRERS UP AND DOWN
STEPPER MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
• STIRRER UP SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OPTOS OBSTRUCTING THE
MOVEMENT
• STEP TRAY CARD
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Stirrer 343 Stirrer • RCT ALIGNMENT • GIVE RCT OFFSET
Interlocked • RCT IS NOT AT COMMAND AND TRY THE
OFFSET SAME ACTION
CONDITION OR • IF THE PROBLEM NOT
RCT ALIGNMENT IS RESOLVED, CALL
NOT PROPER SERVICE ENGINEER
STIRRE UP/DOWN
STEPPER MOTOR
FAIL
Stirrer 344 Stirrer • STIRRER UP • SWITCH OFF THE
Positional Error OPTO ANALYZER; ROTATE
• STEPPER MOTOR STIRRERS BY HAND AND
AND ITS MAKE SURE THAT
CONNECTION NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
AND ITS
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Stirrer 380 Stirrer • STIRRER • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error ROTATION MOTOR ANALYZER; ROTATE
OR OPTOS STIRRERS BY HAND AND
• STEP TRAY CARD MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
20-27
OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ASP 400 ASP Rotational • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during ASSEMBLY OF ASP ANALYZER; ROTATE ASP
Initialization FAULTY BY HAND AND MAKE
SAMPLE TRAY] MENU;
ASP 401 ASP Rotational • SAMPLE ARM IS • CHECK WHETHER
Error due to DOWN IN ASP SAMPLE ARM IS DOWN IN
Sample Arm TRAY ASP TRAY
Down during • SPT ARM OPTO IS • SWITCH OFF THE
Initialization GIVING WRONG INSTRUMENT; BRING THE
SIGNAL SAMPLE ARM TO ITS
HOME POSITION AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
Rotate_1 • STEPPER MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
Command AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Execution CONNECTIONS OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• STEP-TRAY CARD
AND ITS • THEN, SWITCH ON THE
CONNECTOR INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
• SEN3 PCB AND SAMPLE TRAY] MENU;
COMMAND.
20-28

Error due to DOWN AT ASP SAMPLE ARM IS DOWN IN
Rotate_1 GIVING WRONG INSTRUMENT; BRING THE
Command SIGNAL SAMPLE ARM TO ITS
Execution HOME POSITION AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
•IF STILL IT IS GIVING
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Rotate_50 STEPPER MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
Command AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Execution CONNECTIONS OBSTRUCTING THE
• STEP-TRAY CARD ROTATION
• SEN3 PCB AND [SERVICE CHECK:
ITS CONNECTOR SAMPLE TRAY] MENU;
GIVE <INITIALIZE>
COMMAND.
Rotate_50 GIVING WRONG INSTRUMENT; BRING THE
Command SIGNAL SAMPLE ARM TO ITS
Execution HOME POSITION AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Link Mode • MECHANICAL BY HAND AND MAKE
SETTING OF POS1 SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OPTO PCB OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
• STEP-TRAY CARD SAMPLE TRAY] MENU;
AND ITS GIVE <INITIALIZE>
CONNECTOR COMMAND.
• SEN3 PCB AND • IF INITIALIZATION FAILS,
ITS CONNECTOR CALL SERVICE ENGINEER
20-29

Down in Link • SPT ARM OPTO IS • SWITCH OFF THE
Mode GIVING WRONG INSTRUMENT; BRING THE
HOME POSITION AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Barcode Scan • STEPPER MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
CONNECTIONS OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• STEP-TRAY CARD
[SERVICE CHECK:
COMMAND.
Barcode Scan GIVING WRONG INSTRUMENT; BRING THE
HOME POSITION AND
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT.
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Run • STEPPER MOTOR BY HAND AND MAKE
CONNECTIONS OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• STEP-TRAY CARD
[SERVICE CHECK:
• SAMPLE ARM IS COMMAND.
DOWN IN ASP • IF INITIALIZATION FAILS,
TRAY CALL SERVICE ENGINEER
• SPT ARM OPTO IS
20-30
GIVING WRONG
SIGNAL
ASP 461 ASP Rotational • STEPPER MOTOR • CHECK WHETHER SPT
Error due to AND ITS ARM IS DOWN IN SAMPLE
SPT Arm Down CONNECTIONS TRAY
during Run. • STEP-TRAY CARD • SWITCH OFF THE
AND ITS INSTRUMENT; BRING
CONNECTOR SAMPLE ARM TO HOME
• SAMPLE ARM IS POSITION AND THEN
DOWN IN ASP SWITCH ON THE
TRAY INSTRUMENT
• SPT ARM OPTO IS • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
GIVING WRONG ERROR, CALL SERVICE
SIGNAL ENGINEER
SPT 5A5 SPT Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down CARD ANALYZER; MOVE THE
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD SAMPLE SYRINGE UP
AND ITS AND DOWN BY HAND AND
CONNECTOR MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• SYRINGE OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
SYRINGES] MENU; GIVE
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 645 SPT Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
NOTHING IS
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 695 SPT Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
AND DOWN BY HAND AND
20-31
AND ITS MAKE SURE THAT

CONNECTOR NOTHING IS
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 521 Sample Arm is • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Misaligned OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
during Down OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Movement • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ITS SPRING OBSTRUCTING SPT
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 531 Sample Arm is • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 5E2 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
• SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
20-32
ACTION MOVEMENT
• UP/DOWN AND SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
ROTATION GIVE <INITIALIZE> AND
STEPPER MOTOR <UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 5E4 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
VOD error at OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT USING
Pos. • SPT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ASSEMBLY AND HITTING AT THE EDGE OF
ITS SPRING THE SAMPLE CUP AT
ACTION OR APPROPRIATE POSITION,
BECAUSE OF ANY THEN ALIGN THE PROBE
OBSTACLE OR USING THE CALIBRATE
MISALIGNMENT FACILITY.
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
SPRING AND ITS TOTAL
ASSEMBLY
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
SPT 5F0 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during ISE SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
Sample • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Dispense AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING SPT
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
CONNECTIONS SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
SPT 5F2 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
20-33

CONNECTOR SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR • IF THE INITIALIZATION
AND ITS OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
CONNECTIONS FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 5F4 SPT VOD Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
AT ISE OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT IN
• SPT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ITS SPRING ISE PORT ALIGN THE
ACTION OR PROBE USING THE
BECAUSE OF ANY CALIBRATE FACILITY
OBSTACLE OR • REMOVE THE COVER OF
MISALIGNMENT THE SAMPLE ARM AND
ISE PORT CHECK AND CLEAN
MISALIGN OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
SPT 5C4 SPT VOD Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
AT ISE OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT IN
• SPT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ITS SPRING ISE PORT ALIGN THE
ACTION OR PROBE USING THE
BECAUSE OF ANY CALIBRATE FACILITY
OBSTACLE OR • REMOVE THE COVER OF
MISALIGNMENT THE SAMPLE ARM AND
ISE PORT CHECK AND CLEAN
MISALIGN OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
SPT 5F5 SPT Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE THE
• STEP ARM CARD SAMPLE SYRINGE UP
NOTHING IS
• SYRINGE MOTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
20-34
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
SPT 5C5 SPT Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
R1 ARM 7D0 R1 Arm • R1 OPTO SIGNAL • SWITCH OFF THE
Rotational Error • STEP ARM CARD ANALYZER; ROTATE R1
AND ITS ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
OBSTRUCTING THE
• UP/DOWN AND ROTATION
ROTATION
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
R1 ARM 7D2 R1 Arm • R1 OPTO SIGNAL • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down • STEP ARM CARD ANALYZER; MOVE R1 ARM
Movement Error AND ITS UP AND DOWN BY HAND
NOTHING IS
• UP/DOWN OBSTRUCTING R1 ARM
STEPPER MOTOR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
AND ITS
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
20-35
FAILS, CALL SERVICE

ENGINEER
R1 ARM 7D4 R1 Arm VOD • VOD OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SENSOR ANALYZER; MOVE R1 ARM
• INTERFACE AND UP AND DOWN BY HAND
ITS CONNECTORS AND MAKE SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
• UP/DOWN OBSTRUCTING R1 ARM
STEPPER MOTOR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
AND ITS
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
R1 ARM 7DC R1 Arm • R1 OPTO SIGNAL • SWITCH OFF THE
Positional Error • STEPPER MOTOR ANALYZER; ROTATE R1
AND ITS ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
CONNECTION SURE THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
5E5 SPT Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
5C6 Urine Diluent • URINE DILUENT • PLACE URINE DILUENT
Absent IS NOT KEPT OR IN THE REAGENT TRAY
20-36
BOTTLE IS AT THE REQUIRED

MISPLACED IN THE POSITION.
POSITION. • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
• LLS CIRCUIT AND RESOLVED, CALL
ITS CONNECTOR SERVICE ENGINEER
PROBLEM
5F6 ISE Sample • SAMPLE IS NOT • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN
Absent KEPT OR SAMPLE THE SAMPLE TRAY AT
TUBE OR CUP THE REQUIRED POSITION
MISPLACED • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
PROBLEM
5E6 ISE Sample • SAMPLE IS NOT • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN
Absent KEPT OR SAMPLE THE SAMPLE TRAY AT
PROBLEM
5F9 SPT Probe • SAMPLE LLS PCB • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Shorted IS NOT DRY IT
FUNCTIONING • REMOVE THE ARM
CORRECTLY COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
5E9 SPT Probe • SAMPLE LLS PCB • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
649 SPT Probe • SAMPLE LLS PCB • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
522 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
MOVEMENT
20-37
ACTION • THEN SWITCH ON THE

• STEP ARM CARD INSTRUMENT; GO TO
CONNECTOR SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR • IF THE INITIALIZATION
AND ITS OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
CONNECTIONS FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
523 SPT Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF AND THEN
Interlocked SIGNALS SWITCH ON THE
• ASP/RCT TRAY INSTRUMENT
ARE ROTATING OR • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
THEIR OPTOS ARE ERROR, CALL SERVICE
GIVING FALSE ENGINEER
SIGNAL
• STEP TRAY AND
STEP ARM CARD
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
643 SPT Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF AND THEN
Interlocked SIGNALS SWITCH ON THE
• ASP/RCT TRAY INSTRUMENT
ARE ROTATING OR • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
THEIR OPTOS ARE ERROR, CALL SERVICE
GIVING FALSE ENGINEER
SIGNAL
• STEP TRAY AND
STEP ARM CARD
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
524 SPT Down Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK WHETHER THE
due to Obstacle OPTO AND ARM SELECTED SAMPLE
in SPT Path OPTOS CONTAINER IS TUBE AND
• SPT PROBE INSTEAD OF TUBE, A CUP
ASSEMBLY AND HAS BEEN KEPT
ITS SPRING • CHECK THE SAMPLE
ACTION OR ANY ARM ALIGNMENT
OBSTACLE THROUGH [SERVICE
CHECK] MENU. IF IT IS
HITTING AT THE EDGE OF
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
TUBE, THEN ALIGN THE
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
20-38
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-39

THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
699 SPT Arm Probe • SAMPLE LLS PCB • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
20-40
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
526 SPT Down Error • SAMPLE PROBE • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN
due to Sample GOES DOWN BUT THE SAMPLE TRAY AT
Absent DOESN’T FIND LLS THE REQUIRED POSITION
SIGNAL DUE TO • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
PROBLEM IN LLS RESOLVED, CALL
CARD OR ITS SERVICE ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
• SAMPLE ABSENT
532 SPT Up/Down • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
OBSTRUCTING SPT
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
545 SPT Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Initialization SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE THE
Error. • STEP ARM CARD SAMPLE SYRINGE UP
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
THEN SWITCH ON THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
550 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
Initialization • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
20-41

<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Error during OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
Initialization OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
554 SPT Obstacle • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
error during OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT AT
initialization. OPTOS TROUGH POSITION IF IT
• SPT PROBE IS HITTING AT THE EDGE
ASSEMBLY AND OF THE TROUGH, THEN
ITS SPRING ALIGN THE PROBE.
ACTION OR ANY • REMOVE THE COVER OF
OBSTACLE THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE THE
Initialization • STEP ARM CARD SAMPLE SYRINGE UP
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
20-42
FAILS, CALL SERVICE

ENGINEER
560 SPT Link Halted • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
due to SPT SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
Rotational Error • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
562 SPT Link Halted • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
due to Up/Down OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
Movement Error OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
of SPT • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
564 SPT Link Halted • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
due to Obstacle OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT,
in SPT Path OPTOS THROUGH SERVICE
• SPT PROBE CHECK. IF IT IS HITTING
ASSEMBLY AND AT THE EDGE OF THE
ITS SPRING SAMPLE CUP OR TUBE,
ACTION THEN ALIGN THE PROBE
USING CALIBRATE
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
566 SPT Link Halted • SAMPLE ABSENT • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN
20-43
due to Sample • LLS CONNECTION THE SAMPLE TRAY AT

Absent THE REQUIRED POSITION
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
• STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
5C0 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
5E0 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
20-44
AND ITS OBSTRUCTING SPT

CONNECTOR ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND • THEN SWITCH ON THE
ROTATION INSTRUMENT; GO TO
STEPPER MOTOR [SERVICE CHECK:
AND ITS SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
CONNECTIONS GIVE <INITIALIZE> AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
20-45

FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
5C2 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
5E2 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
ROTATION
20-46

FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
20-47
FAILS, CALL SERVICE

ENGINEER
573 SPT Up/Down • ASP/RCT TRAY • SWITCH OFF AND THEN
Movement Error ARE ROTATING OR SWITCH ON THE
due to THEIR OPTOS ARE INSTRUMENT
Sample/Reactio GIVING FALSE • INITIALIZE ASP/RCT AS
n Tray Rotation SIGNAL WELL AS SAMPLE ARM
• STEP TRAY AND AGAIN IN [SERVICE
STEP ARM CARD CHECK]
CONNECTOR ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
574 SPT VOD Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK WHETHER THE
OPTO SELECTED OPTION IS
• SPT PROBE TUBE AND INSTEAD OF
ASSEMBLY AND TUBE A CUP HAS BEEN
ITS SPRING KEPT
ACTION OR • CHECK THE SAMPLE
BECAUSE OF ANY ARM ALIGNMENT IN
OBSTACLE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
CALIBRATE FACILITY.
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
20-48
576 Sample Absent • SAMPLE IS NOT • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN

KEPT OR SAMPLE THE SAMPLE TRAY AT
PROBLEM
577 SPT syringe • WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
volume error ENTRY SAMPLE VOLUME IN TEST
PARAMETERS OF THE
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
IS WITHIN RANGE
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
584 SPT VOD Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
at cuvette OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT IN THE
• SPT PROBE CUVETTE IN [SERVICE
ASSEMBLY AND CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
20-49

ACTION OR CUVETTE, THEN ALIGN
BECAUSE OF ANY THE PROBE USING THE
OBSTACLE OR CALIBRATE FACILITY.
MISALIGNMENT • REMOVE THE COVER OF
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
586 Sample Absent • SAMPLE IS NOT • PLACE THE SAMPLE IN
KEPT OR SAMPLE THE SAMPLE TRAY AT
PROBLEM
587 SPT Syringe • WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error ENTRY THROUGH SAMPLE VOLUME IN TEST
TEXT FILE PARAMETERS OF THE
IS WITHIN RANGE
697 SPT Syringe • WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error ENTRY THROUGH SAMPLE VOLUME IN TEST
TEXT FILE PARAMETERS OF THE
IS WITHIN RANGE
20-50
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
594 SPT VOD Error • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT IN
• SPT PROBE DILUTION CUVETTE IN
ASSEMBLY AND [SERVICE CHECK] MENU.
ITS SPRING IF IT IS HITTING AT THE
ACTION OR EDGE OF THE CUVETTE,
BECAUSE OF ANY ALIGN THE PROBE USING
OBSTACLE OR THE CALIBRATE FACILITY
MISALIGNMENT • REMOVE THE COVER OF
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
596 Diluted Sample • IF DILUENT IS • IF DILUENT IS ABSENT,
Absent ABSENT, SAMPLE PLEASE PLACE THE
PROBE DOESN’T DILUENT IN THE
DETECT SAMPLE REAGENT TRAY AT THE
IN CUVETTE OR REQUIRED POSITION
SAMPLE TUBE OR • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
CUP MISPLACED RESOLVED, CALL
• LLS CIRCUIT AND SERVICE ENGINEER
ITS CONNECTOR
PROBLEM
20-51
6A0 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

Initialization • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
6A1 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Misalignment OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
Error during OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Initialization • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
6A2 SPT Up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error OPTO ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
during • SPT PROBE ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Initialization ASSEMBLY AND HAND AND MAKE SURE
ITS SPRING THAT NOTHING IS
ACTION OBSTRUCTING SPT
MOVEMENT
• STEP ARM CARD
[SERVICE CHECK:
AND ITS
CONNECTIONS • IF THE INITIALIZATION
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
6A4 Obstacle in SPT • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE SAMPLE
Path during OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT IN
Initialization • SPT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ASSEMBLY AND HITTING/STUCK AT THE
ITS SPRING EDGE OF THE TROUGH,
20-52
ACTION SWITCH OFF THE

ANALYZER AND FREE
THE ARM. THEN, SWITCH
ON THE ANALYZER
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
6B0 SPT Rotational • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Dilution Cuvette • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
to Sample AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Cuvette CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING SPT
Rotation ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
6B4 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK WHETHER THE
VOD error OPTO SELECTED OPTION IS
Dilution Cuvette • SPT PROBE TUBE AND INSTEAD OF
to Sample ASSEMBLY AND TUBE A CUP HAS BEEN
Cuvette. ITS SPRING KEPT
ACTION OR • CHECK THE SAMPLE
BECAUSE OF ANY ARM ALIGNMENT IN
OBSTACLE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
SPT ROTATIONAL HITTING AT THE EDGE OF
MOTOR THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
CALIBRATE FACILITY.
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-53
B10 Sample Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

Rotational Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
during sample • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
probe wash. AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
B12 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down Error OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
during Sample OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Arm Probe • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
Wash ASSEMBLY AND THAT NOTHING IS
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
B14 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • CHECK WHETHER THE
Obstacle Error OPTO AND ARM SELECTED SAMPLE
during Sample OPTOS CONTAINER IS TUBE AND
Probe Wash. • SPT PROBE INSTEAD OF TUBE, A CUP
THE SAMPLE CUP OR
PROBE USING THE
PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY
THE SAMPLE ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK SPT PROBE
ASSEMBLY
20-54
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESLOVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
B15 Sample Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE THE
Sample Probe • STEP ARM CARD SAMPLE SYRINGE UP
Wash. AND ITS AND DOWN BY HAND AND
NOTHING IS
MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
B16 Cleaning • CLEANING • PLACE THE CLEANING
Solution Absent SOLUTION IS NOT SOLUTION IN THE
in Sample KEPT OR SAMPLE TRAY AT THE
Probe Wash. MISPLACED IN THE REQUIRED POSITION
APPROPRIATE • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
POSITION IN THE RESOLVED, CALL
SAMPLE TRAY SERVICE ENGINEER
• LLS CIRCUIT AND
ITS CONNECTOR
PROBLEM
B19 Sample Arm • SPT ARM LLS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Probe is PCB IS NOT DRY IT
Shorted Due to FUNCTIONING • REMOVE THE ARM
Liquid Drop CORRECTLY COVER AND CHECK FOR
during Sample LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
Probe Wash.
20-55

Trough to • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Sample Outer AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Rotation CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING SPT
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Sample Inner AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Standard Outer AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Standard Inner AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
Rotation Error CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING SPT
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
[SERVICE CHECK:
20-56
AND ITS SAMPLE ARM] MENU;

<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Sample to • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Cuvette AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Sample to ISE • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Sample Port AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Error during ISE SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE SPT
to Drain • STEP ARM CARD ARM BY HAND AND MAKE
Rotation AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
20-57
680 Sample Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
682 SPT up/Down • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
during Cuvette OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
to Drain • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
Rotation. ASSEMBLY AND THAT NOTHING IS
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
690 Sample Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Trough AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
691 Sample arm is • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement. • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
20-58

FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
692 Sample Arm • SPT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE SPT
movement error OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
during drain to • SPT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
trough ASSEMBLY AND THAT NOTHING IS
ACTION MOVEMENT
SAMPLE ARM] MENU;
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
693 Sample Arm • SPT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF AND THEN
Down SIGNALS SWITCH ON THE
Movement Error • ASP/RCT TRAY INSTRUMENT
Due to ARE ROTATING OR • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
RCT/ASP THEIR OPTOS ARE ERROR, CALL SERVICE
rotating. GIVING FALSE ENGINEER
SIGNAL
• STEP TRAY AND
STEP ARM CARD
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
R1PT 722 R1PT Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
20-59
ENGINEER
723 R1PT • R1PT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RGT AND
interlocked SIGNALS GIVE OFFSET RCT; TRY
• RGT/RCT TRAY THE DESIRED ACTION
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
724 Obstacle in • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
R1PT Path OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT
during Down OPTOS THROUGH [SERVICE
Movement • R1PT PROBE CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
ITS SPRING REAGENT BOTTLE, THEN
ACTION ALIGN THE PROBE USING
PROBE CALIBRATION
• STEP ARM CARD FACILITY.
AND ITS
CONNECTOR • REMOVE THE COVER OF
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-60
726 R1PT Down • R1 PROBE GOES • PLACE REAGENT IN THE

Error due to DOWN BUT REAGENT TRAY AT THE
Reagent Absent DOESN’T FIND LLS REQUIRED POSITION
SIGNAL DUE TO • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
PROBLEM IN LLS ERROR, CALL SERVICE
CARD OR ITS ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
• REAGENT
ABSENT
732 R1PT Up/Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
700 R1 Arm • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
20-61

error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
704 R1 Arm VOD • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Error OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
• R1PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ASSEMBLY AND • HITTING AT THE EDGE
ITS SPRING OF THE REAGENT
ACTION BOTTLE, ALIGN THE
PROBE USING THE
• ANY OTHER CALIBRATE FACILITY
OBSTACLE IN THE
DOWN PATH OF • REMOVE THE COVER OF
THE PROBE THE REAGENT 1 ARM AND
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
705 R1 Arm Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Up/Down Error. CARD ANALYZER; MOVE
20-62
• STEP TRAY CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP

AND ITS AND DOWN BY AND MAKE
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
708 Obstacle in R1 • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Arm Path. OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT
OPTOS THROUGH [SERVICE
• R1PT PROBE CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
PROBE CALIBRATION
AND ITS
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
709 R1 Arm Probe • R1 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Shorted NOT FUNCTIONING DRY IT
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
RESLOVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
745 R1PT Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
20-63
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
750 R1PT • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
752 R1PT Up/Down • R1PT OBSTACLE SWITCH OFF THE
Error during OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
• R1PT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
754 R1PT Obstacle • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Error during OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT AT
Initialization OPTOS TROUGH POSITION. IF IT
• R1PT PROBE IS HITTING AT THE EDGE
ITS SPRING ALIGN THE PROBE.
ACTION • REMOVE THE COVER OF
• STEP ARM CARD THE REAGENT 1 ARM AND
AND ITS CHECK AND CLEAN
CONNECTOR OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
20-64
755 R1PT Syringe • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE

Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; DO UP/DOWN
Initialization • STEP ARM CARD OF R1PP SYRINGE BY
OBSTRUCTING THE
• UP/DOWN AND UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
ROTATION
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
760 R1PT Link • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Halted due to SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE R1PT
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
762 R1PT Link • R1PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Halted due to OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
Up/Down OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Movement Error • R1PT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
764 R1PT Link • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Halted due to OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT
Obstacle in OPTOS THROUGH [SERVICE
R1PT Path • SPT PROBE CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
20-65

PROBE CALIBRATION
FACILITY.
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
766 R1PT Link • REAGENT • PLACE REAGENT IN THE
Halted due to ABSENT REAGENT TRAY AT THE
Reagent Absent REQUIRED POSITION
ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Pickup AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
772 R1PT Up/Down • R1PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
20-66
774 R1PT VOD • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1

Error at RGT OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
position • R1PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ITS SPRING THE REAGENT BOTTLE,
THE CALIBRATE FACILITY
• ANY OTHER
OBSTACLE IN THE • REMOVE THE COVER OF
DOWN PATH OF THE REAGENT 1 ARM AND
THE PROBE CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF PROBLEM NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
775 R1PT Syringe • SYRINGE OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error during SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE
Reagent Pickup • STEP ARM CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
• SYRINGE MOTOR MOVEMENT
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
776 Reagent or • REAGENT IS NOT • PLACE REAGENT OR
Diluent Absent KEPT OR DILUENT IN THE
at position REAGENT BOTTLE REAGENT TRAY AT THE
IS MISPLACED REQUIRED POSITION.
• LLS CIRCUIT AND • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
ITS CONNECTOR RESOLVED, CALL
PROBLEM SERVICE ENGINEER
777 R1PT Syringe • WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error ENTRY REAGENT 1 VOLUME IN
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE
Shorted during NOT FUNCTIONING DRY IT
Reagent Pickup CORRECTLY • REMOVE THE ARM
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
20-67

ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error at OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
Reagent • R1PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
position ASSEMBLY AND HITTING AT THE EDGE OF
• ANY OTHER
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
Reagent • STEP ARM CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP
Dispense AND ITS AND DOWN BY AND MAKE
20-68

INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
786 Reagent 1 • REAGENT IS NOT • PLACE THE REAGENT IN
Absent at pos. KEPT OR THE REAGENT TRAY AT
REAGENT BOTTLE THE REQUIRED
IS MISPLACED POSITION.
PROBLEM SERVICE ENGINEER
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE
789 R1PT Probe • R1 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
Up/Down error CARD ANALYZER; MOVE
• STEP TRAY CARD REAGENT 1 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Inner Rotation CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
20-69

<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
Outer Rotation CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTING THE
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
822 R1PT Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
20-70
FAILS, CALL SERVICE

ENGINEER
823 R1PT Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
832 R1PT Up error • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
833 R1PT Up error • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
20-71

ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
trough Rotation AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
851 R1 Arm • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Misaligned SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
during Down • STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Movement. AND ITS HAND AND MAKE SURE
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
852 R1 Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
Error. • STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
OBSTRUCTING THE
20-72

GIVE <INITIALIZE> AND <
DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
853 R1 arm Down • R1PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R1PT
Due to • STEP ARM CARD ARM UP AND DOWN BY
RCT/ASP AND ITS HAND AND MAKE SURE
rotating. CONNECTOR THAT NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
•IF THE INITIALIZATION
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
854 R1 Arm VOD • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Error Due to OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
Obstacle in R1 • R1PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
Arm Path. ASSEMBLY AND HITTING AT THE EDGE OF
• ANY OTHER
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
• IF THE PROBELM IS NOT
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
855 R1 Syringe • POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
20-73

<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
857 R1 Syringe • WRONG VOLUME • MAKE SURE THAT THE
Volume Error. ENTRY REAGENT 1 VOLUME IN
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE
858 R1 arm Down • R1PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 1
Movement Error OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT
Due to obstacle OPTOS THROUGH [SERVICE
in R1 arm path. • R1PT PROBE CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
PROBE CALIBRATION
AND ITS
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 1
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
859 R1 Arm Probe • R1 LLS PCB IS • CLEAN THE PROBE AND
Shorted Error. NOT FUNCTIONING DRY IT.
CORRECTLY •REMOVE THE ARM
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS.
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
20-74

ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
864 R1PT • R1PT OBSTACLE • REMOVE THE COVER OF
Rotational Error OPTO R1PT THE R1PT ARM AND
during PROBE ASSEMBLY CHECK AND CLEAN
Initialization due AND ITS SPRING OBSTACLE OPTO
to Obstacle in ACTION • CHECK R1PT PROBE
R1PT Path SPRING AND ITS TOTAL
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
874 R1PT • R1PT OBSTACLE • REMOVE THE COVER OF
Rotational Error OPTO R1PT THE R1PT ARM AND
during PROBE ASSEMBLY CHECK AND CLEAN
Initialization due AND ITS SPRING OBSTACLE OPTO
to Obstacle in ACTION • CHECK R1PT PROBE
R1PT Path SPRING AND ITS TOTAL
ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
R2PT 922 R2PT Down • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SIGNAL ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
20-75
ENGINEER
923 R2PT Down • R2PT POS1 OPTO • INITIALIZE RGT AND RCT
Error due to SIGNALS AND TRY THE SAME
RGT/RCT • RGT/RCT TRAY ACTION
Rotating ARE ROTATING OR • SWITCH OFF AND
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
924 Obstacle in • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 2
R2PT Path OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT
during Down OPTOS THROUGH [SERVICE
Movement • R2PT PROBE CHECK]. IF IT IS HITTING
ACTION OR ANY ALIGN THE PROBE USING
OBSTACLE LIKE CALIBRATE FACILITY
BOTTLE LID • REMOVE THE COVER OF
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
926 R2PT Down • R2 PROBE GOES • PLACE REAGENT IN THE
Error due to DOWN BUT REAGENT TRAY AT THE
Reagent Absent DOESN’T FIND LLS REQUIRED POSITION
SIGNAL DUE TO • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
PROBLEM IN LLS ERROR, CALL SERVICE
CARD OR ITS ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
• REAGENT
ABSENT
932 R2PT Up • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Movement Error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
20-76
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
933 R2PT Arm Up • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Error SIGNALS ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
OBSTRUCTING THE
STEPPER MOTOR
[SERVICE CHECK:
<UP > COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Movement Error • STEP-TRAY CARD REAGENT 2 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
UP/DOWN MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
20-77

Error during OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
954 R2PT Obstacle • R2PT OBSTACLE • CHECK THE REAGENT 2
Error during OPTO AND ARM ARM ALIGNMENT AT
Initialization OPTOS TROUGH POSITION. IF IT
• R2PT PROBE IS HITTING AT THE EDGE
ITS SPRING ALIGN THE PROBE
ACTION • REMOVE THE COVER OF
• STEP ARM CARD THE REAGENT 2 ARM AND
AND ITS CHECK AND CLEAN
CONNECTOR OBSTACLE OPTO
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
Initialization. • STEP ARM CARD REAGENT 2 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
960 R2PT Link • R2PT POS1 OPTO • SWITCH OFF THE
Halted due to SIGNAL ANALYZER; ROTATE R2PT
20-78

CONNECTOR ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND • THEN SWITCH ON THE
ROTATION INSTRUMENT; GO TO
STEPPER MOTOR [SERVICE CHECK:
AND ITS REAGENT 2 ARM] MENU;
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
962 R2PT Link • R2PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
Halted due to OPTO AND ARM ANALYZER; MOVE R2PT
Up/Down OPTOS ARM UP AND DOWN BY
Movement Error • R2PT PROBE HAND AND MAKE SURE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
964 R2PT Link • R2PT OBSTACLE • REMOVE THE COVER OF
Halted due to OPTO AND ARM THE R2PT ARM AND
Obstacle in OPTOS CHECK AND CLEAN
R2PT Path • R2PT PROBE OBSTACLE OPTO
ASSEMBLY AND • CHECK R2PT PROBE
ITS SPRING SPRING AND ITS TOTAL
ACTION ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
966 R2PT Link • REAGENT • PLACE REAGENT IN THE
Halted due to ABSENT REAGENT TRAY AT THE
Reagent Absent • LLS CIRCUIT AND REQUIRED POSITION
ITS CONNECTOR • IF STILL IT IS GIVING
PROBLEM ERROR, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Pickup AND ITS SURE THAT NOTHING IS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
20-79

<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
971 R2PT Up/ Down • R2PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
972 R2PT Down • R2PT OBSTACLE • SWITCH OFF THE
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error during OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
Reagent Pickup • R2PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ACTION OR ALIGN THE PROBE USING
MISALIGNMENT OF THE CALIBRATE FACILITY
ARM • REMOVE THE COVER OF
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO
•CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
20-80
•CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Reagent Pickup • STEP ARM CARD REAGENT 2 SYRINGE UP
OBSTRUCTING THE
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
976 Reagent Absent • REAGENT IS NOT • PLACE REAGENT IN THE
for R2 KEPT OR REAGENT TRAY AT THE
REAGENT BOTTLE REQUIRED POSITION
IS MISPLACED • IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE
COVER AND CHECK FOR
LEAKAGE OF TUBINGS
ROTATION
• UP/DOWN AND
<ROTATE> COMMANDS
OR ROTATION FAILS,
20-81

ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
ACTION MOVEMENT
STEPPER MOTOR
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
Error at Cuvette OPTO ARM ALIGNMENT, IN
• R2PT PROBE [SERVICE CHECK]. IF IT IS
ACTION OR ALIGN THE PROBE USING
MISALIGNMENT OF THE CALIBRATE FACILITY
ARM • REMOVE THE COVER OF
CHECK AND CLEAN
OBSTACLE OPTO.
• CHECK REAGENT 2
TOTAL ASSEMBLY
RESOLVED, CALL
SERVICE ENGINEER
Reagent REAGENT 2 SYRINGE UP
20-82
Dispense • STEP ARM CARD AND DOWN BY AND MAKE

MOVEMENT
• SYRINGE MOTOR
INSTRUMENT; GO TO
[SERVICE CHECK:
<INITIALIZE> AND
<UP/DOWN> COMMANDS
OR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL SERVICE
ENGINEER
986 Reagent 2 • REAGENT IS NOT • PLACE THE REAGENT IN
Absent at KEPT OR THE REAGENT TRAY AT
Position REAGENT BOTTLE THE REQUIRED
IS MISPLACED POSITION.
SERVICE ENGINEER
TEST PARAMETERS OF
THE APPLICATION
SOFTWARE IS WITHIN
RANGE
20-83
20.1.1.2. Error Log

1. This sub menu displays the list of errors that occurred in the machine. This
data is generally useful for service/diagnostic purposes. One can enter this
screen by clicking on Reports > Error Log button. The following screen is
displayed:
Figure 20-1. Error log screen

2. The user can select the date range by changing the From and To Date.
3. The user can select operation (Service, Maintenance, Run or All operations)
during which the errors occurred.
4. Click on Show button to view all the errors.
5. Use Error Code drop down list to filter the Error list for a specific Error code
6. In the grid following are the different fields present:
a. Date - Date and Time of the occurrence of the error
b. Batch No - During run, if there was any error then in which batch it
occurred
c. Error Code – Displays the error code to identify the type of error
occurred.
20-84
d. Description - Description of the error occurred

e. Action - Action taken on the error occurrence is displayed in this
column.
The column “Action” represents the severity of the error, which is as
follows:
Pause-P states that the sampling will be paused on occurrence of such
errors during run. User may take corrective action and resume sampling
by clicking on the Resume button from Status Monitor.
Pause-R states that the sampling will be paused on occurrence of such
errors during run. On occurrence of such errors, resume sampling in
same batch is not possible. Once the results of all the tests in progress
are declared, the batch run will stop. When the batch run is completed,
user should take corrective action and then start the run again.
STOP states that the analyzer will stop the batch run immediately on
occurrence of such errors.
Errors having blank Action states that they are warnings
f. To print the details of the error log, user can click on PRINT button.
Use EXPORT button to save the records in the excel sheet. On clicking, the details
will be automatically copied in the excel sheet and the file is saved in the particular
location. The location will be displayed in the Indication text box
20.1.1.3. Measurement Result Error Flags

The measurement result flags printed out together with the measurement result
are shown in the following list.
Serial Flags Cause
Number
1 # This flag is issued to indicate that the result obtained is from a
rerun. This flag is issued for all rerun results
2 ~ When Linearity Extension Logic method is used to reduce the
measurement range to match absorbance range setting, this
flag should be given
3 F This flag is used to indicate that correlation correction has
been used to calculate the final result. That is, this flag is
issued if in the equation Y = aX + b, a is not equal to 1 or b is
not equal to zero.
4 -1SD This flag is issued with control results to indicate that the result
is below 1SD limit
5 +1SD This flag is issued with control results to indicate that the result
is above 1SD limit
is below 2SD limit
is above 2SD limit
20-85
is below 3SD limit
is above 3SD limit
10 NO CAL This flag is issued with patient or control result and indicates
that something is wrong with the calibration table. The
calibration table needs to be checked and corrected to
calculate a result (e.g., no calibration is present or number of
standards provided for multipoint calibration is less than
required.
11 ?SD This flag is issued with control result and indicates that the
target Mean and SD values have not been defined in Quality
Control screen for the control. Therefore, flags such as
“±1SD”, “±2SD”, “±3SD” cannot be given
12 V-D This flag is issued with patient results and indicates a
Decreased volume run
13 V-I This flag is issued with patient results and indicates a
Increased volume run
14 MONO This flag is issued with patient and control results when, for
the concerned test, the absorbance’s of the calibrators are not
changing monotonically with the concentration of the
calibrators in the calibration table.
15 PD This flag is issued with blank, patient, calibrator and control
results to indicate that the sample was prediluted
16 P* This flag is issued with patient and control serum results to
indicate that prozone (antigen excess) has occurred.
17 TEC-L Lower technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance
slope is lower than the set minimum technical limit.
18 TEC-H Upper technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance
slope is higher than the set maximum technical limit.
19 RANGH
1. This flag is issued with patient and control serum results to
indicate that the absorbance of the sample is higher than the
absorbance of the highest concentration calibrator in the
calibration table for increasing direction test.
2. This flag is also issued with patient and control serum
results if the absorbance of the sample is lower than the
absorbance of the highest concentration calibrator in the
calibration table for decreasing direction test.
20 RANGL 1. This flag is issued with patient and control serum results to
indicate that the absorbance of the sample is lower than the
absorbance of the blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) in
the calibration table for increasing direction test.
2. This flag is also issued with patient and control serum
results if the absorbance of the sample is higher than the
absorbance of blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) for a
decreasing direction test.
21 H Measured value is larger than upper limit set for normal value
range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
22 L Measured value is smaller than lower limit set for normal value
range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
20-86
23 CALC! Calculation Item calculation does not take place for any of the
following reasons
1. Denominator is 0 (zero) in the process of calculation for
compensation.
2. The test to be used for Calculation Item has not been
measured yet.
3. Any test to be used for Calculation Item has data/calibration
alarms (such as Chk Calib)
4. Any test to be used for Calculation Item errors (S*, R1* etc)
24 ABSLIM This flag is issued for End-Point Chemistries and Rate A
chemistries (For Rate-Chemistries, this flag will be issued
when Technical limit field is set) .In this case Extension Logic
will be not be performed
25 PANL Low Panic value error. This flag is issued with a sample result
to indicate that the patient result is lower than the programmed
Panic Limit Min. ISE tests too will be sent for a rerun
26 PANH High Panic value error. This flag is issued with a sample result
to indicate that the patient result is higher than the
programmed Panic Limit Max. ISE tests too will be sent for a
rerun
27 LINxx Linearity abnormal (checked only for Rate A and Rate B
assays). When the reaction during measurement points M2S
and M2E is non-linear beyond the set limit for linearity of
reaction this flag is given and the percent linearity of reaction
is indicated by a two digit number xx after “LIN”.
28 Lim0 This flag is applicable for Rate Chemistries, only during the
extension logic and when Reaction Absorbance Limit is
present. If there are no points available for calculation, then
this flag is issued
present. If there is only one point available for calculation, then
this flag is issued
present. If there are 2 points available for calculation, then this
flag is issued
31 ??? This flag is issued when the denominator becomes zero
during calculation or an overflow error occurs in logarithmic or
exponential calculation
32 Rgt Abs This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is lower than
Min the programmed Reagent Absorbance Min
33 Rgt Abs This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is greater
Max than the programmed Reagent Absorbance Min
34 CD This flag indicates that a clot has been detected during
sampling for that test. The result “NA” is associated with the
flag.
35 @TMP This flag is issued when the RCT temperature was out of
range while the measurement was in process.
36 TO This flag indicates Time Out while receiving result from the
20-87
machine.
37 Cal* This flag is issued with the patient and control results to
indicate that the results are being calibrated with previous
calibration data.
38 CAL** This flag is issued to indicate the result with Un-Calibrated
Reagent.
39 EVH Extrapolation % is set in system parameters
This flag is issued when sample result is higher than the conc.
of the highest calibrator then this flag is attached to the patient
result.
40 EVL Extrapolation % is set in system parameters
This flag is issued when sample result is lower than the conc.
of the Lowest calibrator then this flag is attached to the patient
result
41 R1? /R2? This flag is issued with the results when test is performed with
the over-filled reagent volume during run. In this condition, the
result will be declared with NA.
42 D? This flag is issued with the result when the test is performed
with overfilled Diluent or Urine ISE Diluent volume during run.
In this condition, the result will be declared with NA
43 COMM* This flag is issued with the results in the following cases:
 Absorbance of Reading Area (M1S-M1E, M2S-M2E) is
lost
 Absorbance after Reagent 1 addition is lost
 Absorbance after Reagent 2 addition is lost for 2-
Reagent chemistry.
In this condition, the results will be declared with NA.
44 W* During carry over pair process, if the Detergent Wash/Reagent
Wash solution is not found on Reagent Tray, VOD error or any
other error is occurred (during wash operation), then this flag
is issued with the result.
45 N! This flag is issued to patient results having a negative value.
Negative results can be sent to host and also for a re-run
based on user selection. If "Print Negative Result" checkbox is
unchecked in System Parameters, then in this condition,
negative test result will be printed as zero in Patient Report
and N! Flag will be printed only if “Hide Flags” option is not
selected during printing.
46 LV! This flag is issued when, during RUN the measured volume in
the fresh or used reagent bottle is below the tolerance of the
last known level.
47 DA This flag is issued when, test affected due to dome opened

abruptly (level 2) and ARM movement is stopped.
20-88
21. Appendix
21.1. TBM Image Installation for Windows Embedded 7
This section explains you the procedure of installing the TBM image (Windows
Embedded 7 Operating System) into the analyzer PC.
The analyzer PC comes with preinstalled TBM image.
For any reason, if the TBM image is not installed or you want to upgrade the
existing operating system (OS) into TBM image, please read the following
information carefully for installing the TBM image to analyzer PC.
21.1.1. Scenario
There could be two scenarios under installing the TBM image:
 New (Clean Installation)
 Upgrade/ Reinstall
21.1.1.1. New (Clean Installation)

It is the first installation of TBM image on a fresh computer having no data.
In this installation, the TBM image setup will clean the entire hard disk and create
two drives that is C and D drive, with C drive as the active primary partition. In this
case, it will delete all the existing data and OS. Therefore, this type of
installation must be used exclusively on newly acquired PC.
21.1.1.2. Upgrade/Re-installation
It is kind of an upgrade installation in which the analyzer PC already has some
operating system (for example: Windows XP, Windows 7 or previous TBM image)
installed. In this case, the TBM image setup will only format the C: drive and install
the TBM image on the same. This type of installation must be used if you want
to install TBM image on C: drive but want to keep the data on other drives
untouched.
21.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC

The installation procedure should be performed by the trained
service engineer. Improper installation may result in loss of
data.
Before we start installing the TBM image, you must verify that the analyzer PC
allows booting from DVD by checking the boot options.
To check the boot options:
21-1
1. Restart the PC and continuously press F12 (or key that is mentioned on the
screen to go to boot menu) to go to boot menu. Select system setup in the
boot menu to find all the options for the system setup.
2. Find the boot sequence option in the system setup and make sure that the
sequence of boot for CD-ROM is higher than hard drive.
3. If any changes are made to the existing sequence, click Apply to save the
changes and restart the PC.
21.1.2.1. Installing TBM image - New (Clean Installation)

In this installation, all the existing data on target computer will be
deleted and clean installation of TBM image will be performed.
Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer
PC:
1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and restart
the PC.
2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As
suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered.
3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
Loading Windows... progress bar message on the screen.
4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window i.e.
X:\Windows\System32>.
5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can
start the TBM setup.
(Refer section 21.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the
DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter
and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS).
6. Type the appropriate DVD drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the
DVD drive.
For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command
and press Enter key.
X:\Windows\System32> E:
7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and press
Enter key.
TBMSetupWithClean
This will delete all the data from the PC.
A message will be asked to confirm the TBM image installation.
21-2
Type y for yes to continue with the installation or type n to cancel the
installation.
On clicking n, the installation will be canceled and the command prompt will
be displayed.
8. After confirmation, it will clean the entire hard disk and then create two
partitions i.e. C and D drive with C drive size as 35 GB approximately, and
the remaining as D drive. It will then start applying the TBM image on the
PC. This process may take few minutes depending on the configuration of
PC.
9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message
for the same will be provided on the screen and then the target computer will
restart automatically as shown below.
21-3
10. After restart, it might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and
let the PC continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the
boot DVD out.
11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again.
12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click
Next button.
13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image
setup on the target computer.
TBM setup image contains driver for specific hardware
configuration, especially for Network Interface and Display. If
the analyzer PC has different hardware components, you may
need to install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s
motherboard utility CD.
21.1.2.2. Installing TBM image - Upgrade/Reinstall

Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer
PC:
1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and then re-
start the computer.
2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As
suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered.
3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
Loading Windows... Progress bar message on the screen.
4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window that is
5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can
start the TBM setup.
(Refer section 21.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the
DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter
and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS)
6. Type the appropriate drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the DVD
drive.
For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command
and press Enter key
X:\Windows\System32> E:
Be absolutely sure about the drive where you want to install the
TBM Image. Next step will format the provided drive and all data
on that drive will be lost.
21-4
7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and
press Enter key.
TBMSetup
A message will be asked to type the OS drive letter followed by colon.
For example, if C is the OS drive letter then type C: in the command
prompt and press Enter key. If you do not want to continue with the
installation then type exit and press Enter key.
After drive letter is entered in the command prompt, it will ask to confirm
the TBM image installation on the specified drive, type y for yes in the
command prompt to continue with the installation. If you do not want to
continue with the installation type n to exit and return to command prompt.
The same has been shown in the figure.
8. This will format the drive that was provided in step above and then start
installing the TBM image on the PC. This process may take few minutes
depending on the configuration of analyzer PC.
9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message
for the same will be provided on the screen and then the analyzer PC will
restart automatically as shown below.
21-5
10. It might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and let the PC
continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the boot DVD
out.
11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again.
12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click
Next button.
13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image
setup on the target computer.
NOTE:
1. In the upgrade installation scenario, if the previous
installation is Windows 7, it is possible that after
installing TBM image, it will show one extra volume
which was the hidden partition in previously
installed Windows 7 OS. The typical size of this
partition or volume is normally 100 to 200 MB.
2. TBM setup image contains driver for specific
hardware configuration, especially for Network
Interface and Display. If the analyzer PC has
different hardware components, you may need to
install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s
motherboard utility CD.
21.1.3. Identifying Various Drives

Use the following steps to find the DVD/OS drive letter from the command prompt
on the analyzer PC:
21-6
21.1.3.1. Finding the DVD Drive Letter

Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can
skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done:
1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image.
2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt
window.
It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file
menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives
information on the right for the analyzer PC. Note the drive letter for the
DVD drive.
For example, if it is showing CD Drive (E :) or DVD Drive (E :) then, it
means that the drive letter is E.
5. Note down the drive letter.
The following figure shows the graphical representation of the
same.
6. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD
drive letter.
21-7
21.1.3.2. Finding the Existing Operating System (OS) Drive Letter

Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can
skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done:
1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image
2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt
window.
It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file
menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives
information on the right for the analyzer PC. Browse each drive to find the
following folders:
 Program Files
 Windows
1. Generally these folders are expected to be in OS drive.
However, you will find these folders in multiple drives in
case the target computer has multiple operating systems.
2. These folders will not be available on a clean PC.
5. Note the drive letter containing the above folders because these folders are
expected to be in OS drive.
6. Note down the drive letter.
The following figure shows the graphical representation of the same.
21-8
7. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD drive
letter.
21.2. Troubleshooting
 System error “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)” during
installation
Refer section 21.2.1 SQL Server 2005 Configuration for detail.
 Unable to install MultiXL
Installer will not proceed with the MultiXL installation until user Uninstall
Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) from Control Panel > Add /
Remove Program. Incase, if it is already installed then the following screen
will appear (for Windows XP operating system only).
21-9
For Windows 7 operating system, the following screen may appear.

Please click on Run Program button to continue with the MultiXL
Installation.
Please refer Migration Guide for Database Engine MSDE to SQL Server
Express 2005 from the Installation CD.
21.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration

Use the following procedure if you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access
denied)” during Create Database operation or Backup operation in MultiXL
/Database Utility.
1. Click on Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > Configuration
Tools > SQL Server 2005 Manger.
21-10
2. In the right panel, select SQL Server (SQLEXPRESS) and choose

Properties option. The following screen will be displayed.
3. Change Built -In Account setting by choosing Local System from

highlighted drop down box.
4. Click on Apply button. This will display confirmation message for the
Account Change. Click on YES and wait for few minutes. This will restart
the SQL Server Services.
21-11
5. After applying the setting “Apply” button will be disabled. Then close all the
windows and continue with MultiXL or Database Utility.
21.3. Copy Data to External USB Storage

The option is provided to copy database backup, log files and exported report files
on USB storage device,
On Windows Embedded 7 as Operating System, the USB storage device is
blocked by default. To copy data to USB storage device, Log in as Administrator
(windows user login) and run MultiXL.
Procedure to copy data on USB storage device is as follows:
1. Login as Administrator on the analyzer PC and start MultiXL software. (This
step is only for Windows Embedded 7 as Operating System on PC. It is not
required for Windows XP and Windows 7 Professional).
2. Insert the USB device.
3. Go to Utility > Backup screen.
Following options are available to copy data on USB storage device. Select
any one, as appropriate:
 Only Database: Database full backup, .bkp file will be copied to USB.
 Only Log Files: Copy log files from the location C:\MultiXLLOG into
USB device.
21-12
 Both Log Files and Database: Both, Log files as well as Database as
per specified date, will be copied to the USB device. Following options
are visible on selection.
 Full
 Analysis Data Required for Date
 Folder To External Drive: The folder (along with its contents) selected
from the analyzer PC, termed as Source Location, will be copied to the
USB device.
 Exported Reports: System will copy all exported reports (present in
designated folder on hard disk drive) like Result Reprint, Test Statistics
etc. to USB device.
 Exported Reports: System will copy all exported reports like Result
Reprint, Test Statistics etc. to USB device.
4. User can select any one of the above options and select the Destination
Location i.e. the USB device.
5. Click the Copy Analysis Data button to copy data based on user selection.
On completion of data copy, message will be displayed as “Analysis data copied to
the destination location successfully” in the indication pane
21.3.1. Enabling Touch Screen

To enable touch screen, follow the procedure:
1. Logoff current session of PC and Login with user id as Administrator.
2. Copy folder Touch from CD to C:\.
3. Double-click Touch.bat from CD.
Command window will open and Installation will start automatically.
Installation process will take around approximately 10 to 15 seconds only.
After Installation, command window will close automatically.
4. Now restart the PC manually.
Windows update will be started during the shutdown operation.
5. After windows update, PC will restart once again.
6. Now TBM OS becomes touch enabled.
7. After this, install the Touch Driver provided along with Monitor as per
instruction given by the provider.
21-13
22. Revision History

Revision Date Revision Description Author
2011.01 15-July-2011 First Release PP
2012.01 19-March-2012 Updated as per latest hardware & software PP
changes (ASW v2012.01) and released.
2012.02 31-Oct-2012 Introduced section wise page numbering & PP
standardized Service Manual. Updated as per
latest hardware & software (ASW v2012.01.01)
changes. Added Windows Embedded Seven
installation, features and observations.
2013.01 6-August-2013 The following list of features updated in the PS
manual:
 Software Installation Procedure.
 Auto wash in maintenance.
 Added note for the user to view the
software version while installing &
upgrading software.
 Hibernate feature.
 Archive Data.
 Copy Data to USB storage.
 Technical specification information
updated in more details.
 Canmax barcode alignment procedure
 Electronics Circuit Description.
 Electrical Wiring Diagrams.
 BAFO setting for low speed procedure.
 Accessories checklist.
2014.01 25-June-2014 Following changes are updated in the manual: PS

 ISE clean operation in auto maintenance
shutdown.
 Flag list
 Concentration for AL & AC to perform
Auto Wash
 Electronics Circuit Description
 Electrical Wiring Diagrams
 Accessories checklist
2015.01 16 -Nov-2015 Following changes are updated in the manual: PS
 Electronics Circuit Description
 Electrical Wiring Diagrams
 Syringe with metal burkert valve
 Enabling touch screen feature
 Accessories checklist
22-1
Revision Date Revision Description Author

2017.01 14-March-2017 Following changes are updated in the manual: MB
 Electrical Wiring Diagrams
 Fuse Ratings Updated
 Accessories checklist updated
 Removed Tool Kit from Accessories List
 Added ISE Pack circuit diagram
 Flags List updated
 Error Codes updated
2018.01 29-Sept -2018 Following changes are updated in the manual: PS
 Updated Software installation procedure
 Added Team viewer installation
procedure.
 Added Test Loader Device.
 Connecting Test loader device to
analyzer PC
 Added IoT PCI-E modem pcb.
 Added troubleshooting guide.
 Added note for Auto span.
 Electronics Circuit descriptions
 Electrical Wiring descriptions.
 Accessories checklist list
2018.02 18-Dec-2018  Updated procedure of test loader device PS
connecting to analyzer PC.
2019.01 26-Dec-2019  Spec. updated for 64 bit OS PS

 Error messages for dome
 Flag list
 Warning labels
 Accessories check list
 Spares list
 Electrical Wiring diagrams
 Electronics Circuit descriptions
22-2
Contact Us
We welcome your feedback about the product. You can reach us at the following.
Address Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 – 73, 68219,

Mannheim, Germany
Phone 49-621- 8799770
Fax 49-621- 8799688
Website www.erbamannheim.com
Email sales@erbamannheim.com
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GMBH, Mallaustrasse 69 – 73, 68219, Mannheim, Germany

Service Manual For XL-300 With ISE-V2019.01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Service Manual For XL-300 With ISE-V2019.01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual For XL-300 With ISE-V2019.01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Document Version: 2019.01

Last Updated: December 26, 2019

Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GMBH, Mallaustrasse 69 – 73, 68219, Mannheim, Germany

Before servicing the analyzer, service engineer should:

1. Read and understand this manual.

2. Be trained by authorized person.

3. Be familiar with the operation of the analyzer.

Keep this manual in an easily accessible place.

Manufacturer is the copyright owner of this document.

This document cannot be modified, reproduced, translated, or transmitted in any form or

6.4.4. Test Loader Device Connecting to Analyzer PC ...................................................... 6-15

9.14. LLS PCB ELS52009R5 / ELS52010R4 ........................................................... 9-68

10.33. WDXLV201: R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with ELS52023R0.......................... 10-43

13.4. Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Syringe Maintenance ............................... 13-7

15.13. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack ................................................ 15-17

Icons Warning About

Warnings and Caution

Batch Code and Serial

Notes, Usage, Tips, and

1.1. Safety Instructions

Never touch patients' samples and analyzer components with

1.2. Warning Labels

On the 4-piece Top Cover Plates

On the top cover plates

On the Bio-hazardous waste can

On Waste Can (20 Liter)

On Cleaning Solution Can (10 Liter)

On DI Water Can (20 Liter)

3.1.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry

3.2. Sequence of Operation

3.2.1. Measurement Operation Table

4.1. General Specifications

4.1.1. Installation Conditions

4.1.2. Sampling Unit

4.1.3. Reagent Unit

Reagent Dispensing Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepping motor.

Outside washing solution: De-ionized water.

4.1.4. Reaction Unit

4.1.5. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit

4.1.6. Data Processing

Recalculation of results possible after modification in Calibration

4.1.7. Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Unit

4.1.8. Computer Specifications

The specification details are subject to change without notice.

4.2. Technical Features of the System

 32 positions on standard tray to accommodate 2 ml cups.

4.2.2. Other Features of the Analyzer

can select 12 available wavelengths, from 340 nm - 750 nm to cover the

4.3. Equipment Overview

4.3.2. Top View of the Analyzer with Main Components

4.3.3. Front View

4.3.4. Left Side View

4.3.5. Right Side View

4.3.6. Rear View of the Analyzer

5.2. Electrical Requirements

5.3. Site Requirement